Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
This product includes cryptographic software written/developed by: Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com) and Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB Inc.
1021 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would
create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal
injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures
are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product
standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and
ANSI C37.90.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1
Introduction..........................................................................37
This manual............................................................................................37
Intended audience..................................................................................37
Product documentation...........................................................................38
Product documentation set................................................................38
Document revision history.................................................................39
Related documents............................................................................39
Symbols and conventions.......................................................................40
Symbols.............................................................................................40
Document conventions......................................................................41
Section 2
Available functions..............................................................43
Main protection functions........................................................................43
Back-up protection functions..................................................................43
Control and monitoring functions............................................................45
Station communication...........................................................................49
Basic IED functions.................................................................................50
Section 3
Analog inputs.......................................................................53
Introduction.............................................................................................53
Operation principle..................................................................................53
Settings...................................................................................................54
Section 4
Section 5
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block...................................................................................68
Signals...............................................................................................68
Basic part for LED indication module......................................................69
Identification......................................................................................69
Function block...................................................................................69
Signals...............................................................................................69
Settings..............................................................................................70
LCD part for HMI function keys control module......................................71
Identification......................................................................................71
Function block...................................................................................71
Signals...............................................................................................71
Settings..............................................................................................71
Operation principle..................................................................................72
Local HMI...........................................................................................72
Display..........................................................................................72
LEDs.............................................................................................75
Keypad.........................................................................................75
LED....................................................................................................77
Functionality.................................................................................77
Status LEDs..................................................................................77
Indication LEDs............................................................................77
Function keys.....................................................................................86
Functionality.................................................................................86
Operation principle.......................................................................86
Section 6
Impedance protection..........................................................89
Five zone distance protection, quadrilateral and mho characteristic
ZQMPDIS (21)........................................................................................89
Identification......................................................................................89
Functionality(21)................................................................................89
Function block...................................................................................90
Signals...............................................................................................90
Settings..............................................................................................91
Operation principle............................................................................96
General.........................................................................................96
Full scheme measurement...........................................................97
Quadrilateral characteristic...........................................................98
Mho characteristic......................................................................106
Minimum operating current.........................................................118
Measuring principles...................................................................118
2
Technical Manual
Table of contents
CVT filter.....................................................................................120
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................120
Zone tripping logic......................................................................121
Technical data.................................................................................123
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic FDPSPDIS (21)..............................................................124
Identification....................................................................................124
Functionality....................................................................................125
Function block.................................................................................125
Signals.............................................................................................126
Settings............................................................................................127
Operation principle..........................................................................128
Phase-to-ground fault.................................................................130
Phase-to-phase fault..................................................................132
Three-phase faults......................................................................133
Load encroachment....................................................................134
Minimum operate currents..........................................................139
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................140
Technical data.................................................................................145
Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment for mho
FMPSPDIS (21)....................................................................................145
Identification....................................................................................145
Functionality....................................................................................145
Function block.................................................................................146
Signals.............................................................................................146
Settings............................................................................................147
Operation principle..........................................................................147
The phase selection function......................................................147
Technical data.................................................................................158
Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults
ZDARDIR (21D)....................................................................................158
Identification....................................................................................159
Functionality....................................................................................159
Function block.................................................................................159
Signals.............................................................................................159
Settings............................................................................................160
Operation principle..........................................................................160
Technical data.................................................................................163
Directional impedance quadrilateral and mho ZDNRDIR (21D)...........163
Identification....................................................................................163
3
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Functionality....................................................................................163
Function block.................................................................................164
Signals.............................................................................................164
Settings............................................................................................164
Monitored data.................................................................................165
Operation principle..........................................................................165
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ.........................................................168
Identification....................................................................................168
Functionality....................................................................................168
Function block.................................................................................168
Signals.............................................................................................169
Settings............................................................................................169
Operation principle..........................................................................170
Operation principle.....................................................................170
Technical data.................................................................................172
Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)..................................................173
Identification....................................................................................173
Functionality....................................................................................173
Function block.................................................................................173
Signals.............................................................................................173
Settings............................................................................................174
Operation principle..........................................................................175
Resistive reach in forward direction............................................177
Resistive reach in reverse direction............................................177
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction........................178
Basic detection logic...................................................................178
Operating and inhibit conditions.................................................180
Technical data.................................................................................181
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
ZCVPSOF.............................................................................................181
Identification....................................................................................181
Functionality....................................................................................181
Function block.................................................................................182
Signals.............................................................................................182
Settings............................................................................................182
Operation principle..........................................................................183
Technical data.................................................................................185
Section 7
Current protection..............................................................187
4
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Technical data.................................................................................210
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N).............210
Identification ...................................................................................211
Functionality....................................................................................211
Function block.................................................................................211
Signals.............................................................................................211
Settings............................................................................................212
Monitored data.................................................................................212
Operation principle..........................................................................212
Technical data.................................................................................212
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence
direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N).............................................................213
Identification ...................................................................................213
Functionality....................................................................................213
Function block.................................................................................214
Signals.............................................................................................215
Settings............................................................................................216
Monitored data.................................................................................218
Operation principle..........................................................................218
Operating quantity within the function........................................219
Internal polarizing.......................................................................220
External polarizing for ground-fault function...............................223
Base quantities within the protection..........................................223
Internal ground-fault protection structure....................................223
Four residual overcurrent steps..................................................223
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function...................................................................224
Second harmonic blocking element.................................................229
Technical data.................................................................................230
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE (67N)...................................................................................231
Identification....................................................................................231
Functionality....................................................................................231
Function block.................................................................................231
Signals.............................................................................................232
Settings............................................................................................232
Monitored data.................................................................................234
Operation principle .........................................................................234
Function inputs...........................................................................234
Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos .......235
6
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Function block.................................................................................261
Signals.............................................................................................261
Settings............................................................................................262
Monitored data.................................................................................263
Operation principle..........................................................................263
Technical data.................................................................................265
Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB).....................................................266
Identification ...................................................................................266
Functionality....................................................................................266
Function block.................................................................................266
Signals.............................................................................................267
Settings............................................................................................267
Monitored data.................................................................................267
Operation principle..........................................................................268
Technical data.................................................................................268
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD).....................................269
Identification ...................................................................................269
Functionality....................................................................................269
Function block.................................................................................269
Signals.............................................................................................270
Settings............................................................................................270
Monitored data.................................................................................271
Operation principle..........................................................................271
Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker.........................272
Unsymmetrical current detection................................................273
Technical data.................................................................................273
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46).............................................273
Identification....................................................................................273
Functionality....................................................................................274
Function block.................................................................................274
Signals.............................................................................................274
Settings............................................................................................274
Monitored data.................................................................................275
Operation principle..........................................................................275
Technical data.................................................................................276
Directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP
(32/37)..................................................................................................277
Functionality....................................................................................277
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)..........................277
Identification...............................................................................277
8
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block............................................................................277
Signals........................................................................................278
Settings.......................................................................................278
Monitored data............................................................................279
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37).........................279
Identification...............................................................................280
Function block............................................................................280
Signals........................................................................................280
Settings.......................................................................................281
Monitored data............................................................................282
Operation principle..........................................................................282
Low pass filtering........................................................................284
Technical data.................................................................................285
Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC (46).........286
Identification....................................................................................286
Functionality....................................................................................286
Function block.................................................................................287
Signals.............................................................................................287
Settings............................................................................................288
Monitored data.................................................................................289
Operation principle..........................................................................289
Technical data.................................................................................289
Section 8
Voltage protection.............................................................291
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................291
Identification....................................................................................291
Functionality....................................................................................291
Function block.................................................................................291
Signals.............................................................................................292
Settings............................................................................................292
Monitored data.................................................................................293
Operation principle..........................................................................293
Measurement principle...............................................................294
Time delay..................................................................................294
Blocking......................................................................................296
Design........................................................................................296
Technical data.................................................................................298
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59).................................298
Identification....................................................................................298
Functionality....................................................................................298
9
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block.................................................................................299
Signals.............................................................................................299
Settings............................................................................................300
Monitored data.................................................................................301
Operation principle..........................................................................301
Measurement principle...............................................................302
Time delay..................................................................................302
Blocking......................................................................................303
Design........................................................................................304
Technical data.................................................................................306
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............306
Identification....................................................................................306
Functionality....................................................................................306
Function block.................................................................................307
Signals.............................................................................................307
Settings............................................................................................308
Monitored data.................................................................................308
Operation principle..........................................................................308
Measurement principle...............................................................309
Time delay..................................................................................309
Blocking......................................................................................309
Design........................................................................................309
Technical data.................................................................................311
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)..................................................311
Identification....................................................................................311
Functionality....................................................................................311
Function block.................................................................................312
Signals.............................................................................................312
Settings............................................................................................312
Operation principle..........................................................................313
Technical data.................................................................................315
Section 9
Frequency protection.........................................................317
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................317
Identification....................................................................................317
Functionality....................................................................................317
Function block.................................................................................317
Signals.............................................................................................318
Settings............................................................................................318
Monitored data.................................................................................318
10
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Operation principle..........................................................................318
Measurement principle...............................................................319
Time delay..................................................................................319
Blocking......................................................................................320
Design........................................................................................320
Technical data.................................................................................320
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................321
Identification....................................................................................321
Functionality....................................................................................321
Function block.................................................................................321
Signals.............................................................................................322
Settings............................................................................................322
Monitored data.................................................................................322
Operation principle..........................................................................322
Measurement principle...............................................................323
Time delay..................................................................................323
Blocking......................................................................................324
Design........................................................................................324
Technical data.................................................................................325
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)............................325
Identification....................................................................................325
Functionality....................................................................................325
Function block.................................................................................326
Signals.............................................................................................326
Settings............................................................................................326
Operation principle..........................................................................327
Measurement principle...............................................................327
Time delay..................................................................................327
Design........................................................................................328
Technical data.................................................................................328
Table of contents
Section 11 Control...............................................................................347
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25).....................................................................................347
Identification....................................................................................347
Functionality....................................................................................347
Function block.................................................................................348
Signals.............................................................................................348
Settings............................................................................................350
Monitored data.................................................................................352
Operation principle..........................................................................353
Basic functionality.......................................................................353
Synchronism check....................................................................353
Synchronizing.............................................................................355
Energizing check........................................................................357
Fuse failure supervision..............................................................357
Voltage selection........................................................................358
Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double
busbars.......................................................................................358
12
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Functionality...............................................................................391
Function block............................................................................391
Signals........................................................................................392
Settings.......................................................................................393
Circuit breaker SXCBR....................................................................393
Signals........................................................................................393
Settings.......................................................................................394
Circuit switch SXSWI.......................................................................395
Signals........................................................................................395
Settings.......................................................................................396
Bay control QCBAY.........................................................................396
Identification ..............................................................................396
Functionality...............................................................................396
Function block............................................................................396
Signals........................................................................................397
Settings.......................................................................................397
Local remote LOCREM...................................................................397
Identification ..............................................................................397
Functionality...............................................................................397
Function block............................................................................398
Signals........................................................................................398
Settings.......................................................................................398
Local remote control LOCREMCTRL..............................................399
Identification ..............................................................................399
Functionality...............................................................................399
Function block............................................................................399
Signals........................................................................................399
Settings.......................................................................................400
Select release SELGGIO.................................................................400
Identification...............................................................................400
Function block............................................................................401
Signals........................................................................................401
Settings.......................................................................................402
Operation principle..........................................................................402
Switch controller SCSWI............................................................402
Bay control QCBAY....................................................................407
Local remote/Local remote control LOCREM/
LOCREMCTRL...........................................................................408
Interlocking...........................................................................................409
Functionality....................................................................................409
14
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Signals........................................................................................439
Settings.......................................................................................443
Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3).............................................443
Identification...............................................................................444
Functionality...............................................................................444
Function block............................................................................445
Logic diagrams...........................................................................447
Signals........................................................................................450
Settings.......................................................................................454
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................454
Identification...............................................................................454
Functionality...............................................................................454
Function block............................................................................456
Logic diagram.............................................................................457
Signals........................................................................................462
Settings.......................................................................................465
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................465
Identification...............................................................................465
Functionality...............................................................................465
Function block............................................................................467
Logic diagram.............................................................................468
Signals........................................................................................470
Settings.......................................................................................472
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.......................................................472
Identification...............................................................................472
Functionality...............................................................................472
Function block............................................................................472
Logic diagram.............................................................................472
Signals........................................................................................473
Settings.......................................................................................473
Operation principle..........................................................................473
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGGIO................................................................................................476
Identification....................................................................................476
Functionality....................................................................................477
Function block.................................................................................477
Signals.............................................................................................477
Settings............................................................................................479
Monitored data.................................................................................479
Operation principle..........................................................................479
16
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Functionality....................................................................................491
Function block.................................................................................492
Signals.............................................................................................492
Settings............................................................................................492
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103 I103GENCMD.......493
Functionality....................................................................................493
Function block.................................................................................493
Signals.............................................................................................494
Settings............................................................................................494
IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
I103POSCMD.......................................................................................494
Functionality....................................................................................494
Function block.................................................................................495
Signals.............................................................................................495
Settings............................................................................................495
Table of contents
Table of contents
Signals.............................................................................................526
Settings............................................................................................527
Operation principle..........................................................................527
Directional comparison logic function.........................................527
Fault current reversal logic.........................................................527
Weak-end infeed logic................................................................528
Technical data.................................................................................529
Section 13 Logic..................................................................................531
Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC (94).......................531
Identification....................................................................................531
Functionality....................................................................................531
Function block.................................................................................531
Signals.............................................................................................532
Settings............................................................................................532
Operation principle..........................................................................532
Technical data.................................................................................533
Tripping logic phase segregated output SPTPTRC 94.........................534
Identification....................................................................................534
Functionality....................................................................................534
Function block.................................................................................534
Signals.............................................................................................535
Settings............................................................................................535
Operation principle..........................................................................536
Technical data.................................................................................539
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO..................................................................539
Identification....................................................................................539
Functionality....................................................................................539
Function block.................................................................................540
Signals.............................................................................................540
Settings............................................................................................542
Operation principle..........................................................................542
Configurable logic blocks......................................................................543
Standard configurable logic blocks..................................................543
Functionality...............................................................................543
OR function block.......................................................................546
Inverter function block INVERTER.............................................547
PULSETIMER function block .....................................................548
Controllable gate function block GATE.......................................549
Exclusive OR function block XOR..............................................550
20
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Functionality....................................................................................565
Function block.................................................................................566
Signals.............................................................................................566
Settings............................................................................................567
Operation principle..........................................................................567
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
supervision TEIGGIO............................................................................567
Identification....................................................................................567
Functionality....................................................................................567
Function block.................................................................................568
Signals.............................................................................................568
Settings............................................................................................568
Operation principle..........................................................................569
Operation Accuracy....................................................................570
Memory storage..........................................................................571
Technical data.................................................................................571
Section 14 Monitoring..........................................................................573
Measurements......................................................................................573
Functionality....................................................................................573
Measurements CVMMXN................................................................574
Identification ..............................................................................574
Function block............................................................................575
Signals........................................................................................575
Settings.......................................................................................576
Monitored data............................................................................579
Phase current measurement CMMXU.............................................580
Identification ..............................................................................580
Function block............................................................................580
Signals........................................................................................580
Settings.......................................................................................581
Monitored data............................................................................582
Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU.................................582
Identification ..............................................................................582
Function block............................................................................582
Signals........................................................................................583
Settings.......................................................................................584
Monitored data............................................................................584
Current sequence component measurement CMSQI.....................585
Identification ..............................................................................585
22
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block............................................................................585
Signals........................................................................................585
Settings.......................................................................................586
Monitored data............................................................................587
Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI........................................588
Identification ..............................................................................588
Function block............................................................................588
Signals........................................................................................588
Settings.......................................................................................589
Monitored data............................................................................590
Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU..............................591
Identification ..............................................................................591
Function block............................................................................591
Signals........................................................................................591
Settings.......................................................................................592
Monitored data............................................................................593
Operation principle..........................................................................593
Measurement supervision..........................................................593
Measurements CVMMXN...........................................................597
Phase current measurement CMMXU........................................602
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU....................................................................603
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI........................................................................................603
Technical data.................................................................................603
Event Counter CNTGGIO.....................................................................604
Identification....................................................................................604
Functionality....................................................................................604
Function block.................................................................................604
Signals.............................................................................................605
Settings............................................................................................605
Monitored data.................................................................................605
Operation principle..........................................................................606
Reporting....................................................................................606
Technical data.................................................................................606
Function description..............................................................................607
Limit counter L4UFCNT...................................................................607
Introduction......................................................................................607
Principle of operation.......................................................................607
Design........................................................................................607
23
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Reporting....................................................................................609
Function block.................................................................................609
Signals.............................................................................................609
Settings............................................................................................610
Monitored data.................................................................................610
Technical data.................................................................................611
Disturbance report................................................................................611
Functionality....................................................................................611
Disturbance report DRPRDRE........................................................612
Identification...............................................................................612
Function block............................................................................612
Signals........................................................................................612
Settings.......................................................................................612
Monitored data............................................................................613
Analog input signals AxRADR.........................................................617
Identification...............................................................................617
Function block............................................................................617
Signals........................................................................................617
Settings.......................................................................................618
Analog input signals A4RADR.........................................................622
Identification...............................................................................622
Function block............................................................................622
Signals........................................................................................623
Settings.......................................................................................623
Binary input signals BxRBDR..........................................................627
Identification...............................................................................627
Function block............................................................................627
Signals........................................................................................628
Settings.......................................................................................628
Operation principle..........................................................................634
Disturbance information..............................................................636
Indications .................................................................................636
Event recorder ...........................................................................636
Sequential of events ..................................................................636
Trip value recorder ....................................................................637
Disturbance recorder .................................................................637
Fault locator................................................................................637
Time tagging...............................................................................637
Recording times..........................................................................637
Analog signals............................................................................638
24
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Binary signals.............................................................................640
Trigger signals............................................................................640
Post Retrigger.............................................................................641
Technical data.................................................................................642
Indications.............................................................................................642
Functionality....................................................................................642
Function block.................................................................................643
Signals.............................................................................................643
Input signals...............................................................................643
Operation principle..........................................................................643
Technical data.................................................................................644
Event recorder .....................................................................................644
Functionality....................................................................................644
Function block.................................................................................645
Signals.............................................................................................645
Input signals...............................................................................645
Operation principle..........................................................................645
Technical data.................................................................................646
Sequential of events.............................................................................646
Functionality....................................................................................646
Function block.................................................................................646
Signals.............................................................................................646
Input signals...............................................................................646
Operation principle..........................................................................646
Technical data.................................................................................647
Trip value recorder................................................................................647
Functionality....................................................................................647
Function block.................................................................................647
Signals.............................................................................................648
Input signals...............................................................................648
Operation principle..........................................................................648
Technical data.................................................................................648
Disturbance recorder............................................................................649
Functionality....................................................................................649
Function block.................................................................................649
Signals.............................................................................................649
Settings............................................................................................649
Operation principle..........................................................................649
Memory and storage...................................................................650
Technical data.................................................................................652
25
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Table of contents
Table of contents
Operation counter.......................................................................687
Accumulation of Iyt......................................................................687
Remaining life of the circuit breaker...........................................689
Circuit breaker spring charged indication...................................690
Gas pressure supervision...........................................................691
Technical data.................................................................................692
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS......................................692
Functionality....................................................................................692
Function block.................................................................................693
Signals.............................................................................................694
Settings............................................................................................694
Measurands user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR.....................................................................................695
Functionality....................................................................................695
Function block.................................................................................695
Signals.............................................................................................695
Settings............................................................................................696
Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR.................696
Functionality....................................................................................696
Function block.................................................................................697
Signals.............................................................................................697
Settings............................................................................................697
Function status ground-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF...................697
Functionality....................................................................................697
Function block.................................................................................698
Signals.............................................................................................698
Settings............................................................................................698
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT......................................................................................698
Functionality....................................................................................698
Function block.................................................................................699
Signals.............................................................................................699
Settings............................................................................................700
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED..............................................701
Functionality....................................................................................701
Function block.................................................................................701
Signals.............................................................................................701
Settings............................................................................................701
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV.........................702
Functionality....................................................................................702
28
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Function block.................................................................................702
Signals.............................................................................................702
Settings............................................................................................702
Status for user defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 I103USRDEF.....703
Functionality....................................................................................703
Function block.................................................................................703
Signals.............................................................................................704
Settings............................................................................................704
Section 15 Metering............................................................................705
Pulse counter PCGGIO........................................................................705
Identification....................................................................................705
Functionality....................................................................................705
Function block.................................................................................705
Signals.............................................................................................706
Settings............................................................................................706
Monitored data.................................................................................707
Operation principle..........................................................................707
Technical data.................................................................................708
Energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR..........................709
Identification....................................................................................709
Functionality....................................................................................709
Function block.................................................................................709
Signals.............................................................................................710
Settings............................................................................................711
Monitored data.................................................................................712
Operation principle..........................................................................712
Technical data.................................................................................713
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................720
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV................................................720
Identification....................................................................................720
Function block.................................................................................721
Signals.............................................................................................721
Settings............................................................................................722
GOOSE function block to receive a double point value
GOOSEDPRCV....................................................................................723
Identification....................................................................................723
Functionality....................................................................................723
Function block.................................................................................723
Signals.............................................................................................723
Settings............................................................................................724
Operation principle .........................................................................724
GOOSE function block to receive an integer value
GOOSEINTRCV...................................................................................724
Identification....................................................................................724
Functionality....................................................................................725
Function block.................................................................................725
Signals.............................................................................................725
Settings............................................................................................725
Operation principle .........................................................................725
GOOSE function block to receive a measurand value
GOOSEMVRCV....................................................................................726
Identification....................................................................................726
Functionality....................................................................................726
Function block.................................................................................726
Signals.............................................................................................727
Settings............................................................................................727
Operation principle .........................................................................727
GOOSE function block to receive a single point value
GOOSESPRCV....................................................................................728
Identification....................................................................................728
Functionality....................................................................................728
Function block.................................................................................728
Signals.............................................................................................728
Settings............................................................................................729
Operation principle .........................................................................729
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...........................................729
Functionality....................................................................................729
30
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................730
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication..........................731
Functionality ...................................................................................731
Principle of operation.......................................................................732
Function block.................................................................................733
Setting parameters..........................................................................734
Activity logging parameters ACTIVLOG...............................................734
Activity logging ACTIVLOG.............................................................734
Settings............................................................................................734
Generic security application component AGSAL..................................735
Generic security application AGSAL...............................................735
Security events on protocols SECALARM............................................736
Security alarm SECALARM.............................................................736
Signals.............................................................................................736
Settings............................................................................................736
Table of contents
Identification...............................................................................745
Settings.......................................................................................746
Time system, summer time ends DSTEND.....................................746
Identification...............................................................................746
Settings.......................................................................................747
Time zone from UTC TIMEZONE....................................................747
Identification...............................................................................747
Settings.......................................................................................747
Time synchronization via IRIG-B.....................................................748
Identification...............................................................................748
Settings.......................................................................................748
Operation principle..........................................................................748
General concepts.......................................................................748
Real-time clock (RTC) operation................................................750
Synchronization alternatives.......................................................751
Technical data.................................................................................752
Parameter setting group handling.........................................................752
Functionality....................................................................................752
Setting group handling SETGRPS..................................................753
Identification...............................................................................753
Settings.......................................................................................753
Parameter setting groups ACTVGRP..............................................753
Identification...............................................................................753
Function block............................................................................753
Signals........................................................................................754
Settings.......................................................................................754
Operation principle..........................................................................754
Test mode functionality TESTMODE....................................................755
Identification....................................................................................755
Functionality....................................................................................756
Function block.................................................................................756
Signals.............................................................................................756
Settings............................................................................................757
Operation principle..........................................................................757
Change lock function CHNGLCK .........................................................758
Identification....................................................................................758
Functionality....................................................................................758
Function block.................................................................................759
Signals.............................................................................................759
Settings............................................................................................759
32
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Operation principle..........................................................................759
IED identifiers TERMINALID.................................................................760
Identification....................................................................................760
Functionality....................................................................................760
Settings............................................................................................760
Product information ..............................................................................761
Identification....................................................................................761
Functionality....................................................................................761
Settings............................................................................................761
Primary system values PRIMVAL.........................................................762
Identification....................................................................................762
Functionality....................................................................................762
Settings............................................................................................762
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................762
Functionality....................................................................................762
Identification....................................................................................763
Function block.................................................................................763
Signals.............................................................................................764
Settings............................................................................................765
Operation principle .........................................................................767
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM....................................................771
Identification....................................................................................771
Functionality....................................................................................771
Function block.................................................................................771
Signals.............................................................................................771
Settings............................................................................................772
Operation principle..........................................................................772
Global base values GBASVAL.............................................................772
Identification....................................................................................773
Functionality....................................................................................773
Settings............................................................................................773
Authority check ATHCHCK...................................................................773
Identification....................................................................................773
Functionality....................................................................................774
Settings............................................................................................774
Operation principle..........................................................................775
Authorization handling in the IED...............................................775
Authority management AUTHMAN.......................................................776
Identification....................................................................................776
AUTHMAN.......................................................................................776
33
Technical Manual
Table of contents
Settings............................................................................................777
FTP access with password FTPACCS.................................................777
Identification....................................................................................777
FTP access with SSL FTPACCS.....................................................777
Settings............................................................................................778
Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................778
Identification....................................................................................778
Functionality....................................................................................778
Function block.................................................................................778
Signals.............................................................................................779
Settings............................................................................................779
Operation principle..........................................................................779
Denial of service...................................................................................779
Functionality....................................................................................779
Denial of service, frame rate control for front port DOSFRNT.........780
Identification...............................................................................780
Function block............................................................................780
Signals........................................................................................780
Settings.......................................................................................780
Monitored data............................................................................781
Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1 port DOSLAN1........781
Identification...............................................................................781
Function block............................................................................781
Signals........................................................................................782
Settings.......................................................................................782
Monitored data............................................................................782
Operation principle..........................................................................782
Table of contents
Section 22 Glossary............................................................................839
35
Technical Manual
36
Section 1
Introduction
Section 1
Introduction
1.1
This manual
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.
1.2
Intended audience
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in
normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the
IEDs. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in
handling electronic equipment.
37
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
Decommissioning
Deinstalling & disposal
Maintenance
Operation
Commissioning
1.3.1
Engineering
Product documentation
1.3
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual
Commissioning manual
Operation manual
Application manual
Technical manual
Communication
protocol manual
IEC07000220-3-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V3 EN
Figure 1:
The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the
various tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions
on how to set up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The
manual also recommends a sequence for the engineering of protection and control
functions, LHMI functions as well as communication engineering for IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 61850 and DNP 3.0.
The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual
provides procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are
organized in the chronological order in which the IED should be installed.
The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The
manual can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance
38
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
during the testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external
circuitry and energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as
verifying settings by secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing
an IED in a substation which is not in service. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be commissioned. The relevant
procedures may be followed also during the service and maintenance activities.
The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and
setting of the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to
view calculated and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.
The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted
per function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical
protection function can be used. The manual can also provides assistance for
calculating settings.
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists
function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and
technical data, sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference
during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal
service.
The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported
by the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.
The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to
the IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding
communication protocol manual.
1.3.2
1.3.3
History
First release
Related documents
Documents related to REL650
Identity number
Application manual
Technical manual
Commissioning manual
Product Guide
1MRG006806
39
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
Identity number
Engineering manual
Operation manual
Installation manual
MICS
PICS
PIXIT
1.4
1.4.1
Symbols
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which
could result in electrical shock.
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result
in personal injury.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
40
Technical Manual
Section 1
Introduction
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your
project or how to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand
that under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result
in degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important
that the user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.
1.4.2
Document conventions
Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The
glossary also contains definitions of important terms.
Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push
button icons.
and
.
For example, to navigate between the options, use
HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press
.
Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
Dimensions are provided both in inches and mm. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in mm.
41
Technical Manual
42
Section 2
Available functions
Section 2
Available functions
2.1
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
ANSI
REL650
IEC 61850 or
Function name
ZQMPDIS
21
FDPSPDIS
21
FMPSPDIS
21
ZDARDIR
21
ZDNRDIR
21
01
01
Impedance protection
PPLPHIZ
ZMRPSB
68
ZCVPSOF
Line Distance
PHPIOC
50
01
SPTPIOC
50
01
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Function description
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
ANSI
REL650
IEC 61850 or
Function name
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
2.2
Current protection
1
1
Section 2
Available functions
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
ANSI
REL650
IEC 61850 or
Function name
OC4SPTOC
51/67
01
EFPIOC
50N
01
EF4PTOC
51N/67N
01
SDEPSDE
67N
01
UC2PTUC
37
01
LCPTTR
26
01
LFPTTR
26
01
CCRBRF
50BF
02
CSPRBRF
50BF
01
STBPTOC
50STB
Stub protection
01
CCRPLD
52PD
02
BRCPTOC
46
01
GUPPDUP
37
01
GOPPDOP
32
01
DNSPTOC
46
01
2
1
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV
27
01
OV2PTOV
59
01
ROV2PTOV
59N
01
LOVPTUV
27
01
Frequency protection
SAPTUF
81
Underfrequency function
02
SAPTOF
81
Overfrequency function
02
SAPFRC
81
02
44
Technical Manual
Section 2
Available functions
2.3
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650
SESRSYN
25
02
SMBRREC
79
02
STBRREC
79
01
SLGGIO
15
15
15
15
VSGGIO
20
20
20
20
DPGGIO
16
16
16
16
SPC8GGIO
AUTOBITS
I103CMD
I103IEDCMD
I103USRCMD
I103GENCMD
50
50
50
50
I103POSCMD
50
50
50
50
Control
2
1
SCILO
BB_ES
A1A2_BS
A1A2_DC
ABC_BC
BH_CONN
BH_LINE_A
BH_LINE_B
DB_BUS_A
DB_BUS_B
01
Section 2
Available functions
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650
SCSWI
Switch controller
QCBAY
Bay control
LOCREM
LOCREMCTRL
CBC1
01
CBC2
01
02
SDDRFUF
03
TCSSCBR
12
DB_LINE
ABC_LINE
AB_TRAFO
87
Logic
SMPPTRC
94
SPTPTRC
94
TMAGGIO
12
12
12
1
12
OR
283
283
283
283
INVERTER
140
140
140
140
PULSETIMER
40
40
40
40
GATE
40
40
40
40
XOR
40
40
40
40
LOOPDELAY
40
40
40
40
TIMERSET
40
40
40
40
AND
280
280
280
280
SRMEMORY
40
40
40
40
RSMEMORY
40
40
40
40
Q/T
01
ANDQT
0120
ORQT
0120
INVERTERQT
0120
46
Technical Manual
Section 2
Available functions
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650
XORQT
040
SRMEMORYQT
040
RSMEMORYQT
40
TIMERSETQT
40
PULSETIMERQT
40
INVALIDQT
12
INDCOMBSPQT
20
INDEXTSPQT
20
FXDSIGN
B16I
16
16
16
16
B16IFCVI
16
16
16
16
IB16A
16
16
16
16
IB16FCVB
16
16
16
16
TEIGGIO
12
12
12
12
CVMMXN
Measurements
CMMXU
10
10
10
10
VMMXU
CMSQI
VMSQI
VNMMXU
AISVBAS
TM_P_P2
AM_P_P4
TM_S_P2
AM_S_P4
CNTGGIO
Event counter
Monitoring
Section 2
Available functions
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650
L4UFCNT
12
12
12
12
DRPRDRE
Disturbance report
AnRADR
BnRBDR
SPGGIO
64
64
64
64
SP16GGIO
16
16
16
16
MVGGIO
16
16
16
16
MVEXP
66
66
66
66
LMBRFLO
Fault locator
SPVNZBAT
01
SSIMG
63
02
SSIML
71
02
SSCBR
02
I103MEAS
I103MEASUSR
I103AR
I103EF
I103FLTPROT
I103IED
I103SUPERV
I103USRDEF
20
20
20
20
PCGGIO
Pulse counter
16
16
16
16
ETPMMTR
Metering
48
Technical Manual
Section 2
Available functions
2.4
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
ANSI
REL650
Station communication
IEC61850-8-1
DNPGEN
RS485DNP
CH1TCP
CH2TCP
CH3TCP
CH4TCP
OPTICALDNP
MSTSERIAL
MST1TCP
MST2TCP
MST3TCP
MST4TCP
RS485GEN
RS485
OPTICALPROT
RS485PROT
DNPFREC
OPTICAL103
RS485103
GOOSEINTLKRCV
59
59
59
59
GOOSEBINRCV
ETHFRNT
ETHLAN1
GATEWAY
ETHLAN1_AB
PRPSTATUS
Station communication
Section 2
Available functions
REL650 (B01A)
3Ph/2CB
Line Distance
REL650 (A11A)
1Ph/1CB
Function description
REL650 (A01A)
3Ph/1CB
ANSI
REL650
CONFPROT
ACTIVLOG
SECALARM
AGSAL
GOOSEDPRCV
32
32
32
32
GOOSEINTRCV
32
32
32
32
GOOSEMVRCV
16
16
16
16
GOOSESPRCV
64
64
64
64
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH
85
01
ZCRWPSCH
85
01
ZCWSPSCH
85
01
ZCLCPLAL
1
1
ECPSCH
85
01
ECRWPSCH
85
01
2.5
IEC 61850/Function
block name
SELFSUPEVLST
TIMESYNCHGEN
Time synchronization
SNTP
Time synchronization
Section 2
Available functions
IEC 61850/Function
block name
Function description
DTSBEGIN, DTSEND,
TIMEZONE
IRIG-B
Time synchronization
SETGRPS
ACTVGRP
TESTMODE
CHNGLCK
TERMINALID
IED identifiers
PRODINF
Product information
SYSTEMTIME
System time
RUNTIME
PRIMVAL
SMAI_20_1 SMAI_20_12
3PHSUM
12
GBASVAL
ATHSTAT
Authority status
ATHCHCK
Authority check
AUTHMAN
Authority management
FTPACCS
DOSFRNT
DOSLAN1
Denial of service, frame rate control for LAN1A and LAN1B ports
DOSSCKT
SAFEFILECOPY
BCSCONF
SECALARM
Component for mapping security events on protocols such as DNP3 and IEC103
51
Technical Manual
52
Section 3
Analog inputs
Section 3
Analog inputs
3.1
Introduction
Analog input channels in the IED must be set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all
directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must be
defined in order to reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in
the field ( primary and secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms
in the IED use primary system quantities. Consequently the setting values are
expressed in primary quantities as well and therefore it is important to set the
transformation ratio of the connected current and voltage transformers properly.
The availability of CT and VT inputs, as well as setting parameters depends on the
ordered IED.
A reference PhaseAngleRef must be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.
3.2
Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point
towards the object or away from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:
Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into
the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out
from the object.
For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure
2)
53
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Figure 2:
3.3
Settings
Dependent on ordered IED type.
54
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 1:
Name
PhaseAngleRef
Table 2:
Name
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
TRM - Channel 1
Description
Reference channel for phase angle
presentation
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim5
1 - 99999
1000
55
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim6
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim7
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim8
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
Table 3:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim5
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
56
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTprim6
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint7
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec7
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim7
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint8
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec8
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim8
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
Table 4:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim5
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec6
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim6
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
57
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim7
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim8
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
Table 5:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec5
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim5
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec6
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim6
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim7
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim8
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
58
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
Table 6:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
CTprim5
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint6
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec6
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim6
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim7
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim8
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
59
Technical Manual
Section 3
Analog inputs
Table 7:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CTStarPoint1
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec1
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim1
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint2
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec2
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim2
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint3
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec3
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim3
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint4
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec4
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim4
1 - 99999
1000
CTStarPoint5
FromObject
ToObject
ToObject
CTsec5
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
CTprim5
1 - 99999
1000
VTsec6
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim6
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec7
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim7
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec8
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110
VTprim8
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132
VTsec9
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim9
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
VTsec10
0.001 - 999.999
0.001
110.000
VTprim10
0.001 - 9999.999
kV
0.001
132.000
60
Technical Manual
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
Section 4
4.1
Binary input
4.1.1
4.1.2
Oscillation filter
Binary input wiring can be very long in substations and there are electromagnetic fields
from for example nearby breakers. Floating input lines can result in disturbances to
binary inputs. These disturbances are unwanted in the system. An oscillation filter is
used to reduce the disturbance from the system when a binary input starts oscillating.
Each debounced input signal change increments of an oscillation counter. Every time
the oscillation time counter reaches the set OscillationTime, the oscillation counter is
checked and both the time counter and the oscillation counter are reset. If the counter
value is above the set OscillationCount value the signal is declared as oscillating and
not valid. If the value is below the set OscillationCount value, the signal is declared as
valid again. During counting of the oscillation time the status of the signal remains
unchanged, leading to a fixed delay in the status update, even if the signal has attained
normal status again.
61
Technical Manual
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
4.1.3
Settings
4.1.3.1
Table 8:
Name
Values (Range)
BatteryVoltage
Table 9:
Name
24 - 250
Unit
V
Step
1
Default
110
Description
Station battery voltage
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Threshold1
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime1
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount1
0 - 255
OscillationTime1
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold2
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime2
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount2
0 - 255
OscillationTime2
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold3
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime3
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount3
0 - 255
OscillationTime3
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold4
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime4
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount4
0 - 255
OscillationTime4
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold5
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime5
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount5
0 - 255
OscillationTime5
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
62
Technical Manual
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Threshold6
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime6
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount6
0 - 255
OscillationTime6
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold7
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime7
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount7
0 - 255
OscillationTime7
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold8
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime8
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
DebounceTime8
0 - 255
OscillationTime8
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold9
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime9
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount9
0 - 255
OscillationTime9
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
4.1.3.2
Table 10:
Name
BatteryVoltage
Table 11:
Name
Unit
V
Step
1
Default
110
Description
Station battery voltage
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Threshold1
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime1
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount1
0 - 255
OscillationTime1
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold2
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime2
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount2
0 - 255
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OscillationTime2
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold3
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime3
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount3
0 - 255
OscillationTime3
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold4
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime4
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount4
0 - 255
OscillationTime4
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold5
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime5
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount5
0 - 255
OscillationTime5
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold6
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime6
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount6
0 - 255
OscillationTime6
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold7
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime7
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount7
0 - 255
OscillationTime7
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold8
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime8
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
DebounceTime8
0 - 255
OscillationTime8
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold9
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime9
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount9
0 - 255
OscillationTime9
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold10
6 - 900
%VB
65
Threshold10
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
64
Technical Manual
Section 4
Binary input and output modules
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OscillationCount10
0 - 255
OscillationTime10
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold11
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime11
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount11
0 - 255
OscillationTime11
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
Threshold12
6 - 900
%VB
65
DebounceTime12
0.000 - 0.100
0.001
0.005
OscillationCount12
0 - 255
OscillationTime12
0.000 - 600.000
0.001
0.000
65
Technical Manual
66
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Section 5
5.1
5.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
5.1.2
Table 12:
SCREEN
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Settings
SCREEN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Unit
Step
DisplayTimeout
Values (Range)
10 - 120
Min
10
60
ContrastLevel
-100 - 100
10
DefaultScreen
0-0
Default screen
EvListSrtOrder
Latest on top
Oldest on top
Latest on top
AutoIndicationDRP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SubstIndSLD
No
Yes
No
InterlockIndSLD
No
Yes
No
BypassCommands
No
Yes
No
5.2
5.2.1
Identification
Default
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
LHMICTRL
Description
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
67
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.2.2
Function block
LHMICTRL
CLRLEDS
HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
CLRPULSE
LEDSCLRD
IEC09000320-1-en.vsd
IEC09000320 V1 EN
Figure 3:
5.2.3
Signals
Table 13:
Name
CLRLEDS
Table 14:
Name
Default
0
Description
Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs
Description
HMI-ON
BOOLEAN
RED-S
BOOLEAN
YELLOW-S
BOOLEAN
YELLOW-F
BOOLEAN
CLRPULSE
BOOLEAN
A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared
LEDSCLRD
BOOLEAN
68
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.3
5.3.1
Identification
Function description
5.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
LEDGEN
GRP1_LED1 GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1 GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1 GRP3_LED15
Function block
LEDGEN
BLOCK
RESET
NEWIND
ACK
IEC09000321-1-en.vsd
IEC09000321 V1 EN
Figure 4:
GRP1_LED1
^HM1L01R
^HM1L01Y
^HM1L01G
IEC09000322 V1 EN
Figure 5:
The GRP1_LED1 function block is an example, all 15 LED in each of group 1 - 3 has
a similar function block.
5.3.3
Signals
Table 15:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
69
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Table 16:
Name
Type
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
HM1L01Y
BOOLEAN
HM1L01G
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 18:
Default
HM1L01R
Table 17:
5.3.4
Type
Description
NEWIND
BOOLEAN
ACK
BOOLEAN
Settings
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
tRestart
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
tMax
0.0 - 100.0
0.1
0.0
Table 19:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SequenceType
Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S
Follow-S
LabelOff
0 - 18
G1L01_OFF
LabelRed
0 - 18
G1L01_RED
LabelYellow
0 - 18
G1L01_YELLOW
LabelGreen
0 - 18
G1L01_GREEN
70
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.4
5.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
5.4.2
IEC 60617
identification
FNKEYMD1 FNKEYMD5
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
^LEDCTL1
FNKEYMD1
^FKEYOUT1
IEC09000327 V1 EN
Figure 6:
Only the function block for the first button is shown above. There is a similar block for
every function button.
5.4.3
Signals
Table 20:
Name
Type
LEDCTL1
BOOLEAN
Table 21:
Type
FKEYOUT1
Table 22:
Name
Description
LED control input for function key
Name
5.4.4
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
FNKEYMD1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Mode
Off
Toggle
Pulsed
Off
PulseTime
0.001 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
LabelOn
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_ON
LabelOff
0 - 18
LCD_FN1_OFF
71
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Table 23:
Name
Values (Range)
Type
Disabled
Menu shortcut
Control
MenuShortcut
Unit
-
Step
-
5.5
Operation principle
5.5.1
Local HMI
Default
Disabled
Description
Function key type
ANSI12000175 V1 EN
Figure 7:
Display (LCD)
Buttons
LED indicators
Communication port for PCM600
5.5.1.1
Display
The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome display with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels. The character size can vary.
The display view is divided into four basic areas.
72
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC13000063-1-en.vsd
IEC13000063 V1 EN
Figure 8:
Display layout
1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)
The path shows the current location in the menu structure. If the path is too long to
be shown, it is truncated from the beginning, and the truncation is indicated with
three dots.
The content area shows the menu content.
The status area shows the current IED time, the user that is currently logged in and
the object identification string which is settable via the LHMI or with PCM600.
If text, pictures or other items do not fit in the display, a vertical scroll bar appears
on the right. The text in content area is truncated from the beginning if it does not
fit in the display horizontally. Truncation is indicated with three dots.
73
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
IEC13000045-1-en.vsd
IEC13000045 V1 EN
Figure 9:
Truncated path
The number before the function instance, for example ETHFRNT:1, indicates the
instance number.
The function button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback
signal for the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required
signal with PCM600.
ANSI12000025-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000025 V1 EN
Figure 10:
The alarm LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the alarm LEDs. Three
alarm LED pages are available.
74
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
GUID-D20BB1F1-FDF7-49AD-9980-F91A38B2107D V1 EN
Figure 11:
The function button and alarm LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel
is shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the
ESC button clears the panel from the display. Both the panels have dynamic width that
depends on the label string length that the panel contains.
5.5.1.2
LEDs
The LHMI includes three protection status LEDs above the display: Normal, Pickup
and Trip.
There are 15 programmable alarm LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can
indicate three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The alarm texts related to
each three-color LED are divided into three pages.
There are 3 separate pages of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one
LED group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated
since there are three LED groups. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the
operation mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.
There are two additional LEDs which are embedded into the control buttons
. They represent the status of the circuit breaker.
5.5.1.3
and
Keypad
The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views
or menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications,
provide help and switch between local and remote control mode.
75
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as
menu shortcut or control buttons.
ANSI11000247 V2 EN
Figure 12:
Close
Open
Escape
Left
10
Down
11
Up
12
Right
13
User Log on
14
Enter
15
Remote/Local
16
Uplink LED
17
18
Multipage
19
Menu
20
Clear
21
Help
22
23
76
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
5.5.2
LED
5.5.2.1
Functionality
The function blocks LEDGEN and GRP1_LEDx, GRP2_LEDx and GRP3_LEDx
(x=1-15) controls and supplies information about the status of the indication LEDs.
The input and output signals of the function blocks are configured with PCM600. The
input signal for each LED is selected individually using SMT or ACT. Each LED is
controlled by a GRP1_LEDx function block, that controls the color and the operating
mode.
Each indication LED on local HMI can be set individually to operate in 6 different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting mode with acknowledgment functionality.
5.5.2.2
Status LEDs
There are three status LEDs above the LCD in the front of the IED, green, yellow and
red.
The green LED has a fixed function that present the healthy status of the IED. The
yellow and red LEDs are user configured. The yellow LED can be used to indicate that
a disturbance report is triggered (steady) or that the IED is in test mode (flashing). The
red LED can be used to indicate a trip command.
The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder function,
DRPRDRE, by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function to a BxRBDR
binary input function block using the PCM600 and configure the setting to Off, Start or
Trip for that particular signal.
5.5.2.3
Indication LEDs
Operating modes
Collecting mode
Re-starting mode
In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active LEDs
and activates only those, which appear during one disturbance. Only LEDs defined
77
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S) will
initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A disturbance is defined to end a
settable time after the reset of the activated input signals or when the maximum
time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
Automatic reset
The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for restarting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When the
automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications
will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequence
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 Follow type, the acknowledgment/reset function is
not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 Latched type with acknowledgement are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting
mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F =
Flash.
78
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
At the activation of the input signal, the indication obtains corresponding color
corresponding to the activated input and operates according to the selected sequence
diagrams below.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the following characteristics:
= No indication
G=
= Steady light
Green
Y=
= Flash
R=
Yellow
Red
IEC09000311.vsd
IEC09000311 V1 EN
Figure 13:
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals.
It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other
LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN
Figure 14:
If inputs for two or more colors are active at the same time to one LED the priority is
as described above. An example of the operation when two colors are activated in
parallel is shown in Figure 15.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
IEC09000312_1_en.vsd
IEC09000312 V1 EN
Figure 15:
79
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as Sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 LatchedAck-F-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the
indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal
is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a
steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN
Figure 16:
LED
Acknow
IEC09000313_1_en.vsd
IEC09000313 V1 EN
Figure 17:
80
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
If all three signals are activated the order of priority is still maintained.
Acknowledgment of indications with higher priority will acknowledge also low
priority indications, which are not visible according to Figure 18.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal YELLOW
Activating
signal RED
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000314-1-en.vsd
IEC09000314 V1 EN
Figure 18:
LED
Acknow.
IEC09000315-1-en.vsd
IEC09000315 V1 EN
Figure 19:
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.
81
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Sequence 5 LatchedColl-S
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of
the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN
Figure 20:
That means if an indication with higher priority has reset while an indication with
lower priority still is active at the time of reset, the LED will change color according to
Figure 21.
Activating
signal GREEN
Activating
signal RED
LED
Reset
IEC09000316_1_en.vsd
IEC09000316 V1 EN
Figure 21:
Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
82
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
LEDs set to Sequence 6 LatchedReset-S. Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive
edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its
operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Timing diagram for sequence 6
Figure 22 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000239_2-en.vsd
IEC01000239 V2 EN
Figure 22:
Figure 23 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.
83
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN
Figure 23:
Figure 24 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
84
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN
Figure 24:
85
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN
Figure 25:
5.5.3
Function keys
5.5.3.1
Functionality
Local Human-Machine-Interface (LHMI) has five function buttons, directly to the left
of the LCD, that can be configured either as menu shortcut or control buttons. Each
button has an indication LED that can be configured in the application configuration.
When used as a menu shortcut, a function button provides a fast way to navigate
between default nodes in the menu tree. When used as a control, the button can control
a binary signal.
5.5.3.2
Operation principle
Each output on the FNKEYMD1 - FNKEYMD5 function blocks can be controlled
from the LHMI function keys. By pressing a function button on the LHMI, the output
status of the actual function block will change. These binary outputs can in turn be
used to control other function blocks, for example, switch control blocks, binary I/O
outputs etc.
86
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Operating sequence
The operation mode is set individually for each output, either OFF, TOGGLE or
PULSED.
Setting OFF
This mode always gives the output the value. A change of the input value does not
affect the output value.
Input value
Output value
IEC09000330-1-en.vsd
IEC09000330 V1 EN
Figure 26:
Setting TOGGLE
In this mode the output toggles each time the function block detects that the input has
been written (the input has completed a pulse). Note that the input attribute is reset
each time the function block executes. The function block execution is marked with a
dotted line below.
Input value
Output value
IEC09000331_1_en.vsd
IEC09000331 V1 EN
Figure 27:
Setting PULSED
In this mode the output will be high for as long as the setting pulse time. After this time
the output will go back to 0. The input attribute is reset when the function block detects
it being high and there is no output pulse.
87
Technical Manual
Section 5
Local Human-Machine-Interface LHMI
Note that the third positive edge on the input attribute does not cause a pulse, since the
edge was applied during pulse output. A new pulse can only begin when the output is
zero; else the trigger edge is lost.
Input value
Output value
tpulse
tpulse
IEC09000332_1_en.vsd
IEC09000332 V1 EN
Figure 28:
Input function
All inputs work the same way: When the LHMI is configured so that a certain function
button is of type CONTROL, then the corresponding input on this function block
becomes active, and will light the yellow function button LED when high. This
functionality is active even if the function block operation setting is set to off.
There is an exception for the optional extension EXT1 function keys 7 and 8, since
they are tri-color (they can be red, yellow or green). Each of these LEDs are controlled
by three inputs, which are prioritized in the following order: Red - Yellow - Green
RED
INPUT
YELLOW
GREEN
OUTPUT
Function key LED color
0/1
0/1
red
0/1
yellow
green
off
88
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.1
6.1.1
Identification
Function description
Five zone distance protection,
quadrilateral and mho characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZQMPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
S00346 V1 EN
6.1.2
Functionality(21)
Five zone distance protection, quadrilateral and mho characteristic ZQMPDIS (21) is
designed to operate in the following modes for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops:
Quadrilateral characteristics
Mho characteristics
Combined quadrilateral and mho characteristics
The CVT filter and zone timer logic are the additional features which gives more
secure, dependable, and fast distance protection.
ZQMPDIS (21) is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-tophase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground faults for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings of characteristics, and for each zone resistive
and reactive reach, gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer
connected to overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines. The
distance protection characteristic and each zone direction are selectable by parameter
settings.
89
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.1.3
Function block
ZQMPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
UPOL
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKPG
BLKPP
BLKZ
EXTNST
DIRCND
PHSEL
BLDCND
LDCND
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
TRZ1
TRZ2
TRZ3
TRZ4
TRZ5
BFI_3P
PU_A
BFI_B
PU_C
PU_Z1
PU_Z2
Z3_PU
Z4_PU
Z5_PU
ANSI09000059_2_en.vsd
ANSI09000059 V2 EN
Figure 29:
6.1.4
Signals
Table 24:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
UPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
BLKPG
BOOLEAN
BLKPP
BOOLEAN
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
EXTNST
BOOLEAN
DIRCND
INTEGER
PHSEL
INTEGER
BLDCND
INTEGER
LDCND
INTEGER
90
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 25:
Name
6.1.5
Table 26:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
General trip
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
TRZ1
BOOLEAN
TRZ2
BOOLEAN
TRZ3
BOOLEAN
TRZ4
BOOLEAN
TRZ5
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PU_Z1
BOOLEAN
PU_Z2
BOOLEAN
Z3_PU
BOOLEAN
Z4_PU
BOOLEAN
Z5_PU
BOOLEAN
Settings
ZQMPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
CvtFltr
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
LineAng
0.00 - 90.00
Deg
0.01
80.00
KNMag
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
0.000
KNAng
-180 - 180
Deg
-15
IMinPUPG
10 - 30
%IB
15
IMinPUPP
10 - 30
%IB
15
91
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CharPEZ1
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
CharPPZ1
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
DirModeZ1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Disabled
MhoCharZ1
Directional
Offset
Directional
Z1
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z1Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
KNMag1
0.000 - 3.000
0.001
0.000
KNAng1
-180 - 180
Deg
-15
RFPE1
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
RFPP1
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
TimerSelZ1
Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
Timers seperated
OpModetPEZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPEZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OpModetPPZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPPZ1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
CharPEZ2
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
CharPPZ2
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
DirModeZ2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Disabled
Section 6
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MhoCharZ2
Directional
Offset
Directional
Z2
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z2Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
RFPP2
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
RFPE2
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
TimerSelZ2
Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
Timers seperated
OpModetPEZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPEZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OpModetPPZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPPZ2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
CharPEZ3
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
CharPPZ3
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
DirModeZ3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Disabled
MhoCharZ3
Directional
Offset
Directional
Z3
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z3Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
RFPE3
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
RFPP3
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
TimerSelZ3
Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
Timers seperated
93
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OpModetPEZ3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPEZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OpModetPPZ3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPPZ3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
CharPEZ4
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
CharPPZ4
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
DirModeZ4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Disabled
MhoCharZ4
Directional
Offset
Directional
Z4
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z4Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
RFPE4
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
RFPP4
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
TimerSelZ4
Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
Timers seperated
OpModetPEZ4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPEZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OpModetPPZ4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPPZ4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
CharPEZ5
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
94
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CharPPZ5
Disabled
Mho
Quadrilateral
Combined
Disabled
DirModeZ5
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Disabled
MhoCharZ5
Directional
Offset
Directional
Z5
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
Z5Rev
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/p
0.001
30.000
RFPE5
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
RFPP5
0.005 - 3000.000
ohm/l
0.001
30.000
TimerSelZ5
Timers seperated
Timers linked
Internal start
Start from PhSel
External start
Timers seperated
OpModetPEZ5
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPEZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OpModetPPZ5
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPPZ5
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Table 27:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LEModeZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlndModeZ1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
LEModeZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlndModeZ2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
LEModeZ3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlndModeZ3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
95
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
LEModeZ4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlndModeZ4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
LEModeZ5
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
BlndModeZ5
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Table 28:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
6.1.6
Operation principle
6.1.6.1
General
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Five zone distance protection, quadrilateral and mho characteristic ZQMPDIS (21)
function is designed to operate in the following characteristic modes for separate phaseto-ground and phase-to-phase loops:
Mho characteristic
Quadrilateral characteristic
Combined Mho and Quadrilateral characteristic
The overall functionality is defined in the logic diagram as shown in figure 30. There is
a pre-calculation block where zero sequence compensated current calculation is done.
These calculated values, along with the phase voltage and current values will be given
to each zone.
96
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
I3P
V3P
I Comp
PRECALCULATION
V Pol
ZONE-1
ZONE-2
RELE
ZONE-3
ASE
RELEASE
LOGIC
LOGI
START
TRIP
ZONE-4
ZONE-5
ANSI11000271-2-en.vsd
ANSI11000271 V2 EN
Figure 30:
6.1.6.2
97
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 1
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 2
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 3
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 4
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 5
A-G
B-G
C-G
A- B
B-C
C-A
Zone 6
ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000458 V2 EN
Figure 31:
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct
voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs
like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.
6.1.6.3
Quadrilateral characteristic
ZQMPDIS (21) basically implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the
five zones separately. Set CharPGZx or CharPPZx setting to Quadrilateral, to choose
particular measuring loop in a zone to work as quadrilateral distance protection.
The quadrilateral characteristic measuring loop will essentially operate according to the
non-directional impedance characteristics presented in figure 32 and figure 33. The
phase-to-ground characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-tophase characteristic presents the per phase reach.
98
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X (Ohm/loop)
6
R (Ohm/loop)
IEC09000308_2_en.vsd
IEC09000308 V2 EN
Figure 32:
1 RFPG
2 KNMag |Z|
where: KNZ=ZN
3 |Z|
where Z denotes the positive sequence vector corresponding to the zone reach
4 LineAng
5 KNAng (negative)
6 R1 + Rn
where Rn = (R0 - R1)/3
7 X1 +Xn
where Xn = (X0 - X1)/3
99
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X (W/phase)
1
R (W/phase)
1
IEC09000309_2_en.vsd
IEC09000309 V2 EN
Figure 33:
1 0.5 RFPP
2 Z1
3 LineAng
4 R1
5 X1
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type is presented as in figure 34. Note in
particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive reach for phase-tophase faults and three-phase faults.
100
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
VA
IA
Z1
Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A
Phase-to-ground
element
RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN
VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase A-B
IA
KNZ1
Phase-to-phase
element A-B
Z1
RFPP
IB
(Arc resistance)
VB
Z1
VA
Three-phase
fault
IA
Z1
0.5RFPP
Z1
0.5RFPP
Phase-to-phase
element A-C
IC
VC
ANSI09000242_2_en.vsd
ANSI09000242 V2 EN
Figure 34:
The Z1 in figure 34 represents the positive sequence impedance from the measuring
point to the fault location. The settings RFPGx (where x is 1-5 depending on selected
zone) and RFPPx (where x is 1-5 depending on selected zone) are the eventual fault
resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 34, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone needs to be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting DirModeZx (where x is 1-5 depending on selected zone). The result
from respective set value is illustrated in figure 35. The impedance reach is not
symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward and reverse direction (there are
101
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
different forward and reverse settings - Zx and ZxRev respectively, where x = 1 - 5).
All other reach settings apply to both directions.
X
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN
Figure 35:
Theory of operation
102
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Blinder B, ref IZ KR
X
L line, ref la
Zx
R
Resulting characteristic
Zx Rev
L line, ref la
L line, ref la+|Kn|IN
*IZKR=(I+INKN)LineAngZx
IEC11000268_1_en.vsd
IEC11000268 V1 EN
Figure 36:
Reach characteristic
The reach characteristic looks for the reach part of the quadrilateral characteristic.
Following two calculations of forward and reverse voltages are done in this:
VKRforward = V - (I + IN KN) LineAng Zx
GUID-3EF66E0D-E9A4-48F2-8695-85858AAC343D V1 EN
(Equation 1)
(Equation 2)
where
I
I + IN KN
KN = 0
103
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Based on these voltages the reach characteristic is implemented with Sine comparator
(TRUE, if {Im(S1) Re(S2) - Im(S2) Re(S1)}>0) for following comparisons:
0 < arg(I) - arg(VKRForward) < 180
(Equation 3)
GUID-797D640A-0107-4C8F-B8EF-A71E116535FB V1 EN
GUID-7E158828-B0FF-45C2-ABC0-DF115196D6EE V1 EN
When both the conditions are true, then the reach characteristic comparator is set as
true for phase to phase loops (or when load compensation is disabled).
X
IRef
Zx
180
VKRForward
IZKR
V
I
IRef
ZxRev
a=7
ANSI11000266_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000266 V1 EN
Figure 37:
(Equation 5)
(Equation 6)
If all the four comparators are true then reach characteristic of phase to ground loop is
set as TRUE.
104
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Blinder characteristic
The blinder characteristic looks for the resistive reach part of the quadrilateral
characteristic. Following calculations of forward and reverse voltages are done for this.
For phase to ground loop:
VBR = V - I RFPGx
VAR = V + I RFPGx
GUID-1370F9BA-BB31-4B33-B9D1-1C8FED7B517E V1 EN
(Equation 7)
(Equation 8)
where
I
Based on these voltages the blinder characteristic is implemented with Sine comparator
(TRUE, if {Im(S1) Re(S2) - Im(S2) Re(S1)}>0) for following comparisons:
0 < arg ( VBR ) - ( arg ( I ) + pi/2 ) < 180
or
0 < ( arg ( I ) + pi/2 ) - arg ( VAR ) < 180
GUID-51E2D9C7-E2A8-43ED-8389-0909F2419800 V1 EN
(Equation 9)
(Equation 10)
105
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X
IZKR
IZKR
IZKR
VAR
360
VBR
I
IRF
R
180
180
ANSI11000267_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000267 V1 EN
Figure 38:
When both the conditions are true then comparator is set as TRUE.
In phase to ground loop:
IZKR = ( I + IN KN ) LineAng
GUID-C2FB458A-506E-419D-AD83-63209DE24BC4 V1 EN
(Equation 11)
6.1.6.4
(Equation 12)
Mho characteristic
ZQMPDIS (21) basically implements quadrilateral and mho characteristic in all the
five zones separately. Set CharPGZx or CharPPZx setting to Mho, to choose particular
measuring loop in a zone to work as mho distance protection.
Each distance protection zone can be selected to be either forward or reverse with
positive sequence polarized mho characteristic alternatively self polarized offset mho
characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic is in accordance to
figure 39 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
106
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
jx
X
Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3
Zs=0
Mho, zone2
R
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
IEC09000143_2_en.vsd
IEC09000143 V2 EN
Figure 39:
Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead
of crossing the origin as for the mho to the left of figure 39, which is only valid where
the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the
negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of
figure 39. Z1 denotes the complex positive sequence impedance.
The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion
of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading
and mild power swing conditions.
In ZQMPDIS (21), each zone measurement loop characteristic can be set to mho
characteristic by setting CharPPZx or CharPGZx (where x is 1-5 depending on
selected zone). These mho characteristics can be classified into - Offset or Directional.
The directional mho characteristics can be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse
by the setting parameter DirModeZx (where x is 1-5 depending on selected zone). The
offset mho characteristic can be set to Forward or Reverse by the setting parameter
MhoCharZx (where x is 1-5 depending on selected zone).
107
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X
Zx
Zx
R
R
ZxRev
ZxRev
DirModeZx=Reverse
MhoCharZx=Directional
DirModeZx=Forward
MhoCharZx=Directional
DirModeZx=no dir
MhoCharZx=Directional/offset
X
Zx
Zx
ZxRev
ZxRev
DirModeZx=Forward
MhoCharZx=offset
DirModeZx=Reverse
MhoCharZx=offset
IEC11000254_1_en.vsd
IEC11000254 V1 EN
Figure 40:
Mho characteristics
The impedance is set by the parameter Z and the corresponding angles by the
parameter LineAng.
Compensation for ground return path for faults involving ground is done by setting the
parameter KNMagx and KNAngx.
108
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
KNMag =
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
(Equation 13)
EQUATION1579 V1 EN
KNAng = ang
Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1
)
(Equation 14)
EQUATION1807-ANSI V1 EN
where
Z0
Z1
Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the polarizing phasor by more than
90 degrees, the function operates and gives a trip output.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 41. The condition for deriving
the angle is according to equation 15.
)
(Equation 15)
109
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
where
V AB
EQUATION1790-ANSI
V1 EN
I AB
EQUATION1791-ANSI
V1 EN
Vpol
The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB
for phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the mho circle
for close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270
IAB X
Vpol
VAB
I AB R
ANSI09000116-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000116 V1 EN
Figure 41:
Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to-B fault
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters Z and ZRev. The vector Z in the impedance plane has the settable
angle LineAng and the angle for ZRev is LineAng+180.
110
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 42).
The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-B fault can be defined according to equation 16.
V I AB Z
= Arg
Z
Re
v
(
)
AB
(Equation 16)
EQUATION1792-ANSI-650 V1 EN
where
EQUATION1801 V1 EN
ZRev
is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction
IABX
Vcomp1 = VAB - IABZ
IABZ
V
Vcomp2=V=IFZF=VAB
IABR
- IAB ZRev
ANSI09000117-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000117 V1 EN
Figure 42:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A-toB fault.
111
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside
the one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between the
voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth
quadrant. See figure 43. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.
where
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDNRDIR.
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDNRDIR.
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho
directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See Directional
impedance quadrilateral and mho (ZDNRDIR) for information about the mho
directional element.
IABjX
Z
VAB
ArgNegRes
IAB
ArgDir
ANSI09000118-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000118 V1 EN
Figure 43:
Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase A-toB fault
112
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The is derived according to equation 16 for the mho circle and is the angle between
the voltage and current.
X
ArgNegRes
f
IAB
ArgDir
UAB
ZRev
ANSI09000119-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000119 V1 EN
Figure 44:
Phase-to-ground fault
Mho
The measuring of ground faults uses ground-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence
from the ground-return path.
For a ground fault in phase A, the compensation voltage Vcomp can be derived, as
shown in figure 45.
Vcomp = V
pol
- I A Z loop
(Equation 17)
EQUATION1793-ANSI V1 EN
where
Vpol
Zloop
Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN
EQUATION1799 V1 EN
)
(Equation 18)
Section 6
Impedance protection
where
Z1
KN
The angle between the Vcomp and the polarize voltage Vpol for a A-to-ground fault is
(Equation 19)
EQUATION1592 V1 EN
where
VA
IA
IN
KN
EQUATION1593 V1 EN
Z0-Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION1594 V1 EN
114
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
IA X
IAZN
V comp
I A Z loop
IA Z
Vpol
f
IA ( Ref)
IAR
ANSI09000120-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000120 V1 EN
Figure 45:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-toground fault
= arg
Z
Re
v
(
)
A
A
EQUATION1802-ANSI-650 V1 EN
(Equation 22)
115
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
IABjX
Vcomp1 = VA - IAZ
IAZ
VA
Vcomp2 = VA
- (- IA ZRev )
IABR
- IA Z Rev
ANSI09000121-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000121 V1 EN
Figure 46:
Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A-toground fault
ArgDir
is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDNRDIR.
ArgNegRes
is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDNRDIR.
116
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
IA jX
VA
ArgNegRes
IAR
IA
ArgDir
en 06000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000466 V1 EN
Figure 47:
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for A-toground fault
117
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
ArgNegRes
f
IA
ArgDir
VA
ZRev
ANSI09000123-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000123 V2 EN
Figure 48:
6.1.6.5
Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for A-toground fault
6.1.6.6
Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
118
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
VA - VB
IA - IB
(Equation 23)
EQUATION1545 V1 EN
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-ground
faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 24.
Z app =
V_A
I _ A + IN KN
(Equation 24)
EQUATION1546 V1 EN
Where:
V_A, I_A and IN
are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
KN =
Z0 - Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION-2105 V1 EN
Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN
Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN
Where
R0
X0
R1
X1
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.
119
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.1.6.7
CVT filter
In HHV networks, use of CVT is very common due to their reduced cost and size. But
due to the capacitance effect the voltage will not change instantaneously and this
causes the CVT transients into post fault voltage signals. Many times, this causes the
relays to over reach. ZQMPDIS (21) handles the CVT transients internally and if
setting CVTFltr is Enabled then input voltage profile is corrected accordingly.
CVT filter is designed to reduce the CVT transients. Use CvtFltr setting to enable or
disable the CVT filter. The filter detects the fault and switches the filter coefficient to
give correct voltage values to the measurement loops. When CvtFltr is Enabled all the
loops and all the zones will have the corrected voltage value. In applications where the
line has a high SIR and the voltage signals are obtained by CVT, it is highly
recommended to use the CVT Filter.
6.1.6.8
The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-tophase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:
Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 49.
120
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment, FDPSPDIS or FMPSPDIS (21) within the
IED, which are converted within the zone measuring function into corresponding
boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input signal PHSEL is connected to
FDPSPDIS or FMPSPDIS (21) function output STCNDZI.
MhoDirMode = offset
OR
AND
DirMode = Non-Dir
PHSEL
AND
AND
Release
DIRCND
AND
LoadEnchMode=
OR
BLKZ
BLOCK
STPG
OR
Enabled/Disabled
LDCND
TRUE
BlinderModeZx=
Enabled/Disabled
STAG
STBG
AND
TRUE
STCG
STAB
AND
AND
MhoDirMode =
Directional
AND
DirMode =
Forward/Reverse
STBC
OR
STBG
STAB
STBC
OR
STA
AND
BLDCND
STAG
STAB
STAC
AND
STCG
STBC
STAC
STB
STC
OR
OR
STCA
PICKUP
AND
OR
STPP
ANSI09000243-4-en.vsd
ANSI09000243 V4 EN
Figure 49:
6.1.6.9
121
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
BLOCK
NOT
startPhG
1
startPhPh
TimerSelZx
tON
t
tON
t
&
&
operatePhG
operatePhPh
Switch:
FALSE
1
internalCommonStart
Timers separated
Timers linked
Internal start
phSelStart
externalCommonStart
External start
ANSI11000270-2-en.vsd
ANSI11000270 V2 EN
Figure 50:
Timers separated - Separate start of timers within zone individually from phase to
ground and phase to phase measurement loops
Timers linked - Start of timers linked within zone, either phase to ground or phase
to phase will start both timers within zone
Internal start - Internal common start of timers from all the 5 zones
Start from PhSel - Common start of timers from phSelLogic Start signal, if
direction condition is forward for the particular phase and also the zone is set for
DirModeZx setting as Forward
External start - External common start of timers
122
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.1.7
Technical data
Table 29:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Number of zones
5 with selectable
direction
(10-30)% of IBase
2,0 % of In
(0.005 - 3000.000) /
phase
(1.00-3000.00) /loop
(1.00-3000.00) /loop
(0 - 180) degrees
0.00 - 3.00
Dynamic overreach
<5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
30 ms typically
without CVT
Reset ratio
105% typically
Reset time
45 ms typically
123
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 30:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1030)% of IBase
2.0% of In
(0.0053000.000) W/phase
(0.0053000.000) /phase
(0.0053000.000) /phase
(1090) degrees
(0.0053000.000) /phase
(0.003.00)
(-180180) degrees
Dynamic overreach
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Operate time
30 ms typically
Reset ratio
6.2
6.2.1
Identification
Function description
Phase selection with load
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
FDPSPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21
Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN
124
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.2
Functionality
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement of
the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS
(21) is designed to accurately select the proper faulted loop(s) in the distance function
based on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS (21) has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the
load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.
6.2.3
Function block
FDPSPDIS
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND
TRIP
PICKUP
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
NDIR_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
STCNDZI
DLECND
ANSI09000061-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000061 V1 EN
Figure 51:
125
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.4
Signals
Table 31:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
DIRCND
INTEGER
Table 32:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
FWD_A
BOOLEAN
FWD_B
BOOLEAN
FWD_C
BOOLEAN
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
REV_A
BOOLEAN
REV_B
BOOLEAN
REV_C
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
NDIR_A
BOOLEAN
NDIR_B
BOOLEAN
NDIR_C
BOOLEAN
NDIR_G
BOOLEAN
FWD_1PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_2PH
BOOLEAN
FWD_3PH
BOOLEAN
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
PHPH_FLT
BOOLEAN
STCNDZI
INTEGER
DLECND
INTEGER
126
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.5
Settings
Table 33:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
21 enable
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
50/51 enable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
3I0BLK_PP
10 - 100
%IPh
40
3I0Enable_PG
10 - 100
%IPh
20
RLdFwd
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00
RldRev
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
30
X0
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
120.00
Pickup Iph
10 - 2500
%IB
120
Pickup_N
10 - 2500
%IB
20
3I0 pickup
X1
0.50 - 3000.00
0.01
40.00
RFltFwdPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFltRevPP
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm/l
0.01
30.00
RFltFwdPG
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
RFltRevPG
1.00 - 9000.00
ohm/l
0.01
100.00
IMinPUPP
5 - 500
%IB
10
IMinPUPG
5 - 500
%IB
Table 34:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimerPP
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPP
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
TimerPE
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPG
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
127
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 35:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
6.2.6
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection with
load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS (21) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phaseto-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the
combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of
faults.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously
measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare them with the set
values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier's recursive filter, and separate trip
counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring elements.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS (21) uses information
from the directional function (ZDNRDIR) to discriminate whether the fault is in
forward or reverse direction.
The pickup condition STCNDZI is essentially based on the following criteria:
1.
2.
3.
Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without ground
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
128
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
60
60
R
60
R
60
Non-directional (ND)
Forward (FWD)
Reverse (REV)
en05000668_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000668 V1 EN
Figure 52:
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directional function (ZDNRDIR). It shall be connected to the STDIR output
on ZDNRDIR. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the
distance measuring zones, that is, the ZQDPDIS block.
The STCNDZI or DLECND output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary
coded information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct
fault loop in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input
on the ZQDPDIS blocks.
129
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.6.1
Phase-to-ground fault
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase
selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21).
ZPHSn =
VA( B , C )
IA( B , C )
EQUATION1554 V1 EN
(Equation 25)
where:
n
R0 - R1
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN
XN =
(Equation 26)
X 0 - X1
3
EQUATION1257 V1 EN
(Equation 27)
130
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X (ohm/loop)
Kr(X1+XN)
RFItRevPG
RFItFwdPG
X1+XN
RFItFwdPG
R (Ohm/loop)
RFItRevPG
60 deg
60 deg
X1+XN
Kr =
1
tan(60 deg)
RFItFwdPG
RFItRevPG
Kr(X1+XN)
en06000396_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000396 V1 EN
Figure 53:
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 28
and equation 29.
3 I0 0.5 IMinPUPG
(Equation 28)
EQUATION2108-ANSI V1 EN
3 I0
3I 0 Enable _ PG
100
Iph max
(Equation 29)
EQUATION1812-ANSI V1 EN
where:
IMinPUPG
3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-toground fault loops (in %).
Iphmax
131
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.6.2
Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS (21) will be
according to equation 30.
ZPHS =
Vm - Vn
-2 In
(Equation 30)
EQUATION1813-ANSI V1 EN
Vm is the leading phase voltage, Vn the lagging phase voltage and In the phase current
in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 54.
X (W /
0.5RFltRevPP
phase)
0.5RFltFwdPP
KrX1
X1
0.5RFltFwdPP
60 deg
R (W /
phase)
60 deg
0.5RFltRevPP
X1
Kr =
1
tan(60 deg)
KrX1
0.5RFltRevPP
0.5RFltFwdPP
ANSI05000670-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000670 V2 EN
Figure 54:
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 31 or equation 32.
132
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
< IMinPUPG
3I 0
(Equation 31)
EQUATION2109-ANSI V1 EN
3I 0 <
INBlockPP
100
Iph max
(Equation 32)
EQUATION2110-ANSI V1 EN
where:
IMinPUPG
6.2.6.3
Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 30, equation 31 and equation 32 are used to release the operation
of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all
directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise.
The characteristic is shown in figure 55.
133
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1
3
90 deg
0.5RFltFwdPPK3
X1K3
2 RFltFwdPP
3
R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFltRevPPK3
K3 =
2
3
30 deg
ANSI05000671-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000671 V4 EN
Figure 55:
6.2.6.4
Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on
the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 56. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.
134
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
RLdFwd
LdAngle
LdAngle
LdAngle
RLdRev
LdAngle
en05000196_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000196 V1 EN
Figure 56:
135
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
GUID-15250C2D-D7FE-46A4-8392-8A3E5D5AAACE---ANSI V1 EN
Figure 57:
When FDPSPDIS (21) is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 58. The figure shows a distance
measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is highlighted
in black.
136
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone
Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line
en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN
Figure 58:
Figure 58 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 59. Due to the 30-degree rotation, the
angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of the original 60
degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt
outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be
more or less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a
margin to the load impedance.
137
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
X (W /
phase)
Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone
R (W /
phase)
IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN
Figure 59:
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 60. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as
the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time
the characteristic will "shrink", divided by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv
reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.
138
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN
Figure 60:
There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral
characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault
between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant one.
6.2.6.5
139
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.6.6
3 I 0 0.5 IMinPUPG
3I 0
3 I 0 Enable _ PG
100
IRELPG
0
15ms
AND
Iphmax
Bool to
integer
BLOCK
3I 0 < IMinPUPG
AND
AND
3I 0 <
3 I 0 BLK _ PP
100
STPG
10ms
0
0
20ms
0
15ms
AND
DLECND
STPP
IRELPP
Iph max
ANSI09000149-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000149 V2 EN
Figure 61:
140
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_3
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
PHSEL_G
IRELPG
ZMA
ZMB
ZMC
ZMAB
ZMBC3
ZMCA
IRELPP
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
PHSEL_A
PHSEL_B
PHSEL_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
AND
INDIR_CA
OR
0
15 ms
PHSEL_PP
ANSI00000545-3-en.vsd
ANSI00000545 V3 EN
Figure 62:
141
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
INDIR_A
DRV_A
AND
INDIR_AB
DRV_AB
AND
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
REV_A
INDIR_CA
DRV_CA
AND
INDIR_B
DRV_B
AND
REV_G
INDIR_AB
AND
INDIR_BC
DRV_BC
INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
INDIR_CA
AND
INDIR_C
DRV_C
AND
REV_B
Bool to
integer
STCNDZI
INDIR_BC
AND
OR
0
15 ms
OR
0
15 ms
REV_C
INDIR_CA
AND
REV_PP
ANSI10000546-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000546 V2 EN
Figure 63:
142
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
AND
INDIR_A
DFW_A
AND
AND
OR
INDIR_AB
DFW_AB
AND
OR
INDIR_CA
DFW_CA
OR
AND
FWD_IPH
0
15 ms
FWD_A
0
15 ms
FWD_G
0
15 ms
FWD_B
0
15 ms
FWD_2PH
0
15 ms
FWD_C
0
15 ms
FWD_3PH
AND
INDIR_AB
AND
OR
INDIR_BC
DFW_BC
0
15 ms
AND
AND
INDIR_B
DFW_B
15 ms
0
AND
AND
OR
15 ms
0
INDIR_C
DFW_C
AND
AND
INDIR_BC
AND
OR
INDIR_CA
AND
AND
OR
FWD_PP
0
15 ms
ANSI05000201-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000201 V3 EN
Figure 64:
Figure 65 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and PICKUP, where
internal signals NDIR_PP, FWD_PP and REV_PP are the equivalent to internal signals
NDIR_G, FWD_G and REV_G, but for the phase-to-phase loops.
143
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
TimerPP=Disabled
AND
0-tPP
0
OR
TimerPE=Disabled
0-tPG
0
AND
AND
OR
TRIP
AND
NDIR_PP
FWD_PP
OR
REV_PP
OR
NDIR_G
FWD_G
PICKUP
OR
REV_G
ANSI10000187-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000187 V2 EN
Figure 65:
144
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.7
Technical data
Table 36:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-500)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(0.503000.00) /phase
(1.009000.00) /loop
(0.503000.00) /loop
(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees
6.3
6.3.1
Identification
Function description
Faulty phase identification with load
encroachment for mho
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
FMPSPDIS
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00346 V1 EN
6.3.2
Functionality
The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s) in
the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment.
The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.
145
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.3.3
Function block
FMPSPDIS
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
ZPICK UP
TR3PH
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHG_FLT
PHSCND
DLECND
PU_BLF
ANSI09000154-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000154 V1 EN
Figure 66:
6.3.4
Signals
Table 37:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Zpick up
BOOLEAN
TR3PH
BOOLEAN
Table 38:
Name
Description
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_A
BOOLEAN
PU_B
BOOLEAN
PU_C
BOOLEAN
PHG_FLT
BOOLEAN
PHSCND
INTEGER
DLECND
INTEGER
PU_BLF
INTEGER
146
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.3.5
Settings
Table 39:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMaxLoad
10 - 5000
%IB
200
RLd
1.00 - 3000.00
ohm/p
0.01
80.00
LdAngle
5 - 70
Deg
20
BlinderAng
5 - 90
Deg
80
Blinder angle
Table 40:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DeltaIMinOp
5 - 100
%IB
10
DeltaVMinOp
5 - 100
%VB
20
V1Level
5 - 100
%VB
80
I1LowLevel
5 - 200
%IB
10
V1MinOp
5 - 100
%VB
20
V2MinOp
1 - 100
%VB
INRelPG
10 - 100
%IB
20
3I0BLK_PP
10 - 100
%IB
40
Table 41:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
6.3.6
Operation principle
6.3.6.1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS, 21) function
can be decomposed into six different parts:
147
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent
US4409636.
The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element.
The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that filters
out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when no fault
is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs, currents
and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents and voltages resulting
in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point the notch
filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed by the delta
function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to determine if a
fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.
The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the
following criterion is fulfilled (only phase A shown):
Max(VA,VB,VC)>DeltaVMinOp
Max(IA,IB,IC)>DeltaIMinOp
where:
VA, VB and VC
are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current
filters to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a
case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components
phase selector will operate.
The delta voltages VA(B,C) and delta current IA(B,C) are the voltage and current
between sample t and sample t-1.
The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The
logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the
148
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition
for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed as:
FaultType =
EQUATION1808-ANSI V1 EN
FaultType =
EQUATION1809-ANSI V1 EN
FaultType=1
Phase-to-phase fault
FaultType=2
Three-phase fault;
FaultType=3
The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-ground fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and 3
for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if ground was involved or not.
Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.
When a single phase-to-ground fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest
quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two largest
phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.
The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the output
is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and a fault is
detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a
premature single phase-to-ground fault detection is not released for a phase-to-phase
fault. If, however, ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase-toground fault is released sooner.
If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain
amount. Each detection of either ground-to-phase or additional phases further reduce
the initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster. There is no
time delay, if for example, all three phases are faulty.
149
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
INRelPG
is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-ground measuring loop in % of IBase
In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero
sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In those
cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and negative
sequence voltage. The release of the ground-fault loops can then be achieved if all of
the following conditions are fulfilled:
|3V0|>|V2| 0.5
|3V0|>V1| 0.2
|V1|> VBase 0.2/(3)
and
150
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
3I0<0.1 IBase
or
3I0<maxIph INRelPG
where:
|3V0|
V1|
V2|
maxIph
VC
60
C-A sector
180
VB
B-C sector
VA (Ref)
A-B sector
VA
300
ANSI06000383-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000383 V2 EN
Figure 67:
The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between
the sequence voltages V2 and V1 lies within the sector defined according to figure 67
and the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V1|>V1MinOP
|V2|>V2MinOp
where:
are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltages
151
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
BG sector
CG sector
V2A
(Ref)
200
AG sector
320
en06000384_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000384 V1 EN
Figure 68:
The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians as
input to the V2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in
forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as
forward direction if the angle between V0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees, see
figure 69.
152
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Forward
200
20
Reverse
en06000385.vsd
IEC06000385 V1 EN
Figure 69:
The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the
angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector
will be active see figure 68. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the
same time.
The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if the
main sequence function has classified the angle between V0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:
|V2|>V2MinOp
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPG
where:
V2 and 3I0
are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zerosequence current (3I0)
V2MinOp
maxIph
The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.
The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage
V2 and the positive sequence voltage V1. Since this is a phase-to-phase voltage
153
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A
phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders as
for condition 1. If the calculated angle between V2 and V1 lies within one sector, the
corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition 2 is released if
both the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V2|>V2MinOp
|V1|>V1MinOp
where:
|V1| and |V2|
are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operating voltages.
140
CG sector
20
V1A
(Ref)
AG sector
BG sector
260
en06000413_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000413 V1 EN
Figure 70:
If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single phaseto-ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be the
complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- ground fault.
Condition 1 and
Condition 2
Fault type
CG
CG
CG
BG
AG
BCG
The sequence phase selector is blocked when ground is not involved or if a three-phase
fault is detected.
154
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
V1Level ,
I1LowLevel
are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
IMaxLoad
The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according
to figure 71. Only phase A is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3 Phase fault is
activated, all four outputs PICKUP, PU_A, PU_B and PU_C gets activated.
155
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
DeltaIA
b
DeltaVA
Sequence based
function
AB fault
a
OR
a>b
then c=a
else c=a
a<b
then c=b
else c=a
FaultPriority
Adaptive release
dependent on result
from Delta logic
OR
AG fault
3 Phase fault
PU_A
&
IA Valid
BLOCK
en06000386_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000386 V1 EN
Figure 71:
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS,
21) function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched Enabled/
Disabledin the respective Five zone distance protection, mho characteristic
(ZMOPDIS) function.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 72. As illustrated, the resistive
reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the same in all four
quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the load encroachment
function, as shown in figure 72.
Blinder
Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating
characteristic is illustrated in figure 72. There are six individual measuring loops with
the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-ground loops which estimate the impedance
according to
Zn = Vph / Iph
and three phase-to-phase loops according to
156
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
jX
Operation area
Operation area
RLd
LdAngle
LdAngle
R
R
LdAngle
LdAngle
RLd
Operation area
No operation area
No operation area
en06000414_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000414 V1 EN
Figure 72:
Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase
selector activates the output signals PICKUP, PU_A, PU_B and PU_C. If a ground
fault is detected the signal PHG_FLT gets activated.
The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element in ZMOPDIS (21) for releasing the correct measuring loop(s).
Note! In case none of the sequence component based phase selector or
the delta logic phase selector has identified a faulty phase, all
measuring loops in ZMQPDIS (21) are released. If the phase selectors
manage to identify one or more faulted phases only the related
measuring loop(s) is released.
The output PHSCND provides release information from the phase selection part only.
DLECND provides release information from the load encroachment part only. In these
signals, each fault type has an associated value, which represents the corresponding
zone measuring loop to be released. The values are presented in table 41.
157
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
0=
no faulted phases
1=
AG
2=
BG
4=
CG
8=
-ABG
16=
-BCG
32=
-CAG
56=
-ABCG
8=
-AB
16=
-BC
32=
-CA
56=
ABC
The signal DLECND must be connected to the input LDCND for selected mho
impedance measuring zones ZMOPDIS.
In case several loops have to be released at the same time, the value is the sum of the
values for all loops, like the value for three-phase fault is the sum of the phase-to-phase
loop values (8+16+32=56).
6.3.7
Technical data
Table 42:
Function
Load encroachment criteria:
Load resistance, forward and
reverse
6.4
Range or value
(1.003000) W/phase
(570) degrees
Accuracy
5.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.530) x In
158
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.4.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
ZDARDIR
21D
S00346 V1 EN
6.4.2
Functionality
The evaluation of the direction to the fault is made in the directional element
ZDNRDIR (21D) for the quadrilateral and mho characteristic distance protections
ZQMPDIS (21).
6.4.3
Function block
ZDARDIR (21D)
I3P*
V3P*
I3PPOL*
DIRCND
FWD_G
REV_G
STDIRCND
ANSI11000187_1_en.vsd
ANSI11000187 V1 EN
Figure 73:
6.4.4
Signals
Table 43:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
DIRCND
INTEGER
159
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 44:
Name
6.4.5
Table 45:
Type
Description
FWD_G
BOOLEAN
REV_G
BOOLEAN
STDIRCND
INTEGER
Settings
ZDARDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PolMode
-3U0
-V2
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-V2comp
-3U0
AngleRCA
-90 - 90
Deg
75
IPickup
5 - 200
%IB
VPolPU
4 - 100
%VB
IPolPU
5 - 100
%IB
10
Table 46:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AngleOp
90 - 180
Deg
160
Kmag
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
40.00
Step
Default
Table 47:
Name
GlobalBaseSelector
6.4.6
Values (Range)
1-6
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence
memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:
160
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These elements
always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in three-phase
faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.
There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase
to phase faults and double phase-to-ground faults during high load periods. To solve
these, additional directional element is used.
For phase-to-ground faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one of
following types of polarization:
Zero-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Zero-sequence current
These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance protection
directional function for ground faults (ZDARDIR).
Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The
measurement principle is illustrated in figure 74.
- 3V 0
AngleOp
AngleRCA
3I0
en06000417_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000417 V1 EN
Figure 74:
161
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
I0
I0
Z0SB
Z0 Line
Characteristic
angle
V0
V0
K*I0
V0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000418 V1 EN
Figure 75:
Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal
directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase
and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional
directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate
correct direction.
162
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Normal
directional
element
A, B, C
AND
Additional
directional
element
Release of distance
measuring element
A, B, C
AND per
phase
en06000419_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000419 V1 EN
Figure 76:
6.4.7
Technical data
Table 48:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5 200)% of IBase
(5 100)% of IBase
< 1.0% of In
(4 100)% of VBase
< 0.5% of Vn
6.5
6.5.1
Identification
Function description
Directional impedance quadrilateral
and mho
6.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZDNRDIR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D
Functionality
The evaluation of the direction to the fault is made in the directional element
ZDNRDIR (21D) for the quadrilateral and mho characteristic distance protections
ZQMPDIS (21).
163
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.5.3
Function block
I3P*
V3P*
ZDNRDIR (21D)
DIR_POL
STDIRCND
ANSI09000056-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000056 V1 EN
Figure 77:
6.5.4
Signals
Table 49:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Name
Table 51:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 50:
6.5.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
DIR_POL
GROUP SIGNAL
STDIRCND
INTEGER
Settings
ZDNRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AngNegRes
90 - 175
Deg
115
AngDir
5 - 45
Deg
15
IMinPUPG
5 - 30
%IB
IMinPUPP
5 - 30
%IB
10
Table 52:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
164
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.5.6
Monitored data
Table 53:
Name
6.5.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Aph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase A
Aph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase A
Bph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase B
Bph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase B
Cph_R
REAL
Ohm
Resistance in phase C
Cph_X
REAL
Ohm
Reactance in phase C
A_Dir
INTEGER
0=No direction
1=Forward
2=Reverse
Direction in phase A
B_Dir
INTEGER
0=No direction
1=Forward
2=Reverse
Direction in phase B
C_Dir
INTEGER
0=No direction
1=Forward
2=Reverse
Direction in phase C
Operation principle
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in directional element ZDNRDIR for
the quadrilateral and mho characteristic distance protections ZQDPDIS and
ZMOPDIS. Equation 35 and equation 36 are used to classify that the fault is in the
forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault respectively.
- AngDir < Ang
0.85 V 1A + 0.15 V 1 AM
IA
< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 35)
EQUATION1618 V1 EN
< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 36)
EQUATION1620 V1 EN
Where:
AngDir
Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)
AngNegRes
Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 78 for mho characteristics and figure 79 for quadrilateral
characteristics.
165
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
V1A
V1AM
IA
V1AB
V1ABM
IAB
The default settings for AngDir and AngNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 78 and figure 79 Setting angles for discrimination of forward
and reverse fault for mho and quadrilateral characteristic) and they should not be
changed unless system studies show the necessity.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter
DirEvalType is vital:
X
Zset reach point
AngNegRes
-AngDir
-Zs
en06000416_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000416 V1 EN
Figure 78:
Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault for mho
characteristic
166
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
AngNegRes
AngDir
en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN
Figure 79:
If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10% and 30% of IBase) the condition seals in.
167
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
and no directional indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage
exceeds 10% of its rated value.
6.6
6.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
6.6.2
PPLPHIZ
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or high
impedance grounded networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the
faulty lines at cross-country fault.
Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase-to-ground faults in isolated
and high impedance grounded networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or the
lagging phase-ground loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred fault
based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference
combinations are available for selection.
6.6.3
Function block
PPLPHIZ
I3P*
V3P
BLOCK
RELAG
RELBG
RELCG
PHSEL
PICKUP
ZREL
ANSI09000060-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000060 V1 EN
Figure 80:
168
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.6.4
Signals
Table 54:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
RELAG
BOOLEAN
RELBG
BOOLEAN
RELCG
BOOLEAN
PHSEL
INTEGER
Name
Table 56:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 55:
6.6.5
Default
Type
Description
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
ZREL
INTEGER
Settings
PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperMode
No Filter
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
No Filter
PU27PN
10.0 - 100.0
%VB
1.0
70.0
PU27PP
10.0 - 100.0
%VB
1.0
50.0
3V0PU
5.0 - 300.0
%VB
1.0
20.0
Pickup_N
10 - 200
%IB
20
tVN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tOffVN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tIN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 57:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
6.6.6
Operation principle
6.6.6.1
Operation principle
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ has 10 operation modes, which can be set by the
parameter OperMode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in table 58
below. The difference between cyclic and acyclic operation can be explained by the
following example. Assume a A fault on one line and a C fault on another line. For
OperMode = 1231c the line with C fault will be tripped (C before A) while for
OperMode = 123a the line with A 1 fault will be tripped (A before C).
Table 58:
OperMode
No filter
No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-toground faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at crosscountry faults
No pref
1231 c
1321 c
123 a
132 a
213 a
231 a
312 a
321 a
The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled voltage and current
discrimination and the second one labeled phase preference evaluation, see figure 81.
The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross-country fault. If cross-country fault is
detected, an internal signal Detected cross-country fault is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the condition
for trip.
170
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The voltage and current discrimination part gives phase segregated pickup signals if
the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter PU27PN at the
same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup. If
there is a pickup in any phase the PICKUP output signal will be activated.
The internal signal for detection of cross-country fault, DetectCrossCountry, that come
from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in
three different ways:
1.
2.
3.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N for a time
longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N at the same
time as the magnitude of 3V0 has been above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup
during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tVN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N at the same
time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
The second part, phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input
signal PHSEL together with phase selection pickup condition (from phase selection
functions) connected to input PHSEL, and the information from the setting parameter
OperMode are used to determine the condition for trip. To release the Phase preference
logic, at least two out of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it
is a single phase-to-ground, two-phase or cross-country fault and which phase to be
tripped at cross-country fault is converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the
distance protection measuring zone to release the correct measuring zone according to
the setting of OperMode. This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be
connected to the input PHSEL on the distance zone measuring element.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows: PHSEL =
AN*1 + BN*2 + CN*4 + AB*8 + AC*16 + CA*32. Example: if only AN start is
chosen the value is 1, if start AN and CN are choosen, the value is 1+4=5.
The input signals RELxxx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to
external protection functions through binary input.
171
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
VA
VB
VC
VAVB
VBVC
VCVA
IN
Voltage and
Current
Discrimination
VN
PU27PN
PICKUP
AND
PU27PP
Pickup_N
3VOPU
OperMode
RELAG
Phase Preference
Evaluation
RELBG
ZREL
AND
RELCG
PHSEL
BLOCK
ANSI10000189-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000189 V1 EN
Figure 81:
6.6.7
Technical data
Table 59:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
0,5% of Vn
< 105%
0,5% of Vn
> 95%
> 95%
Timers
(0.000 - 60.000) s
0,5% 10 ms
Operating mode
No Filter, NoPref
Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a,
312a, 321a
172
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.7
6.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ZMRPSB
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
68
Zpsb
SYMBOL-EE V1 EN
6.7.2
Functionality
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads, upon severe fault clearing
or after tripping of big generation plants.
Power swing detection function ZMRPSB (68) is used to detect power swings and
initiate block of all distance protection zones. Occurrence of ground-fault currents
during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB (68) function to allow fault clearance.
6.7.3
Function block
ZMRPSB (68)
I3P*
PICKUP
V3P*
ZOUT
BLOCK
ZIN
BLK_SS
BLK_I0
I0CHECK
EXT_PSD
ANSI09000058-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000058 V1 EN
Figure 82:
6.7.4
Signals
Table 60:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Section 6
Impedance protection
Name
Type
BLKI02
BOOLEAN
I0CHECK
BOOLEAN
EXTERNAL
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 62:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 61:
6.7.5
Default
BLKI01
Type
Description
START
BOOLEAN
ZOUT
BOOLEAN
ZIN
BOOLEAN
Settings
ZMRPSB (68) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
X1InFw
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
R1LIn
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
R1FInFw
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
X1InRv
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
R1FInRv
0.10 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
OperationLdCh
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
RLdOutFw
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
ArgLd
5 - 70
Deg
25
RLdOutRv
0.10 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
30.00
kLdRFw
0.50 - 0.90
Mult
0.01
0.75
kLdRRv
0.50 - 0.90
Mult
0.01
0.75
IMinOpPE
5 - 30
%IB
10
174
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Table 63:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tP1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.045
tP2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.015
tW
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.250
tH
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
tR1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
tR2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
Table 64:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
6.7.6
Step
Default
Description
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ,68) function comprises an inner and an outer
quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in
figure 83.
Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power
swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and
the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than a
transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is the
same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the
characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately.
175
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
jX
X1OutFw
X1InFw
DRv
ZL
R1LIn
D Fw
j
R1FInRv
R1FInFw
D Fw
LdAngle
LdAngle
DRv
D Fw
D Fw
R
D Fw
DRv
D Fw
RLdInRv RLdInFw
DRv
j
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw
D Rv
X1InRv
X1OutRv
ANSI05000175-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000175 V2 EN
Figure 83:
(Equation 37)
VA
Im
Xset
IA
EQUATION1558 V1 EN
(Equation 38)
176
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.7.6.1
RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw
EQUATION1185 V2 EN
(Equation 39)
where:
The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the
parameter LdAngle.
The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same LdAngle and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).
The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to
the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from
the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the
inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by
the parameter R1FInFw.
From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.
6.7.6.2
RLdInRv = kLdRRvRLdOutRv
EQUATION1187 V2 EN
(Equation 40)
where:
177
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant.
The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load encroachment
part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner boundary. The outer
boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.
The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment
zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The
angle of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in
the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for
the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is DRv.
6.7.6.3
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as
X1InRv + DRv.
where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv
6.7.6.4
The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the
three phases. Figure 84 presents a composition of an internal detection signal DETA in this particular phase.
Signals ZOUT_n (outer boundary) and ZIN_n (inner boundary) in figure 84 are related
to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately (n
represents the corresponding A, B and C). They are internal signals, calculated by
ZMRPSB (68) function.
178
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
The tP1 timer in figure 84 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are usually
not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the detection of
the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area and returns
within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of figure 84 (internal
input signal ZOUT_A, ZIN_A, AND-gates and tP-timers) are duplicated for phase B
and C. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings.
ZOUTA
ZINA
0-tP1
0
AND
AND
0-tP2
0
OR
-loop
AND
ZOUTB
ZOUTC
detected
-loop
OR
AND
DET-A
OR
0
0-tW
ANSI05000113-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000113 V2 EN
Figure 84:
179
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
ZOUT_A
ZOUT
OR
ZOUT_B
ZIN_A
ZOUT_C
ZIN
OR
ZIN_B
AND
ZIN_C
AND
I0CHECK
AND
BLK_I0
10 ms
t
OR
tR1
AND
INHIBIT
OR
-loop
AND
BLK_SS
BLOCK
0-tR2
0
-loop
DET 1of3 - int
DET 2of3 - int
OR
0
0-tH
OR
EXT_PSD
AND
PICKUP
ANSI09000223-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000223 V3 EN
Figure 85:
6.7.6.5
180
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.7.7
which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this
condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLK_SS functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if
an ground-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the
power swing has been detected before the ground-fault (activation of the signal
I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1
signal to the BLK_I0 functional input.
Technical data
Table 65:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reactive reach
(0.10-3000.00) W/phase
Resistive reach
(0.101000.00) W/phase
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(5-30)% of IBase
1.0% of In
6.8
6.8.1
Identification
Function description
Automatic switch onto fault logic,
voltage and current based
6.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZCVPSOF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based ZCVPSOF is a function
that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection
check is provided to activate the function when the line is dead.
Mho distance protections can not operate for switch onto fault condition when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on VI Level shall be
configured for this purpose.
181
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.8.3
Function block
ZCVPSOF
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BC
ZACC
TRIP
ANSI09000057-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000057 V1 EN
Figure 86:
6.8.4
Signals
Table 66:
Name
Type
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BC
BOOLEAN
ZACC
BOOLEAN
Table 67:
Name
Type
TRIP
6.8.5
Default
I3P
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
Table 68:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Mode
Impedance
VILevel
VILvl&Imp
VILevel
AutoInit
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
IphPickup
1 - 100
%IB
20
182
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UVPickup
1 - 100
%VB
70
tDuration
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tSOTF
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tDLD
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
Table 69:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
6.8.6
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based function (ZCVPSOF) can
be activated externally by Breaker Closed Input or internally (automatically) by using
VI Level Based Logic see figure 87.
The activation from the Dead line detection function is released if the internal signal
deadLine from the VILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is
not activated during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is
set to Enabled.
When the setting AutoInit is Disabled, the function is activated by an external binary
input BC. To get a trip one of the following operation modes must also be selected by
the parameter Mode:
Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected
to non directional distance protection zone).
Mode = VILevel; trip is released if VILevel detector is activated.
Mode = VILvl&Imp; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or VILevel
detection.
The internal signal deadLine from the VILevel detector is activated if all three phase
currents and voltages are below the setting IPhPickup and UVPickup.
VI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the
voltage is very low. The logic is based on current and voltage levels. The internal
signal SOTF VILevel is activated if a phase voltage is below the setting UVPickup and
corresponding phase current is above the setting IPhPickup longer than the time
tDuration.
183
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
ZCVPSOF can be activated externally from input BC and thus setting AutoInit is
bypassed.
The function is released during a settable time tSOTF.
The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
BLOCK
15
AND
TRIP
BC
AutiInit=Enabled
ZACC
AND
OR
tSOFT
tDLD
IA
deadLine
IB
IC
VA
UILevel detector
VB
VC
IphPickup
tDuration
SOTFUILevel
UVPickup
AND
Mode = Impedance
AND
Mode = VILevel
OR
OR
Mode = VILvl&Imp
AND
ANSI09000398-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000398 V2 EN
Figure 87:
Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage
and current based.
184
Technical Manual
Section 6
Impedance protection
6.8.7
Technical data
Table 70:
Parameter
Range or value
Accuracy
(1100)% of
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of
1.0% of In
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
VBase
IBase
185
Technical Manual
186
Section 7
Current protection
Section 7
Current protection
7.1
7.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
PHPIOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
7.1.2
Functionality
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
7.1.3
Function block
PHPIOC (50)
I3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
ANSI08000001-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000001 V1 EN
Figure 88:
7.1.4
Signals
Table 71:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
187
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 72:
Name
Type
TRIP
7.1.5
Table 73:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
PHPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
Pickup
5 - 2500
%IB
200
Table 74:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.1.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 75:
Name
7.1.7
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
I_A
REAL
Current in phase A
I_B
REAL
Current in phase B
I_C
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental
frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase
current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
function PHPIOC (50). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operation current value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
PHPIOC (50) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
188
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.1.8
Technical data
Table 76:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Reset time
30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Operate time
10 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset
Reset time
40 ms typically at 5 to 0 x Iset
2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
7.2
7.2.1
Identification
Function description
Instantaneous phase overcurrent
protection, phase segregated output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SPTPIOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50
3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN
7.2.2
Functionality
The instantaneous phase overcurrent function for single pole tripping has a low
transient overreach and short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit
protection function and where the requirement for tripping is one- and/or three-phase.
189
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.2.3
Function block
SPTPIOC (50)
I3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
ANSI10000215-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000215 V1 EN
Figure 89:
7.2.4
Signals
Table 77:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 79:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 78:
7.2.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
Settings
SPTPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
Pickup
5 - 2500
%IB
200
Table 80:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
190
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.2.6
Monitored Data
Table 81:
Name
7.2.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
Current in phase A
IB
REAL
Current in phase B
IC
REAL
Current in phase C
Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components, as well as sampled values, of
each phase current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase
current values are fed to the Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection phase
segregated output SPTPIOC (50) function. In a comparator the RMS values are
compared to the set operation current value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is
larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to
true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output signal TR_x(x=A, B or C) for
this phase and the TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.
The SPTPIOC (50) function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
7.2.8
Technical data
Table 82:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Reset time
30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Operate time
10 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset
Reset time
40 ms typically at 5 to 0 x Iset
2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
191
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.3
7.3.1
Identification
Function description
Four step phase overcurrent protection
3-phase output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OC4PTOC
3I>
4
4
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51/67
alt
TOC-REVA V1 EN
7.3.2
Functionality
The four step phase overcurrent protection function, 3-phase output OC4PTOC (51/67)
has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.
The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to
be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually
192
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.3.3
Function block
OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
BLOCK
TRST2
BLK1
TRST3
BLK2
TRST4
BLK3
PICKUP
BLK4
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
2NDHARM
ANSI08000002-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000002 V2 EN
Figure 90:
7.3.4
Signals
Table 83:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
BLKST3
BOOLEAN
Block of step 3
BLKST4
BOOLEAN
Block of step 4
Table 84:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR1
BOOLEAN
TR2
BOOLEAN
TR3
BOOLEAN
TR4
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
193
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
7.3.5
Table 85:
Name
Type
Description
ST1
BOOLEAN
ST2
BOOLEAN
ST3
BOOLEAN
ST4
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
ST2NDHRM
BOOLEAN
Settings
OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
DirMode1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist1
I1>
5 - 2500
%IB
1000
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
5 - 10000
%IB
100
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
194
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DirMode2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
I2>
5 - 2500
%IB
500
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
DirMode3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
I3>
5 - 2500
%IB
250
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
DirMode4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist4
I4>
5 - 2500
%IB
175
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
5 - 10000
%IB
100
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
195
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 86:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
HarmRestrain
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
%IFund
20
HarmRestrain1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
HarmRestrain2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
HarmRestrain3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
HarmRestrain4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Table 87:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
MeasType
DFT
RMS
DFT
7.3.6
Monitored data
Table 88:
Name
7.3.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DIRL1
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1
REAL
Current in phase A
IL2
REAL
Current in phase B
IL3
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The protection design can be divided in four parts:
196
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
faultState
Direction
Element
I3P
dirPhAFlt
dirPhBFlt
dirPhCFlt
faultState
PICKUP
V3P
TRIP
Harmonic
Restraint
Element
harmRestrBlock
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
ANSI05000740-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000740 V2 EN
Figure 91:
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase
overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to
197
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to
select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option
is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC
component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are
fed to OC4PTOC (51/67).
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4). If a
phase current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx,
PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are, without delay, activated. Output signals PU_A, PU_B
and PU_C are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be
noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local
HMI for OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the
pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current
angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement
at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The
following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
Vref _ AB = VA - VB
I dir _ AB = I A - I B
(Equation 41)
GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN
Vref _ BC = VB - VC
ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN
I dir _ BC = I B - I C
(Equation 42)
198
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Vref _ CA = VC - VA
I dir _ CA = IC - I A
(Equation 43)
ANSIEQUATION1451 V1 EN
Vref _ A = VA
I dir _ A = I A
(Equation 44)
ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN
Vref _ B = VB
I dir _ B = I B
(Equation 45)
ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN
Vref _ C = VC
ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN
I dir _ C = I C
(Equation 46)
199
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Vref
1
2
2
4
Idir
ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN
Figure 92:
If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed. A wide range of
standardized inverse time characteristics is available. The possibilities for inverse time
characteristics are described in section "Inverse time characteristics".
All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
The binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
200
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP|
Pickupx
AND
OR
a>b
TRx
0-tx
0
STx
AND
0-txMin
0
BLKSTx
AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
OR
DirModeSelx=Disabled
STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
FORWARD_Int
DirModeSelx=Reverse
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000008 V1 EN
Figure 93:
7.3.8
BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase
IOP
a>b
Extract second
harmonic current
component
Extract
fundamental
current component
a>b
2NDHARMD
AND
a>b
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
2ndHarmStab
IEC13000014-1-en.vsd
IEC13000014 V1 EN
Figure 94:
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.3.9
Technical data
Table 89:
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
Operate current
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
(5-10000)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
(5100)% of fundamental
2.0% of In
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
15 curve types
1)
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
50 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
1) Note:
ANSI/IEEE C37.112
IEC 60255151
3% or 40 ms
0.10 k 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off
7.4
7.4.1
Identification
Function description
Four step phase
overcurrent protection,
phase segregated
output
OC4SPTOC
ID-2147.VSD V1 EN
202
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.4.2
Functionality
The four step phase overcurrent function for single pole tripping OC4SPTOC (51_67)
has an inverse or definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available.
The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to
be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually.
The tripping can be configured for one- and/or three-phase.
7.4.3
Function block
OC4SPTOC (51_67)
I3P
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
BLOCK
TRST2
BLK1
TRST3
BLK2
TRST4
BLK3
TR_A
BLK4
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PU2NDHARM
ANSI10000216-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000216 V3 EN
Figure 95:
7.4.4
Signals
Table 90:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKST1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
203
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLKST2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
BLKST3
BOOLEAN
Block of step 3
BLKST4
BOOLEAN
Block of step 4
Table 91:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR1
BOOLEAN
TR2
BOOLEAN
TR3
BOOLEAN
TR4
BOOLEAN
TRL1
BOOLEAN
TRL2
BOOLEAN
TRL3
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
ST1
BOOLEAN
ST2
BOOLEAN
ST3
BOOLEAN
ST4
BOOLEAN
STL1
BOOLEAN
STL2
BOOLEAN
STL3
BOOLEAN
ST2NDHRM
BOOLEAN
204
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.4.5
Table 92:
Name
Settings
OC4SPTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DirMode1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist1
I1>
5 - 2500
%IB
1000
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
k1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
5 - 10000
%IB
100
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
DirMode2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
I2>
5 - 2500
%IB
500
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
DirMode3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
I3>
5 - 2500
%IB
250
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DirMode4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist4
I4>
5 - 2500
%IB
175
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
k4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
5 - 10000
%IB
100
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
Table 93:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
%IB
20
HarmRestrain1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
HarmRestrain2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
HarmRestrain3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
HarmRestrain4
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
HarmRestrain
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
206
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 94:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
MeasType
DFT
RMS
DFT
7.4.6
Monitored data
Table 95:
Name
7.4.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
DIRL1
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL2
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
DIRL3
INTEGER
1=Forward
2=Reverse
0=No direction
IL1
REAL
Current in phase A
IL2
REAL
Current in phase B
IL3
REAL
Current in phase C
Operation principle
The function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For each
step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and 4, an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx:
Disabled/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.
The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:
207
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the Four step phase
overcurrent protection phase segregated output OC4SPTOC (51_67) function, it is
possible to select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is
possible to select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option
is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC
component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are
fed to OC4SPTOC (51_67).
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If a
phase current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx,
PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are, without delay, activated. Output signals PU_A, PU_B
and PU_C are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be
noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4SPTOC (51_67).
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local
HMI for OC4SPTOC (51_67), which simplifies testing, commissioning and in service
operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the
pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current
angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement
at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent or phase voltage (85%) and a memory phase voltage
(15%). The following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:
Phase-phase short circuit:
Section 7
Current protection
Vref_A = VA Idir_A = IA
Vref_B = VB Idir_B = IB
Vref_C = VC IdirC = IC
Vref
1
2
2
4
Idir
ANSI09000636-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000636 V1 EN
Figure 96:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If no blockings are given, the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for step 1 and 4 can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed. A wide range of
standardized inverse time characteristics is available. The possibilities for inverse time
209
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
characteristics are described in section "Inverse time characteristics". All four steps in
OC4SPTOC (51_67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The binary input
BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.
7.4.8
Technical data
Table 96:
Function
Accuracy
(5-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
(5-10000)% of lBase
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
15 curve types
1)
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
50 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
35 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
1) Note:
7.5
Setting range
Operate current
ANSI/IEEE C37.112
IEC 60255151
3% or 40 ms
0.10 k 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off.
210
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EFPIOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50N
IN>>
IEF V1 EN
7.5.2
Functionality
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous ground-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
minimum source impedance. EFPIOC (50N) is configured to measure the residual
current from the three-phase current inputs and can be configured to measure the
current from a separate current input. EFPIOC (50N) can be blocked by activating the
input BLOCK.
7.5.3
Function block
EFPIOC (50N)
I3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
ANSI08000003-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000003 V1 EN
Figure 97:
7.5.4
Signals
Table 97:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Table 98:
Name
TRIP
Description
Trip signal
211
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.5.5
Table 99:
Name
Settings
EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
Pickup
1 - 2500
%IB
200
Table 100:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.5.6
Unit
Step
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 101:
Name
IN
7.5.7
Default
REAL
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Description
Residual current
Operation principle
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as
well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value
is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC,50N). In a
comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the
function (Pickup). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal
from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output
signal TRIP.
7.5.8
Technical data
Table 102:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
212
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reset time
30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Operate time
10 ms typically at 0 to 5x Iset
Reset time
40 ms typically at 5 to 0x Iset
2 ms typically at 0 to 5 x Iset
Dynamic overreach
< 5% at t = 100 ms
7.6
7.6.1
Identification
Function description
Four step residual overcurrent
protection, zero or negative sequence
direction
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
EF4PTOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N/67N
2
IEC11000263 V1 EN
7.6.2
Functionality
The four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction
(EF4PTOC, 51N/67N) has independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4.
Step 2 and 3 are always definite time delayed.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each
of the steps.
The directional part of the function can be set to operate on following combinations:
213
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.
Other setting combinations are possible, but not recommended.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be used as main protection for phase-to-ground faults.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the
case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication
logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end
infeed functionality are available as well.
7.6.3
Function block
EF4PTOC (51N_67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
I3PPOL*
TRST2
I3PDIR*
TRST3
BLOCK
TRST4
BLK1
BFI_3P
BLK2
PU_ST1
BLK3
PU_ST2
BLK4
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PUFW
PUREV
2NDHARMD
ANSI08000004-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000004 V2 EN
Figure 98:
214
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.4
Signals
Table 103:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
I3PPOL
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
BLK2
BOOLEAN
BLK3
BOOLEAN
BLK4
BOOLEAN
Table 104:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
TRST3
BOOLEAN
TRST4
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
PUST1
BOOLEAN
PUST2
BOOLEAN
PUST3
BOOLEAN
PUST4
BOOLEAN
PUFW
BOOLEAN
PUREV
BOOLEAN
2NDHARMD
BOOLEAN
215
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.5
Table 105:
Name
Settings
EF4PTOC (51N_67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AngleRCA
-180 - 180
Deg
65
polMethod
Voltage
Current
Dual
Voltage
Type of polarization
VPolMin
1 - 100
%VB
IPolMin
2 - 100
%IB
RNPol
0.50 - 1000.00
ohm
0.01
5.00
XNPol
0.50 - 3000.00
ohm
0.01
40.00
INDirPU
1 - 100
%IB
10
2ndHarmStab
5 - 100
20
DirModeSel1
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist1
Pickup1
1 - 2500
%IB
100
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
TD1
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin1
1 - 10000
%IB
100
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.000
Description
Minimum operate time for inverse curves for
step 1
HarmRestrain1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel2
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Pickup2
1 - 2500
%IB
50
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
IMin2
1 - 10000
%IB
50
HarmRestrain2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel3
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Pickup3
1 - 2500
%IB
33
t3
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.800
IMin3
1 - 10000
%IB
33
HarmRestrain3
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
DirModeSel4
Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
Characterist4
Pickup4
1 - 2500
%IB
17
t4
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.200
217
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Step
Default
TD4
0.05 - 999.00
0.01
0.05
IMin4
1 - 10000
%IB
17
t4Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
HarmRestrain4
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Table 106:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.6.6
Description
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 107:
Name
7.6.7
Unit
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IOp
REAL
VPol
REAL
kV
IPol
REAL
VPolIang
REAL
deg
IPOLIANG
REAL
deg
Operation principle
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero or negative sequence direction
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function has the following four Analog Inputs on its function
block in the configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.
4.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.
218
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.7.1
2.
calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will
take I2 from same SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input (same SMAI AI3P
connected to I3P input)):
EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN
where:
IA, IB, IC
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If
the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal PU_STx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a
common PICKUP signal.
219
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.7.2
Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction
to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use either the residual voltage
3V0 or the negative sequence voltage V2 as polarizing quantity V3P.
The residual voltage can be:
1.
2.
ANSIEQUATION2407 V1 EN
where:
VA, VB, VC
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
The negative sequence voltage is calculated from the three-phase voltage input within
the IED by using the pre-processing block. The preprocessing block will calculate the
negative sequence voltage from the three inputs into the pre-processing block by using
the following formula:
VPol = (VA+ alpha VB + alpha VC)/3
GUID-F09A69D7-A8A6-4354-B0B8-F4EC7BBE603F V2 EN
(Equation 50)
220
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
where:
VA, VB, VC
alpha
The polarizing phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional
current, in order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In
order to enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter VpolMin.
It shall be noted that residual voltage (Vn) or negative sequence voltage (V2) is used to
determine the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion of the
polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.
Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current
(3I0) or the calculated negative sequence current (I2) as polarizing quantity IPol. The
user can select the required current.
The residual current can be:
1.
2.
For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection).
calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I Pol = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 51)
where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
221
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
The negative sequence current can be calculated from the three-phase current input
within the IED by using the pre-processing block. The pre-processing block will
calculate the negative sequence current from the three inputs into the pre-processing
block by using the following formula:
Ipol = (IA+alpha 2 IB+alpha IC)/3
(Equation 52)
ANSIEQUATION2406 V2 EN
where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
alpha
The polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor
is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to
calculate equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:
VIPol = Zo S I Pol = ( RNPol + j XNPOL ) I Pol
EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 53)
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating directional current,
in order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.
Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
VTotPol=VVPol + VIPol=VPol + Z 0s IPol = VPol + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) Ipol
ANSIEQUATION2408 V1 EN
(Equation 54)
Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/
Reverse).
222
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.7.3
7.6.7.4
7.6.7.5
7.6.7.6
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
definite time delayed. All of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section
"Inverse time characteristics".
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves and reset time delay are
defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second
harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 99.
Characteristn=DefTime
|IOP|
Pickupx
AND
OR
a>b
0-tx
0
TRSTx
PU_STx
AND
0-txMin
0
BLKx
BLOCK
AND
Inverse
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
Characteristn=Inverse
OR
HarmRestrainx=Disabled
OR
DirModeSelx=Disabled
STEPx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
DirModeSelx=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI09000638-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000638 V3 EN
Figure 99:
The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, PU_STx and TRSTx and , can be blocked from the binary
input BLKn.
7.6.7.7
224
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
The protection has integrated directional feature. The operating quantity current
I3PDIR is always used. The polarizinwcg method is determined by the parameter
setting polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of
the following three ways:
1.
2.
3.
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 100, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.
Operating area
PUREV
0.6 * INDirPU
Characteristic
for PUREV
40% of
INDirPU
RCA
65
VPol = -3V0
INDirPU
PUFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW
ANSI11000243-1-en.ai
ANSI11000243 V1 EN
Figure 100:
225
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime
|IOP|
Pickupx
AND
OR
a>b
0-tx
0
AND
TRSTx
PU_STx
AND
0-txMin
0
BLKx
AND
BLOCK
Inverse
Characteristx=Inverse
OR
DirModeSelx=Disabled
STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
DirModeSelx=Reverse
FORWARD_Int
REVERSE_Int
AND
OR
AND
ANSI11000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000281 V1 EN
Figure 101:
226
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Operating area
PUREV
0.6 * IDirPU
Characteristic
for PUREV
40% of
IDIR
RCA
65 deg
Vpol = -V2
IDIR
PUFW
I op = 3I2
Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW
ANSI11000269-2-en.ai
ANSI11000269 V2 EN
Figure 102:
Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:
227
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
1.
2.
a
a>b
b
0.6
PUREV
AND
REVERSE_Int
X
a
a>b
IDirPU
0.4
FORWARD_Int
PUFW
AND
FWD
polMethod=Voltage
OR
polMethod=Dual
VPol
polMethod=Current
OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol
BLOCK
VPolMin
T
0.0 F
IPolMin
I3PDIR
AND
FORWARD_Int
AND
REVERSE_Int
Directional
Characteristic
AngleRCA
VTPol
RVS
T
F
Complex
Number
VIPol
0.0
T
F
STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
OR
AND
ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd
ANSI07000067 V4 EN
Figure 103:
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step
228
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.8
BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase
Extract
fundamental
current component
a>b
Extract second
harmonic current
component
IOP
a>b
2NDHARMD
AND
a>b
2ndHarmStab
q-1
t=70ms
t
OR
AN
D
OR
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
UseStartValue
a>b
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
IEC13000015-1-en.vsd
IEC13000015 V1 EN
Figure 104:
229
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.6.9
Technical data
Table 108:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(1-2500)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
(1100)% of lBase
2.0% of In
(1100)% of lBase
2.0% of In
(1-10000)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I < In
1.0% of I at I >In
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
15 curve types
1)
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(2100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(2100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(0.50-1000.00) W/phase
(0.503000.00) W/phase
30 ms typically at 0,5 to 2 x IN
30 ms typically at 2 to 0,5 x IN
1) Note:
ANSI/IEEE C37.112
IEC 60255151
3% or 40 ms
0.10 k 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
Timing accuracy only valid when 2nd harmonic blocking is turned off.
230
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.7
7.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
7.7.2
SDEPSDE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
67N
Functionality
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance grounding, the ground fault
current is significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. In addition to this, the
magnitude of the fault current is almost independent on the fault location in the
network. The protection can be selected to use either the residual current, 3I0cosj or
3I0j, or residual power component 3V03I0cos j, for operating quantity. There is
also available one non-directional 3I0 step and one non-directional 3V0 overvoltage
tripping step.
7.7.3
Function block
SDEPSDE (67N)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKVN
TRIP
TRDIRIN
TRNDIN
TRVN
PICKUP
PUDIRIN
PUNDIN
PUVN
PUFW
PUREV
CND
VNREL
ANSI08000036-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000036 V1 EN
Figure 105:
231
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.7.4
Signals
Table 109:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKUN
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 111:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 110:
7.7.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRDIRIN
BOOLEAN
TRNDIN
BOOLEAN
TRUN
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STDIRIN
BOOLEAN
STNDIN
BOOLEAN
STUN
BOOLEAN
STFW
BOOLEAN
STRV
BOOLEAN
STDIR
INTEGER
Direction of fault
UNREL
BOOLEAN
Settings
SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpMode
3I0Cosfi
3I03V0Cosfi
3I0 and fi
3I0Cosfi
DirMode
Forward
Reverse
Forward
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
RCADir
-179 - 180
Deg
-90
RCAComp
-10.0 - 10.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
ROADir
0 - 90
Deg
90
INCosPhi>
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
SN>
0.25 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
INDir>
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
5.00
tDef
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
SRef
0.03 - 200.00
%SB
0.01
10.00
kSN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
OpINNonDir>
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
INNonDir>
1.00 - 400.00
%IB
0.01
10.00
tINNonDir
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
TimeChar
tMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.040
kIN
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
1.00
OpUN>
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UN>
1.00 - 300.00
%VB
0.01
20.00
233
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tUN
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
INRel>
0.25 - 200.00
%IB
0.01
1.00
UNRel>
1.00 - 300.00
%VB
0.01
3.00
Step
Default
Table 112:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.7.6
Step
Default
Description
Unit
-
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 113:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
INCOSPHI
REAL
IN
REAL
UN
REAL
kV
SN
REAL
MVA
Measured magnitude of
residual power 3I03V0cos(FiRCA)
ANG FI-RCA
REAL
deg
7.7.7
Operation principle
7.7.7.1
Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-processor
blocks.
The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
234
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.7.7.2
RCA = 0, ROA = 90
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
3I0 cos
-3V0=Vref
en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN
Figure 106:
RCADir set to 0
235
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Vref
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang(3I0) ang(Vref)
-3V0
en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN
Figure 107:
For trip, both the residual current 3I0cos and the release voltage 3V0, must be larger
than the set levels: INCosPhiPU and VNRelPU.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite
time delay.
There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is
larger than a set value as shown in figure 108. This is equivalent to blocking of the
function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.
236
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
3I0
3I0 cos
Operate area
-3V
=V3V
Vref0=ref o
RCA = 0
ROA
ANSI06000650-2vsd
en06000650_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000650 V2 EN
Figure 108:
237
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Operate area
-3V0=Vref
Instrument
transformer
angle error
RCA = 0
RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation
3I0 (prim)
en06000651_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000651 V1 EN
Figure 109:
7.7.7.3
Explanation of RCAComp
238
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
This sub-function has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse
time delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
tinv =
EQUATION2032-ANSI V2 EN
7.7.7.4
Operate area
3I0
Vref=-3V0
ANSI06000652-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000652 V2 EN
Figure 110:
Example of characteristic
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level INDirPU, the release
voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set level VNRelPU and the angle shall be in the
set sector ROADir and RCADir.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
239
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.7.7.5
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the
forward direction, and PUREV: Pickup in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse
direction will give the pickup signal PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the
pickup signal PUFW.
7.7.7.6
7.7.7.7
240
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
When the function is activated binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the output
signals are active after the set delay tVNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 111.
PUNDIN
INNonDirPU
UN_PU
0-t
0
TRNDIN
0-t
0
TRVN
PUVN
OpMODE=INcosPhi
Pickup_N
AND
INCosPhiPU
OpMODE=INVNCosPhi
AND
OR
PUDIRIN
AND
INVNCosPhiPU
SN
AND
TRDIRIN
TimeChar = InvTime
AND
TimeChar = DefTime
DirMode = Forw
AND
AND
OR
PUFW
Forw
DirMode = Rev
AND
PUREV
Rev
en06000653_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000653 V1 EN
Figure 111:
241
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.7.8
Technical data
Table 114:
Function
Operate level for 3I0cosj
directional residual
overcurrent
Range or value
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
Accuracy
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In
(0.25-200.00)% of SBase
2.0% of Sn at S Sn
2.0% of S at S > Sn
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of SBase
10% of set value
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In
(1.00-400.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting <5% of In:
0.1% of In
(1.00-200.00)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In
0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
15 curve types
ANSI/IEEE C37.112
IEC 60255151
3.0% or90 ms
0.10 k 3.00
1.5 x Iset I 20 x Iset
2.0 degrees
242
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0-90) degrees
2.0 degrees
60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x 1set
65 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
65 ms typically at 2 to 0 x 1set
35 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
25 ms typically
7.8
7.8.1
Identification
Function description
Time delayed 2-step undercurrent
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
UC2PTUC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37
3I<
IEC09000131 V2 EN
7.8.2
Functionality
Time delayed 2-step undercurrent protection UC2PTUC (37) function is used to
supervise the line for low current, for example, to detect a loss-of-load condition,
which results in a current lower than the normal load current.
243
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.8.3
Function block
UC2PTUC (37)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
RI
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
ANSI09000124-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000124 V1 EN
Figure 112:
7.8.4
Signals
Table 115:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 116:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
RI
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
Start of step 1
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Start of step 2
244
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.8.5
Table 117:
Settings
UC2PTUC (37) Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
I1Mode
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
I1<
5.0 - 100.0
%IB
1.0
10.0
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
tReset1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
I2Mode
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
I2<
5.0 - 100.0
%IB
1.0
30.0
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
tReset2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPulse
0.01 - 2.00
0.01
0.10
IBlk
5.0 - 100.0
%IB
1.0
5.0
Table 118:
Name
GlobalBaseSelector
7.8.6
Values (Range)
1-6
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
Time delayed 2-step undercurrent protection (UC2PTUC, 37) function generates
output signals PICKUP and TRIP. The 2-steps in the function are identical, hence, only
step1 is explained below.
UC2PTUC (37) function compares the magnitude of the measured current with a set
current level, I1<. The undercurrent function operates and generates output signals,
PICKUP and PU_ST1, when the magnitude of the measured current is smaller than the
set current level I1<.
The low current condition also starts a definite time delay, t1. The current measuring
condition is based on a selected number of phases involved for operation according to
setting parameter, I1Mode. When the low current condition continues for longer time
than the set time t1, the UC2PTUC (37) function generates trip signals, TRIP and
TRST1. The lengths of these signals are controlled by a pulse timer, tPulse. The
245
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
PICKUP and TRIP output signals can be reset instantaneous or time delay with the
time setting, tReset1.
An included blocking step is used to block UC2PTUC (37) when the power is shut off.
The blocking step operates when all three phase currents are below the set value of
IBlk.
Step 2 is exactly designed as step 1. All corresponding output signals and settings of
step 2 are suffixed with 2.
7.8.7
Technical data
Table 119:
Function
Setting range
Accuracy
(5.0-100.0)% of IBase in
steps of 1.0%
1.0 % of In
(5.0-100.0)% of IBase in
steps of 1.0%
1.0 % of In
(0.000-60.000) s in steps
of 1 ms
0.5 % 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s in steps
of 1 ms
0.5 % 25 ms
Reset ratio
<105%
7.9
7.9.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
LFPTTR
26
LCPTTR
26
246
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.9.2
Functionality
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated
a need of a thermal overload protection also for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory. The temperature is displayed in either in Celsius
or in Fahrenheit depending on whether the function used is Thermal overload
protection one time constant, Fahrenheit LFPTTR (26) or Celsius LCPTTR.
An alarm pickup gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.
Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to reclose after operation
are presented.
7.9.3
Function block
LFPTTR (26)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
RI
AMBTEMP
ALARM
SENSFLT
LOCKOUT
RESET
TEMP
TEMPAMB
TERMLOAD
ANSI11000246-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000246 V1 EN
LCPTTR (26)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
RI
AMBTEMP
ALARM
SENSFLT
LOCKOUT
RESET
TEMP
TEMPAMB
TERMLOAD
ANSI08000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000038 V2 EN
Figure 113:
247
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.9.4
Signals
Table 120:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
AMBTEMP
REAL
SENSFLT
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 121:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
AMBTEMP
REAL
SENSFLT
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 122:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Lockout signal
TEMP
REAL
TEMPAMB
REAL
TERMLOAD
REAL
Table 123:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Alarm signal
LOCKOUT
BOOLEAN
Lockout signal
248
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Name
7.9.5
Table 124:
Name
Type
Description
TEMP
REAL
TEMPAMB
REAL
TERMLOAD
REAL
Settings
LFPTTR (26) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
TRef
0 - 600
Deg F
160
IRef
0 - 400
%IB
100
Tau
1 - 1000
Min
45
AlarmTemp
0 - 400
Deg F
175
TripTemp
0 - 600
Deg F
195
ReclTemp
0 - 600
Deg F
170
AmbiSens
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DefaultAmbTemp
-50 - 250
Deg F
60
DefaultTemp
-50 - 600
Deg F
100
Table 125:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Table 126:
Name
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
TRef
0 - 300
Deg C
90
IRef
0 - 400
%IB
100
Tau
1 - 1000
Min
45
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
AlarmTemp
0 - 200
Deg C
80
TripTemp
0 - 300
Deg C
90
ReclTemp
0 - 300
Deg C
75
AmbiSens
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DefaultAmbTemp
-50 - 100
Deg C
20
DefaultTemp
-50 - 300
Deg C
50
Table 127:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.9.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 128:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TTRIP
INTEGER
TENRECL
INTEGER
TEMP
REAL
Temperature
Fahrenheit
TEMPAMB
REAL
Temperature
Fahrenheit
Table 129:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
TTRIP
INTEGER
TENRECL
INTEGER
TEMP
REAL
deg
TEMPAMB
REAL
deg
250
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.9.7
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the
RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload
protection, one time constant LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) function. The temperature is
displayed either in Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on whether LFPTTR/LCPTTR
(26) function is selected.
From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according
to the expression:
Q final
I
=
I ref
Tref
(Equation 56)
EQUATION1167 V1 EN
where:
I
Iref
Tref
If this temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a
PICKUP output signal is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final
Dt
- Q n-1 ) 1 - e t
EQUATION1168 V1 EN
(Equation 57)
where:
Qn
Qn-1
Qfinal
Dt
is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)
Section 7
Current protection
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:
Q
- Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n
EQUATION1169 V1 EN
(Equation 58)
Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final
Q
Q
final
n
EQUATION1170 V1 EN
(Equation 59)
The calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.
252
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Final Temp
> TripTemp
PICKUP
actual temperature
Calculation
of actual
temperature
IA, IB, IC
Calculation
of final
temperature
Actual Temp >
AlarmTemp
ALARM
TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp
Lockout
logic
LOCKOUT
Actual Temp
< Recl Temp
Calculation
of time to
trip
Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout
TTRIP
TENRECL
ANSI09000637-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000637 V2 EN
Figure 114:
253
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.9.8
Technical data
Table 130:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reference current
(0-400)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Reference temperature
(0-600) F, (0 - 300)C
2.0F, 2.0C
Operate time:
Alarm temperature
(0-400)F, (0-200)C
2.0C
2.0F
Trip temperature
(0--600)F, (0-300)C
2.0C
2.0F
(0-600)F, (0-300)C
2.0C
2.0F
I 2 - I p2
t = t ln
I 2 - I ref 2
EQUATION1356 V2 EN
(Equation 60)
7.10
7.10.1
Identification
Function description
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase
activation and output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CCRBRF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50BF
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
7.10.2
Functionality
CCRBRF (50BF) can be current based, contact based, or an adaptive combination of
these two conditions.
254
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.3
Function block
CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P*
BLOCK
BFI_3P
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C
TRBU
TRRET
ANSI09000272-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000272 V1 EN
Figure 115:
7.10.4
Signals
Table 131:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
52a_A
BOOLEAN
52a_B
BOOLEAN
52a_C
BOOLEAN
255
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 132:
Name
7.10.5
Table 133:
Name
Type
Description
TRBU
BOOLEAN
TRRET
BOOLEAN
Settings
CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Pickup_PH
5 - 200
%IB
10
Pickup_N
2 - 200
%IB
10
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Table 134:
Name
Pickup_BlkCont
Table 135:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
Step
%IB
Default
20
Description
Current for blocking of 52a operation in % of
Ibase
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
256
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.10.6
Monitored data
Table 136:
Name
7.10.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
I_A
REAL
I_B
REAL
I_C
REAL
IN
REAL
Operation principle
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase activation and output CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated
from protection trip command, either from protection functions within the IED or from
external protection devices.
The initiate signal is general for all three phases. A re-trip attempt can be made after a
set time delay. The re-trip function can be done with or without CB position check
based on current and/or contact evaluation. With the current check the re-trip is only
performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the operate current
level. With contact check the re-trip is only performed if breaker is indicated as closed.
The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
initiate the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation
and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special
algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast
resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not
detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is
initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:
257
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Pickup_PH
a
b
FunctionMode
a>b
Current
OR
AND
Reset A
OR
Contact
Time out A
OR
I_A
AND
Current High A
CB Closed A
AND
OR
BFP Started A
a
Pickup_BlkCont
AND
a>b
AND
OR
AND
52a_A
Contact Closed A
AND
ANSI09000977-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000977 V1 EN
Figure 116:
BFP Started A
RetripMode
t1
t
From other
phases
AND
No CBPos Check
OR
CB Pos Check
CB Closed A
TRRETC
TRRETB
OR
TRRET
200 ms
OR
OR
AND
AND
ANSI13000038-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000038 V1 EN
258
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
1 out of 3
1 of 3
OR
Current
AND
BLOCK
PU_A
AND
Current &
Contact
1 out of 4
AND
OR
PICKUP
1 of 4
OR
BFI_A
OR
AND
52a_A
Contact
Current
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLOCK
PU_B
AND
Current &
Contact
AND
200 ms
AND
OR
PICKUP
OR
BFI_B
TRBU
0-t2
0
OR
AND
AND
52a_B
Contact
AND
AND
Current
AND
BLOCK
AND
PU_C
AND
Current &
Contact
OR
2 of 4
AND
PICKUP
OR
BFI_B
2 out of 4
OR
AND
52a_C
Contact
Current
AND
AND
BLOCK
PU_N
AND
PICKUP
ANSI10000222-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000222 V2 EN
Figure 117:
Internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH.
7.10.8
Technical data
Table 137:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
> 95%
(2-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Section 7
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
> 95%
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
20 ms typically
10 ms maximum
7.11
7.11.1
Identification
Function description
Breaker failure
protection, phase
segregated activation
and output
CSPRBRF
3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN
7.11.2
260
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
user defined settings, the function is activated. These conditions increase the security
of the back-up trip command.
CSPRBRF (50BF) can be programmed to give an one- or three-phase re-trip of the
protected breaker to avoid inadvertent tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.
7.11.3
Function block
CSPRBRF (50BF)
I3P*
BLOCK
BFI_3P
BFI_A
BFI_B
BFI_C
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C
TRBU
TRRET
TRRET_A
TRRET_B
TRRET_C
ANSI10000217-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000217 V1 EN
Figure 118:
7.11.4
Signals
Table 138:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
BFI_A
BOOLEAN
BFI_B
BOOLEAN
BFI_C
BOOLEAN
52a_A
BOOLEAN
52a_B
BOOLEAN
52a_C
BOOLEAN
261
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 139:
Name
7.11.5
Table 140:
Name
Type
Description
TRBU
BOOLEAN
Back-up trip
TRRET
BOOLEAN
Retrip
TRRET_A
BOOLEAN
Retrip of phase A
TRRET_B
BOOLEAN
Retrip of phase B
TRRET_C
BOOLEAN
Retrip of phase C
Settings
CSPRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
FunctionMode
Current
Contact
Current&Contact
Current
BuTripMode
2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
RetripMode
Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check
Retrip Off
Pickup_PH
5 - 200
%IB
10
Pickup_N
2 - 200
%IB
10
t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
t2MPh
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
60.000
Table 141:
Name
Pickup_BlkCont
Table 142:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
%IB
Step
1
Default
20
Description
Current for blocking of 52a operation in % of
Ibase
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
262
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.11.6
Monitored data
Table 143:
Name
7.11.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IA
REAL
IB
REAL
IC
REAL
IN
REAL
Operation principle
The Breaker failure protection, phase segregated activation and output (CSPRBRF
50BF) is initiated from protection trip command, either from protection functions
within the IED or from external protection devices.
The initiate signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective initiate signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time
delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The retrip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection.
The re-trip function can be done with or without current or contact check. With the
current check the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is
larger than the operate current level. With contact check the retrip is only performed if
breaker is indicated as closed.
The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
start the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected
by the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted
algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker
opening that is, fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has
not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is
initiated.
Further, the following possibilities are available:
263
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
Back-up trip is always made with current or contact check. It is possible to have
this option activated for small load currents only.
Current
AND
BLOCK
PU_A
PICKUP
AND
Current &
Contact
AND
OR
0-t1
0
OR
OR
52a
AND
TRRET
AND
Contact
B
C
ANSI11000034-2-en.vsd
ANSI11000034 V2 EN
Figure 119:
Internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH.
Internal logical signal PU_N has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude
larger than setting parameter Pickup_N.
264
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
1 out of 3
1 of 3
OR
Current
AND
BLOCK
PU_A
AND
Current &
Contact
1 out of 4
AND
OR
PICKUP
1 of 4
OR
BFI_A
OR
AND
52a_A
Contact
Current
AND
AND
AND
AND
BLOCK
PU_B
AND
Current &
Contact
AND
200 ms
AND
OR
PICKUP
OR
BFI_B
TRBU
0-t2
0
OR
AND
AND
52a_B
Contact
AND
AND
Current
AND
BLOCK
AND
PU_C
AND
Current &
Contact
OR
2 of 4
AND
PICKUP
OR
BFI_B
2 out of 4
OR
AND
52a_C
Contact
Current
AND
AND
BLOCK
PU_N
AND
PICKUP
ANSI10000222-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000222 V2 EN
Figure 120:
7.11.8
Technical data
Table 144:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
> 95%
(2-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
> 95%
Section 7
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5-200)% of lBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
20 ms typically
10 ms maximum
7.12
7.12.1
Identification
Function description
Stub protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
STBPTOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50STB
3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN
7.12.2
Functionality
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is
opened, line side voltage transformers will be on the disconnected part of the line. The
primary line distance protection will thus not be able to operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) covers the zone between the current
transformers and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent
function is released from a normally open, 89b auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
7.12.3
Function block
STBPTOC (50STB)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
ENABLE
ANSI08000051-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000051 V1 EN
Figure 121:
266
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.12.4
Signals
Table 145:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ENABLE
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 147:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 146:
7.12.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Settings
STBPTOC (50STB) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
IPickup
1 - 2500
%IB
200
Table 148:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.12.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 149:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
I_A
REAL
Current in phase A
I_B
REAL
Current in phase B
I_C
REAL
Current in phase C
267
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.12.7
Operation principle
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a
comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC (50STB). In a comparator the
RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the function IPickup.
If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator
for this phase is activated. If the fault current remains during the timer delay t, the
TRIP output signal is activated. The function can be blocked by activation of the
BLOCK input.
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION
BLOCK
TRIP
AND
PU_A
OR
PU_B
PU_C
ENABLE
en05000731_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000731 V1 EN
Figure 122:
7.12.8
Technical data
Table 150:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operating current
(1-2500)% of IBase
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95%
Operate time
20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Reset time
30 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
15 ms typically
268
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.13
7.13.1
Identification
Function description
Pole discrepancy protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CCRPLD
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
52PD
PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN
7.13.2
Functionality
Circuit breakers and disconnectors can end up with their phases in different positions
(close-open), due to electrical or mechanical failures. An open phase can cause
negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines
and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current
functions.
Normally the affected breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
warrants the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.
The pole discrepancy function operates based on information from the circuit breaker
logic with additional criteria from phase selective current unsymmetry.
7.13.3
Function block
CCRPLD (52PD)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
ANSI08000041-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000041 V1 EN
Figure 123:
269
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.13.4
Signals
Table 151:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
Close command to CB
OPENCMD
BOOLEAN
Open command to CB
EXTPDIND
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 153:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 152:
7.13.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal to CB
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Settings
CCRPLD (52PD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
ContactSel
Disabled
PD signal from CB
Disabled
CurrentSel
Disabled
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor
Disabled
CurrUnsymPU
0 - 100
80
CurrRelPU
0 - 100
%IB
10
Table 154:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
270
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.13.6
Monitored data
Table 155:
Name
7.13.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
IMin
REAL
IMax
REAL
Operation principle
The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 124.
C.B.
52a
52a
52a
52b
52b
52b
ANSI_en05000287.vsd
ANSI05000287 V1 EN
Figure 124:
This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current
measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase
current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest
phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting
CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started.
The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150
ms long. The current based pole discrepancy function can be set to be active either
continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
271
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
BLOCK
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
AND
OR
CLOSECMD
0-Trip
0
150 ms
TRIP
tTrip+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
CB oper monitor
AND
Unsymmetrical
current detection
ANSI08000014-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000014 V2 EN
Figure 125:
The pole discrepancy protection is blocked if the input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions.
Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a
trip signal TRIP:
7.13.7.1
272
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.13.7.2
any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three
phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.
7.13.8
Technical data
Table 156:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0-100) %
1.0% of In
Reset ratio
>95%
Time delay
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
7.14
7.14.1
Identification
Function description
Broken conductor check
IEC 61850
identification
BRCPTOC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46
273
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.14.2
Functionality
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46) function, consisting of continuous phase
selective current unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected will give
alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.
7.14.3
Function block
BRCPTOC (46)
I3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
PICKUP
ANSI09000277-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000277 V1 EN
Figure 126:
7.14.4
Signals
Table 157:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 159:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 158:
7.14.5
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Settings
BRCPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Pickup_ub
50 - 90
%IM
50
Pickup_PH
5 - 100
%IB
20
tOper
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
274
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 160:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.14.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 161:
Name
IUNBAL
7.14.7
Unit
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Measured unbalance of
phase currents
Operation principle
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring
elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.
The current asymmetry signal output PICKUP is set on if:
The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase
with the highest current is greater than set percentage Pickup_ub of the highest
phase current
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value Pickup_PH
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If
a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an
increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions
being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set
time tOper the TRIP output is activated.
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 127
BRCPTOC (46) is disabled (blocked) if:
The IED is in test mode and BRCPTOC (46) has been blocked from the HMI test
menu (Blocked=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.
275
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to
the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
AND
Block BRCPTOC=Yes
PICKUP
OR
BLOCK
Function Enable
AND
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
TRIP
0-t
0
PU_N
IA<50%Pickup_PH
IB<50%Pickup_PH
OR
IC<50%Pickup_PH
ANSI09000158-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000158 V3 EN
Figure 127:
7.14.8
Technical data
Table 162:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(5100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
2.0% of In
Timer
(0.00-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
35 ms typically
30 ms typically
15 ms typically
10 ms typically
276
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.15
7.15.1
Functionality
The directional over-/under-power protection GOPPDOP (32)/GUPPDUP (37) can be
used wherever a high/low active, reactive or apparent power protection or alarming is
required. The functions can alternatively be used to check the direction of active or
reactive power flow in the power system. There are a number of applications where
such functionality is needed. Some of them are:
7.15.2
7.15.2.1
Identification
Function description
Directional overpower protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GOPPDOP
P>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
32
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN
7.15.2.2
Function block
GOPPDOP (32)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
BFI_3P
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI08000506-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000506 V1 EN
Figure 128:
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.15.2.3
Signals
Table 163:
Name
Type
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Name
Table 165:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 164:
7.15.2.4
Default
I3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
REAL
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Settings
GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpMode1
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
OpMode2
Disabled
OverPower
OverPower
Operation mode 2
Section 7
Current protection
Name
Unit
Step
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
Table 166:
Name
k
Table 167:
Name
Values (Range)
Default
Description
Unit
-
Step
Default
0.01
0.00
Step
Default
Description
Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I
Unit
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
7.15.2.5
Monitored data
Table 168:
Name
7.15.3
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of
calculated power base value
REAL
MVAr
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of
calculated power base value
279
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.15.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GUPPDUP
P<
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN
7.15.3.2
Function block
GUPPDUP (37)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
BFI_3P
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI08000507-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000507 V1 EN
Figure 129:
7.15.3.3
Signals
Table 169:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 170:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRIP1
BOOLEAN
TRIP2
BOOLEAN
BFI_3P
BOOLEAN
Section 7
Current protection
Name
7.15.3.4
Table 171:
Name
Type
Description
PICKUP1
BOOLEAN
PICKUP2
BOOLEAN
REAL
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
REAL
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Settings
GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OpMode1
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 1
Power1
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle1
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay1
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
OpMode2
Disabled
UnderPower
UnderPower
Operation mode 2
Power2
0.0 - 500.0
0.1
1.0
Angle2
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
TripDelay2
0.010 - 6000.000
0.001
1.000
Table 172:
Name
TD
Unit
-
Step
Default
0.01
0.00
Description
Low pass filter coefficient for power
measurement, V and I
281
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 173:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
Pos Seq
7.15.3.5
Monitored data
Table 174:
Name
7.15.4
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MW
Active Power
PPERCENT
REAL
Active power in % of
calculated power base value
REAL
MVAr
Reactive power
QPERCENT
REAL
Reactive power in % of
calculated power base value
Operation principle
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 130. The function has two stages with individual settings.
282
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Chosen current
phasors
Chosen voltage
phasors
P
Complex
power
calculation
Derivation of
S( composant)
in Char angle
S( angle)
t
0
S( angle) <
Power1
TRIP1
PICKUP1
S( angle) <
Power2
t
0
TRIP2
PICKUP2
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000438 V2 EN
Figure 130:
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 175.
Table 175:
S = V A I A* + VB I B* + VC I C *
EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN
Arone
S = V AB I A* - VBC IC *
EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN
PosSeq
(Equation 63)
S = VAB ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN
BC
(Equation 62)
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq*
EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN
AB
(Equation 61)
(Equation 64)
S = VBC ( I B* - IC * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 65)
283
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
S = VCA ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN
S = 3 VA I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 67)
S = 3 VB I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 66)
(Equation 68)
S = 3 VC I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN
(Equation 69)
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2).
For directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional
overpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip
TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of
the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two
stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a hysteresis in the power function. The absolute hysteresis
for stage 1(2) is 0.5 p.u. for Power1(2) 1.0 p.u., else the hysteresis is 0.5 Power1(2).
If the measured power drops under the (Power1(2) - hysteresis) value, the over-power
function will reset after 0.06 seconds. If the measured power comes over the
(Power1(2) + hysteresis) value, the under-power function will reset after 0.06 seconds.
The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out and that the timer of the stage will
reset.
7.15.4.1
284
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = TD SOld + (1 TD ) SCalculated
(Equation 70)
EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN
Where
S
Sold
is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
TD=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.
7.15.5
Technical data
Table 176:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
(1.0-2.0)% of SBase
(2.0-10)% of SBase
Characteristic angle
(-180.0180.0) degrees
2 degrees
Timers
(0.010 - 6000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
Power level
285
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.16
7.16.1
Identification
Function description
Negative sequence based overcurrent
function
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
DNSPTOC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46
3I2>
IEC09000132 V2 EN
7.16.2
Functionality
Negative sequence based overcurrent function DNSPTOC (46) may be used in power
line applications where the reverse zero sequence source is weak or open, the forward
source impedance is strong and it is desired to detect forward ground faults.
Additionally, it is applied in applications on cables, where zero sequence impedance
depends on the fault current return paths, but the cable negative sequence impedance is
practically constant.
The directional function is current and voltage polarized. The function can be set to
forward, reverse or non-directional independently for each step. Both steps are
provided with a settable definite time delay.
DNSPTOC (46) protects against all unbalanced faults including phase-to-phase faults.
The minimum pickup current of the function must be set to above the normal system
unbalance level in order to avoid inadvertent tripping.
286
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
7.16.3
Function block
DNSPTOC (46)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TROC1
BLOCK
TROC2
BLKOC1
BFI_3P
ENMLTOC1
PU_OC1
BLKOC2
PU_OC2
ENMLTOC2
DIROC1
DIROC2
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
VIANGLE
ANSI09000125-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000125 V1 EN
Figure 131:
7.16.4
Signals
Table 177:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKOC1
BOOLEAN
ENMLTOC1
BOOLEAN
BLKOC2
BOOLEAN
ENMLTOC2
BOOLEAN
Table 178:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TROC1
BOOLEAN
TROC2
BOOLEAN
START
BOOLEAN
STOC1
BOOLEAN
OC1_PICK UP
STOC2
BOOLEAN
OC2_PICK UP
DIROC1
INTEGER
DIROC2
INTEGER
Section 7
Current protection
Name
7.16.5
Table 179:
Name
Type
Description
CURRENT
REAL
VOLTAGE
REAL
UIANGLE
REAL
Settings
DNSPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
RCADir
-180 - 180
Deg
-75
ROADir
1 - 90
Deg
75
LowVolt_VM
0.0 - 5.0
%VB
0.1
0.5
Operation_OC1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
StartCurr_OC1
2.0 - 200.0
%IB
1.0
10.0
CurrMult_OC1
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
tDef_OC1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
DirMode_OC1
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC1
I&V
IcosPhi&V
I&V
ActLowVolt1_VM
Non-directional
Block
Block
Operation_OC2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
StartCurr_OC2
2.0 - 200.0
%IB
1.0
10.0
CurrMult_OC2
1.0 - 10.0
0.1
2.0
tDef_OC2
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
0.50
DirMode_OC2
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse
Non-directional
DirPrinc_OC2
I&V
IcosPhi&V
I&V
ActLowVolt2_VM
Non-directional
Block
Block
288
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Table 180:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
7.16.6
Unit
Step
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 181:
Name
7.16.7
Default
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CURRENT
REAL
VOLTAGE
REAL
kV
UIANGLE
REAL
deg
Operation principle
Negative sequence based overcurrent function (DNSPTOC, 46) has two settable
current levels, setting parameters PickupCurr_OC1 and PickupCurr_OC2. Both
features have definite time characteristics with settings tDef_OC1 and tDef_OC2
respectively. It is possible to change the direction of these steps to forward, reverse or
non-directional by setting parameters DirMode_OC1 and DirMode_OC2. At too low
polarizing voltage the overcurrent feature can be either blocked or non-directional.
This is controlled by settings ActLowVolt1_VM and ActLowVolt2_VM.
7.16.8
Technical data
Table 182:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
1.0% of Ir at I <In
1.0% of I at I > In
Reset ratio
> 95 %
< 0.5% of Vn
2.0 degrees
(1 - 90) degrees
2.0 degrees
Timers
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
289
Technical Manual
Section 7
Current protection
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
20 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
15 ms typically
Dynamic overreach
290
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1
8.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
UV2PTUV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27
3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN
8.1.2
Functionality
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed backup to primary protection.
UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, where step 1 is settable as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
UV2PTUV (27) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
8.1.3
Function block
UV2PTUV (27)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
ANSI09000285-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000285 V1 EN
Figure 132:
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.4
Signals
Table 183:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Name
Table 185:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 184:
8.1.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Settings
UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup1
1 - 100
%VB
70
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
292
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup2
1 - 100
%VB
50
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Table 186:
Name
Step
Default
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN DFT
8.1.6
Monitored data
Table 187:
Name
8.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_A
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
V_B
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
V_C
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Operation principle
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
PICKUP signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1
out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is
293
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse time delayed. Step 2 is always
definite time delayed.
UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true
RMS value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-tophase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:
Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV )
3
(Equation 71)
EQUATION1606 V1 EN
EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN
8.1.7.1
Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The
parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the
PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to
be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.1.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
undervoltage (TUV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time
delay two different modes are available; inverse curve A and inverse curve B.
The type A curve is described as:
294
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
t=
TD
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
(Equation 73)
ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN
TD 480
Vpickup < -V
- 0.5
32
Vpickup <
2.0
+ 0.055
(Equation 74)
EQUATION1608 V1 EN
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of
the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 21.3 "Inverse time
characteristics".
Figure 133:
Voltage
VL1
VL2
VL3
IDMT Voltage
Time
ANSI12000186-1-en.vsd
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (TUV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, the corresponding pickup output is reset.
295
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) partially or
completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
8.1.7.4
BLOCK:
BLK1:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the
set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to
fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection
UV2PTUV (27) is schematically shown in Figure 134.
296
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
VA or VAB
VB or VBC
VC or VCA
Comparator
V < Pickup1
Comparator
V < Pickup1
Comparator
V < Pickup1
PU_ST1_A
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
Phase A
PU_ST1_B
Phase B
PU_ST1_C
Phase C Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
PU_ST1
OR
Step 1
MinVoltSelector
Comparator
V < Pickup2
Comparator
V < Pickup2
Comparator
V < Pickup2
Time integrator
or Timer t1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
TRST1
OR
TRIP
Phase A
PU_ST2
OR
Phase B
Phase C Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
Step 2
Timer
t2
TRIP
TRST2
OR
OR PICKUP
OR
TRIP
ANSI08000016-3-en.vsd
ANSI08000016 V3 EN
Figure 134:
297
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.1.8
Technical data
Table 188:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<102%
Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 660
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset40 ms
typically at 0.5 to 1.2 xVset
15 ms typically
8.2
8.2.1
Identification
Function description
Two step overvoltage protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
OV2PTOV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59
3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN
8.2.2
Functionality
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
298
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) function can be used to detect open
line ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to
supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch
in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV (59) has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to system service voltage.
8.2.3
Function block
OV2PTOV (59)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
ANSI09000278-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000278 V1 EN
Figure 135:
8.2.4
Signals
Table 189:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 190:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
299
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Name
8.2.5
Table 191:
Name
Type
Description
PU_ST1_A
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_B
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1_C
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
Settings
OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Definite time
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup1
1 - 200
%VB
120
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
1 out of 3
Pickup2
1 - 200
%VB
150
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
300
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Table 192:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
ConnType
PhN DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN DFT
8.2.6
Monitored data
Table 193:
Name
8.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_A
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase A
V_B
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase B
V_C
REAL
kV
Voltage in phase C
Operation principle
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or threephase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of
3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the
set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is settable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value.
The choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phaseto-phase voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set global base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-toground voltage over:
301
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
EQUATION1610 V2 EN
EQUATION1992 V1 EN
8.2.7.1
Measurement principle
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 for Step 1 and Pickup2 for Step 2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2
influence the requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3
or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to
issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis is included.
8.2.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for step 1 can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
overvoltage (TOV). Step 2 is always definite time delay (DT). For the inverse time
delay three different modes are available:
inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
TD
V Vpickup >
Vpickup >
EQUATION1625 V2 EN
(Equation 77)
302
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
t=
TD 480
0.035
V Vpickup >
0.5
32
Vpickup >
(Equation 78)
ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN
TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
(Equation 79)
ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN
The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see Figure 136. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are
shown in section "Inverse time characteristics".
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
VA
VB
VC
Time
ANSI05000016-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000016 V2 EN
Figure 136:
A TRIP requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the user set time
delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time mode (DT) and
by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time mode (TOV). If
the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, the corresponding PICKUP output is reset.
8.2.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV ,59) partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:
303
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.7.4
BLOCK:
BLK1:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The phase voltages are individually compared
to the set value, and the highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic
integration. A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3
criteria to fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection
(OV2PTOV, 59) is schematically described in Figure 137.
304
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Comparator
V > Pickup1
VA or VAB
VB or VBC
Comparator
V > Pickup1
VC or VCA
Comparator
V > Pickup1
PU_ST1_A
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
Phase A
PU_ST1_B
Phase B
PU_ST1_C
Phase C Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
PU_ST1
OR
Step 1
MaxVoltSelector
Comparator
V > Pickup2
Comparator
V > Pickup2
Comparator
V > Pickup2
Time integrator
or Timer t1
Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 outof 3
3 out of 3
TRIP
TRST1
OR
Phase A
Phase B
PU_ST2
OR
Phase C Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
Step 2
Timer
t2
TRIP
TRST2
OR
OR
OR
PICKUP
TRIP
ANSI08000012-3-en.vsd
ANSI08000012 V3 EN
Figure 137:
305
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.8
Technical data
Table 194:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio
>98%
Inverse time
characteristics for steps 1
and 2, see table 659
(0.00 - 6000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
15 ms typically
8.3
8.3.1
Identification
Function description
Two step residual overvoltage
protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ROV2PTOV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N
3U0>
IEC10000168 V1 EN
8.3.2
Functionality
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
306
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.
ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, where step 1 can be set as inverse or definite
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
8.3.3
Function block
ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLK1
BLK2
TRIP
TRST1
TRST2
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
ANSI09000273_1_en.vsd
ANSI09000273 V1 EN
Figure 138:
8.3.4
Signals
Table 195:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK1
BOOLEAN
Block of step 1
BLK2
BOOLEAN
Block of step 2
Table 196:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TRST1
BOOLEAN
TRST2
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
PU_ST1
BOOLEAN
PU_ST2
BOOLEAN
307
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.5
Table 197:
Name
Settings
ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OperationStep1
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Characterist1
Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Definite time
Pickup1
1 - 200
%VB
30
t1
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
t1Min
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
TD1
0.05 - 1.10
0.01
0.05
OperationStep2
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Pickup2
1 - 100
%VB
45
t2
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Table 198:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.3.6
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 199:
Name
VLevel
8.3.7
Unit
Values (Range)
-
Unit
kV
Description
Magnitude of measured
voltage
Operation principle
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect ground
(zero sequence) overvoltages. The ground overvoltage 3V0 is normally computed by
308
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
adding the input phase voltages. 3V0 may also be input single phase by either
measuring directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer, or
from a secondary broken delta connection of a transformer with a wye-grounded
primary. ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps with separate time delays. If the ground
overvoltage remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is setable for step 1 and can be either definite or inverse
time delayed. Step 2 is always definite time delayed.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global phase-to-phase base
voltage divided by 3.
8.3.7.1
Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 and Pickup2.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
8.3.7.2
Time delay
8.3.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N)
partially or completely, by binary input signals where:
8.3.7.4
BLOCK:
BLK1:
BLK2:
Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive
Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to
the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design
of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is schematically
described in Figure 139.
309
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
VN
Comparator
VN > Pickup1
TRST1
PICKUP
Time integrator
or Timer t1
Comparator
VN > Pickup2
TRIP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 1
PU_ST2
Phase 1
TRST2
PICKUP
Timer
t2
PU_ST1
Phase 1
TRIP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
OR
Step 2
OR
PICKUP
TRIP
ANSI08000013-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000013 V2 EN
Figure 139:
310
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.8
Technical data
Table 200:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-200)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Reset ratio
> 98%
Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 661
(0.006000.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
30 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset
40 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset
15 ms typically
8.4
8.4.1
Identification
Function description
Loss of voltage check
8.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
LOVPTUV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27
Functionality
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is suitable for use in networks with an
automatic system restoration function. LOVPTUV (27) issues a three-pole trip
command to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a
time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
311
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.3
Function block
LOVPTUV (27)
V3P*
BLOCK
CBOPEN
BLKV
TRIP
PICKUP
ANSI09000279-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000279 V1 EN
Figure 140:
8.4.4
Signals
Table 201:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
BLKV
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 203:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 202:
8.4.5
Default
V3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
Trip signal
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
Pickup signal
Settings
LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
VPG
1 - 100
%VB
70
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
7.000
312
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
Table 204:
Name
Unit
tPulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
tBlock
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
3.000
Table 205:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
8.4.6
Step
Default
Description
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV (27) is provided with a logic, which automatically
recognizes if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer.
All three phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The
PICKUP output signal indicates pickup.
Additionally, LOVPTUV (27) is automatically blocked if only one or two phase
voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.
LOVPTUV (27) operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set
by setting tPulse.
The operation of LOVPTUV (27) is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKV
input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit
breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. LOVPTUV (27) is also blocked when the IED is in test mode and
LOVPTUV (27) has been blocked from the HMI test menu (Blocked = Yes).
313
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
&
BlockLOV = Yes
BLOCK
START
>1
Function Enable
tTrip
&
STUL1N
tPulse
TRIP
&
STUL2N
Latched
Enable
STUL3N
&
tBlock
>1
CBOPEN
Reset Enable
>1
&
BLKU
>1
tRestore
Set Enable
>1
Figure 141:
314
Technical Manual
Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.7
Technical data
Table 206:
Function
Accuracy
Operate voltage
(0100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<105%
Pulse timer
(0.05060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
Timers
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
315
Technical Manual
316
Section 9
Frequency protection
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.1
9.1.1
Identification
Function description
Underfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPTUF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN
9.1.2
Functionality
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of sufficient generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and
is used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so
on. Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and restore.
SAPTUF (81) is provided with undervoltage blocking.
9.1.3
Function block
SAPTUF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
ANSI09000282-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000282 V1 EN
Figure 142:
317
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.1.4
Signals
Table 207:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 209:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 208:
9.1.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SAPTUF (81) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
PUFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
48.80
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
49.90
9.1.6
Monitored data
Table 210:
Name
FREQ
9.1.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Hz
Description
Measured frequency
Operation principle
The underfrequency protection (SAPTUF, 81) function is used to detect low power
system frequency. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
greater than the set time delay the TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due
318
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.1.7.1
Measurement principle
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI
preprocessing function, which is described in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is
set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and
the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
setting of the global parameter VBase.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
BLOCK
OR
BLKDMAGN
BLOCK
freqNotValid
Frequency
Comparator
f < PUFrequency
DefiniteTimeDelay
PICKUP
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TRIP
100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
TimeDlyRestore
RESTORE
ANSI09000034-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000034 V1 EN
Figure 143:
9.1.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for SAPTUF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the
setting tDelay.
319
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
Trip signal issuing requires that the under frequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. If the PICKUP ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset.
When the measured frequency returns to the level corresponding to the setting
RestoreFreq, a 100ms pulse is given on the output RESTORE after a settable time
delay (tRestore).
9.1.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) completely, by binary
input signal:
BLOCK:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
9.1.7.4
Design
The design of underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is schematically described in
figure 143.
Figure 144:
9.1.8
Technical data
Table 211:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
(45 - 65) Hz
2.0 mHz
Reset ratio
<1.001
(0.000-60.000)s
<250 ms
(0.000-60.000)s
<150 ms
320
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.2
9.2.1
Identification
Function description
Overfrequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPTOF
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN
9.2.2
Functionality
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.
SAPTOF (81) measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used mainly for
generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage
initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
9.2.3
Function block
SAPTOF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
BFI
BLKDMAGN
ANSI09000280-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000280 V1 EN
Figure 145:
321
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.2.4
Signals
Table 212:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 214:
Name
Description
V3P
Table 213:
9.2.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
BFI
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SAPTOF (81) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
PUFrequency
35.00 - 75.00
Hz
0.01
51.20
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
9.2.6
Monitored data
Table 215:
Name
FREQ
9.2.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Hz
Description
Measured frequency
Operation principle
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system
frequency. SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains
above the set value for a time period greater than the set time delay the TRIP signal is
issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement at low
voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the
preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in
322
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is
issued.
9.2.7.1
Measurement principle
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the SMAI
preprocessing function, which is discussed in the Basic IED Functions chapter and is
set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter VBase, SAPTOF (81) is blocked
and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the
global parameter VBase. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a
hysteresis has been included.
BLOCK
BLOCK
Frequency
BLKDMAGN
OR
freqNotValid
Comparator
f > PUFrequency
PICKUP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TRIP
TRIP
ANSI09000033-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000033 V1 EN
Figure 146:
9.2.7.2
Time delay
The time delay for SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time delay, specified by the
setting tDelay.
If the PICKUP condition frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled
again within a defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset.
323
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.2.7.3
Blocking
It is possible to block Over frequency protection (SAPTOF, 81) completely, by binary
input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of MinValFreqMeas in the
preprocessing function both the PICKUP and the TRIP outputs are blocked.
9.2.7.4
Design
The design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in
figure 146.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLOCK
Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel
Voltage
Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
Frequency
Comparator
f > PuFrequency
BLKDMAGN
OR
PICKUP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
en05000735_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000735 V1 EN
Figure 147:
324
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.2.8
Technical data
Table 216:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(35.00-75.00) Hz
2.0 mHz at
symmetrical threephase voltage
Reset ratio
>0.999
Timer
(0.000-60.000)s
<250 ms
9.3
9.3.1
Identification
Function description
Rate-of-change frequency protection
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SAPFRC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81
df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN
9.3.2
Functionality
The rate-of-change frequency protection function SAPFRC (81) gives an early
indication of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) measures frequency with
high accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and remedial
action schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate between a positive or negative change
of frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
325
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.3.3
Function block
SAPFRC (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
TRIP
PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
ANSI09000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000281 V1 EN
Figure 148:
9.3.4
Signals
Table 217:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 219:
Name
Description
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 218:
9.3.5
Default
V3P
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
RESTORE
BOOLEAN
BLKDMAGN
BOOLEAN
Settings
SAPFRC (81) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
PUFreqGrad
-10.00 - 10.00
Hz/s
0.01
0.50
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
RestoreFreq
45.00 - 65.00
Hz
0.01
49.90
tRestore
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
326
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.3.6
Operation principle
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes at an early stage. It (81) has a settable definite time delay.To avoid
an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a
voltage controlled blocking of the function is available from the preprocessing function
that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing
function, the function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued. If the
frequency recovers, after a frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.
9.3.6.1
Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set valuePUFreqGrad. If the voltage magnitude
decreases below the setting MinValFreqMeas in the preprocessing function, which is
set as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter, SAPFRC (81) is blocked and
the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad, controls if
SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If SAPFRC (81)
is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting PUFreqGrad has been given a
negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, a 100 ms pulse is issued on the
RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than the setting
RestoreFreq. A positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to PICKUP and
TRIP for frequency increases.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.
9.3.6.2
Time delay
SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.
Trip signal issuing requires that SAPFRC (81) condition continues for at least the user
set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, ceases during the delay time and is not
fulfilled again within a defined reset time, the PICKUP output is reset after the reset
time has elapsed.
After an issue of the TRIP output signal, the RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set
after a time delay (tRestore), when the measured frequency has returned to the level
corresponding to RestoreFreq. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is
disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality is only active for
lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative
frequency gradient is detected during the restore period.
327
Technical Manual
Section 9
Frequency protection
9.3.6.3
Design
BLOCK
OR
BLOCK
BLKDMAGN
freqNotValid
Rate-of-Change
of Frequency
Comparator
If
[PUFreqGrad<0
AND
df/dt < PUFreqGrad]
OR
[PUFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > PUFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP
Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic
PICKUP
tTrip
TRIP
100 ms
Frequency
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq
RESTORE
tRestore
ANSI08000009_en_1.vsd
ANSI08000009 V1 EN
Figure 149:
9.3.7
Technical data
Table 220:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
(45.00 - 65.00) Hz
2.0 mHz
Timers
(0.000 - 60.000) s
<130 ms
328
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Section 10
10.1
10.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
10.1.2
CCSRDIF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87
Functionality
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negativesequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open
CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will
stress the secondary circuit.
Current circuit supervision (CCSRDIF, 87) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to
block protection functions expected to give inadvertent tripping.
10.1.3
Function block
CCSRDIF (87)
I3P*
BLOCK
IREF
FAIL
ALARM
ANSI08000055-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000055 V1 EN
Figure 150:
329
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.1.4
Signals
Table 221:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
IREF
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Table 223:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 222:
10.1.5
Default
Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
CCSRDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
IMinOp
5 - 200
%IB
20
Table 224:
Name
Pickup_Block
Table 225:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
%IB
Step
1
Default
150
Description
Block of the function at high phase current, in
% of IBase
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
330
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.1.6
Operation principle
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87) compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 151.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Pickup_Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSRDIF (87) is enabled by setting Operation = Enabled.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the ANDgate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.
I>Pickup_Block
BLOCK
IA
IB
IC
I ref
IA
IB
IC
Iref
+
+
+
I>IMinOp
x
0,8
+
-
1,5 x Ir
OR
10 ms
0
OR
AND
FAIL
20-100 ms
0
OPERATION
BLOCK
150 ms-1 s
0
ALARM
ANSI11000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000291 V1 EN
Figure 151:
331
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
| I phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
area
Slope = 0.8
I MinOp
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN
Figure 152:
Operate characteristics
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I
phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
10.1.7
Technical data
Table 226:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Operate current
(5-200)% of In
10.0% of In at I In
10.0% of I at I > In
Block current
(5-500)% of In
5.0% of In at I In
5.0% of I at I > In
10.2
10.2.1
Identification
Function description
Fuse failure supervision
IEC 61850
identification
SDDRFUF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
332
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.2.2
Functionality
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function SDDRFUF is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise might
occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different detection methods,
negative sequence and zero sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage
and delta current detection.
The negative sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in isolated or highimpedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of negative sequence voltage 3V2 without the presence of the
negative-sequence current 3I2.
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used in directly or low
impedance grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring quantities,
a high value of zero sequence voltage 3V0 without the presence of the zero sequence
current 3I0.
For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation modes
makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative
sequence and zero sequence based detection.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in
practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.
10.2.3
Function block
SDDRFUF
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
52A
MCBOP
89B
BLKZ
BLKV
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH
ANSI08000220-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000220 V1 EN
Figure 153:
333
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.2.4
Signals
Table 227:
Name
Type
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
52a
BOOLEAN
MCBOP
BOOLEAN
89b
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 229:
Name
Description
I3P
Table 228:
10.2.5
Default
Type
Description
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
BLKV
BOOLEAN
General pickup
3PH
BOOLEAN
Three-phase pickup
DLD1PH
BOOLEAN
DLD3PH
BOOLEAN
Settings
SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
OpModeSel
Disabled
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs
V0I0
3V0PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
3I0PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
3V2PU
1 - 100
%VB
30
334
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I2PU
1 - 100
%IB
10
OpDVDI
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
DVPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
DIPU
1 - 100
%IB
15
VPPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
50P
1 - 100
%IB
10
SealIn
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
VSealInPU
1 - 100
%VB
70
IDLDPU
1 - 100
%IB
VDLDPU
1 - 100
%VB
60
Table 230:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
10.2.6
Unit
Step
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Monitored data
Table 231:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0
REAL
3I2
REAL
Magnitude of negative
sequence current
3V0
REAL
kV
3V2
REAL
kV
Magnitude of negative
sequence voltage
335
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.2.7
Operation principle
10.2.7.1
The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates: (see figure 154)
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU,
3V2PU and 3I2PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative
sequence current is below the set value 3I2PU.
A drop off delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two
line ends.
336
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Sequence Detection
3I0PU
IA
CurrZeroSeq
Zero
sequence
filter
IB
3I0
a
b
a>b
Negative
sequence
filter
IC
3I2
AND
a
b
3I2PU
CurrNegSeq
100 ms
0
a>b
100 ms
0
AND
3V0PU
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
FuseFailDetNegSeq
VoltZeroSeq
VA
Zero
sequence
filter
VB
Negative
sequence
filter
VC
a
b
3V0
a>b
VoltNegSeq
a
b
3V2
a>b
3V2PU
ANSI10000036-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000036 V2 EN
Figure 154:
The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local
HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.
10.2.7.2
337
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above VPPU for more than
1.5 cycle
The magnitude of DV is higher than the setting DVPU
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DIPU
The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting 50P
The circuit breaker is closed (52a = True)
The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with a current
in the same phase greater than 50P will set the output. The measured phase current is
used to reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected
line is low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not necessarily
followed by current change and a false fuse failure might occur.
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase
while the circuit breaker is closed. A fault occurs with an open circuit breaker at one
end and closed at the other end, could lead to wrong start of the fuse failure function at
the end with the open breaker. If this is considered to be a disadvantage, connect the
52a input to FALSE. In this way only the first criterion can activate the delta function.
338
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
DVDI Detection
DVDI detection Phase 1
IA
One cycle
delay
|DI|
a
b
DIPU
VA
a>b
One cycle
delay
|DV|
a
b
DVPU
a
b
VPPU
IB
a>b
20 ms
0
a>b
AND
1.5 cycle
0
VB
IC
VC
VA
a
b
IA
50P
a
b
a<b
a>b
AND
52A
VB
a
b
IB
AND
a
b
a
b
IC
a
b
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
VC
OR
OR
OR
AND
a<b
a>b
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
FuseFailDetDVDI
ANSI10000034-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000034 V2 EN
Figure 155:
339
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.2.7.3
a
b
IB
a
b
IC
a
b
a<b
AllCurrLow
AND
a<b
a<b
IDLDPU
VA
DeadLineDet1Ph
a
b
VB
a
b
VC
a
b
a<b
a<b
AND
OR
AND
AND
a<b
DLD1PH
AND
DLD3PH
AND
AND
VDLDPU
intBlock
ANSI0000035-1-en.vsd
ANSI0000035 V1 EN
Figure 156:
10.2.7.4
Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 157. The fuse failure
supervision function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to Enabled or Disabled.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode
selector, OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different
operation modes are:
340
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
V0I0 OR V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in
parallel in an OR-condition.
V0I0 AND V2I2. Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in
series (AND-condition for operation).
OptimZsNs. Optimum of negative and zero sequence current (the function that has
the highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be
activated).
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled.
When selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,
FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released,
the function will activate the output signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be
activated as well if not the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not
activated at the same time. The output BLKV can be used for blocking voltage related
measuring functions (under voltage protection, energizing check, and so on). For
blocking of impedance protection functions, output BLKZ shall be used.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is
below the set value VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated
as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase
voltages drop below the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to
Enabled the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKV and
BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value
VSealInPU.
If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non-volatile
memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or restart due to configuration change) it uses the stored value in its non-volatile memory
and re-establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase
voltages must be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de-activated and resets
the signals BLKU, BLKZ and 3PH.
The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase
currents are below the setting IDLDPU (operate level for dead line detection) and the
circuit breaker is closed (input 52a is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a terminal binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of
341
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
342
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
intBlock
OR
AND
AND
AND
SealIn = Enabled
3PH
AND
Any VP < VsealInPU
FuseFailDetDVDI
AND
OpDVDI = Enabled
OR
FuseFailDetZeroSeq
5 sec
0
AND
AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
OpModeSel
CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq
OR
AND
a>b
AND
DeadLineDet1Ph
MCBOP
AND
0
200 ms
OR
AND
BLKZ
0
150 ms
60 sec
0
OR
OR
AND
BLKV
AND
VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq
OR
5 sec
0
AllCurrLow
52a
89b
ANSI10000041-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000041 V2 EN
343
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
Figure 157:
10.2.8
Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic
Technical data
Table 232:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1-100)% of VBase
1.0% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(1100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(1100)% of VBase
5.0% of Vn
(1100)% of IBase
5.0% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(1-100)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
(1-100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
10.3
10.3.1
Identification
Function description
Breaker close/trip circuit monitoring
10.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
TCSSCBR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control
circuit of the circuit breaker. The trip circuit supervision generates a current of
approximately 1 mA through the supervised control circuit. The validity supervision of
a control circuit is provided for power output contacts T1, T2 and T3.
The function picks up and trips when TCSSCBR detects a trip circuit failure. The trip
time characteristic for the function is of definite time (DT) type. The function trips
after a predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears.
344
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
10.3.3
Function block
GUID-6F85BD70-4D18-4A00-A410-313233025F3A V2 EN
Figure 158:
10.3.4
Function block
Signals
Table 233:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
Name
Type
ALARM
Table 235:
Name
Description
TCS_STATE
Table 234:
10.3.5
Default
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
TCSSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
tDelay
0.020 - 300.000
0.001
3.000
10.3.6
Operation principle
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable.
The operation of trip circuit supervision can be described by using a module diagram.
All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
345
Technical Manual
Section 10
Secondary system supervision
TCS_STATE
TCS
status
Timer
0-t
BLOCK
ALARM
0
ANSI11000289 V1 EN
Figure 159:
To protect the trip circuit supervision circuits in the IED, the output
contacts are provided with parallel transient voltage suppressors. The
breakdown voltage of these suppressors is 400 +/ 20 V DC.
Timer
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output and resets the internal timer.
10.3.7
Technical data
Table 236:
Function
Operate time delay
Range or value
(0.020 - 300.000) s
Accuracy
0,5% 110 ms
346
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Section 11
Control
11.1
11.1.1
Identification
Function description
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SESRSYN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
25
sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN
11.1.2
Functionality
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN (25) function checks
that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least
one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus
and breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.
For systems, which are running asynchronous, a synchronizing function is provided.
The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. The
synchronizing function evaluates voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip
frequency and frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing of the
circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a parameter setting.
347
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.3
Function block
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1*
SYNOK
V3PB2*
AUTOSYOK
V3PL1*
AUTOENOK
V3PL2*
MANSYOK
BLOCK
MANENOK
BLKSYNCH
TSTSYNOK
BLKSC
TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG
TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP
TSTENOK
BUS1_CL
VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP
B1SEL
BUS2_CL
B2SEL
LINE1_OP
L1SEL
LINE1_CL
L2SEL
LINE2_OP
SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL
SYNFAIL
VB1OK
FRDIFSYN
VB1FF
FRDERIVA
VB2OK
VOKSC
VB2FF
VDIFFSC
VL1OK
FRDIFFA
VL1FF
PHDIFFA
VL2OK
FRDIFFM
VL2FF
PHDIFFM
STARTSYN
INADVCLS
TSTSYNCH
VDIFFME
TSTSC
FRDIFFME
TSTENERG
PHDIFFME
AENMODE
Vbus
MENMODE
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI08000219_2_en.vsd
ANSI08000219 V2 EN
Figure 160:
11.1.4
Signals
Table 237:
Name
Default
Description
V3PB1
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3PB2
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3PL1
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3PL2
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
General block
BLKSYNCH
BOOLEAN
Block synchronizing
BLKSC
BOOLEAN
BLKENERG
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
BUS1_OP
BOOLEAN
BUS1_CL
BOOLEAN
BUS2_OP
BOOLEAN
BUS2_CL
BOOLEAN
LINE1_OP
BOOLEAN
LINE1_CL
BOOLEAN
LINE2_OP
BOOLEAN
LINE2_CL
BOOLEAN
VB1OK
BOOLEAN
VB1FF
BOOLEAN
VB2OK
BOOLEAN
VB2FF
BOOLEAN
VL1OK
BOOLEAN
VL1FF
BOOLEAN
VL2OK
BOOLEAN
VL2FF
BOOLEAN
STARTSYN
BOOLEAN
Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH
BOOLEAN
TSTSC
BOOLEAN
TSTENERG
BOOLEAN
AENMODE
INTEGER
MENMODE
INTEGER
Table 238:
Name
Description
SYNOK
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK
BOOLEAN
Auto synchronism-check OK
AUTOENOK
BOOLEAN
MANSYOK
BOOLEAN
Manual synchronism-check OK
MANENOK
BOOLEAN
TSTSYNOK
BOOLEAN
TSTAUTSY
BOOLEAN
TSTMANSY
BOOLEAN
TSTENOK
BOOLEAN
VSELFAIL
BOOLEAN
B1SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus1 selected
Section 11
Control
Name
11.1.5
Table 239:
Name
Type
Description
B2SEL
BOOLEAN
Bus2 selected
L1SEL
BOOLEAN
Line1 selected
L2SEL
BOOLEAN
Line2 selected
SYNPROGR
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL
BOOLEAN
Synchronizing failed
FRDIFSYN
BOOLEAN
FRDERIVA
BOOLEAN
VOKSC
BOOLEAN
VDIFFSC
BOOLEAN
FRDIFFA
BOOLEAN
PHDIFFA
BOOLEAN
FRDIFFM
BOOLEAN
PHDIFFM
BOOLEAN
INADVCLS
BOOLEAN
VDIFFME
REAL
FRDIFFME
REAL
PHDIFFME
REAL
Vbus
REAL
Bus voltage
VLine
REAL
Line voltage
MODEAEN
INTEGER
MODEMEN
INTEGER
Settings
SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
CBConfig
No voltage sel.
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB
No voltage sel.
Select CB configuration
VRatio
0.500 - 2.000
0.001
1.000
PhaseShift
-180 - 180
Deg
350
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OperationSynch
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
FreqDiffMin
0.003 - 0.250
Hz
0.001
0.010
FreqDiffMax
0.050 - 0.500
Hz
0.001
0.200
FreqRateChange
0.000 - 0.500
Hz/s
0.001
0.300
tBreaker
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.080
tClosePulse
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tMaxSynch
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
600.00
tMinSynch
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
OperationSC
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
VDiffSC
0.02 - 0.50
pu
0.01
0.15
FreqDiffA
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
FreqDiffM
0.003 - 1.000
Hz
0.001
0.010
PhaseDiffA
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
PhaseDiffM
5.0 - 90.0
Deg
1.0
25.0
tSCA
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tSCM
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
AutoEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
DLLB
ManEnerg
Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both
Both
ManEnergDBDL
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tAutoEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
tManEnerg
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
351
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 240:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GblBaseSelBus
1-6
GblBaseSelLine
1-6
SelPhaseBus1
Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
Phase L1
SelPhaseBus2
Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
Phase L1
SelPhaseLine1
Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
Phase L1
SelPhaseLine2
Phase L1
Phase L2
Phase L3
Phase L1L2
Phase L2L3
Phase L3L1
Positive sequence
Phase L1
11.1.6
Monitored data
Table 241:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VDIFFME
REAL
Calculated difference of
voltage in p.u of set voltage
base value
FRDIFFME
REAL
Hz
Calculated difference of
frequency
PHDIFFME
REAL
deg
Calculated difference of
phase angle
Vbus
REAL
kV
Bus voltage
VLine
REAL
kV
Line voltage
352
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.7
Operation principle
11.1.7.1
Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured
conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to
give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the
closing circuit.
For single circuit breaker double bus and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker
arrangements, the SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the capability to make the
necessary voltage selection. For single circuit breaker double bus arrangements,
selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus
disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage
selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus/line disconnectors as well as the
circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
settings with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document. For
application related information, please refer to the application manual.
11.1.7.2
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
calculated by the SESRSYN function and are available for the synchronism check
function for evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line
voltage as phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done by
selecting the corresponding phases for the measurement in the settings for the
SESRSYN function. In addition the phase angle difference has to be compensated for
by the setting PhaseShift. The setting scales the line voltage and adjust the phase angle
equal to the bus voltage.
When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.
353
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with internally preset values
that are set to be 80% of the UBase selected for GlbBaseSelBus and GlbBaseSelLine.
If both sides are higher than 80% of the Ubase values, the measured values are
compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage
difference: FreqDiff, PhaseDiffand VDiffSC. If a compensation factor is set due to the
use of different voltages on the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line
voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The function is
only released if the frequency difference is less than the fixed set value of +/-5 Hz.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN (25) function and selective block of the Synchronism check function
respectively. Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled
conditions are connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.
VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM,
PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and
phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicate that the circuit
breaker has been closed at wrong phase angle by mistake. The output is activated, if
the voltage conditions are fulfilled at the same time the phase angle difference between
bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees to smaller than 5
degrees.
354
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
AND
TSTAUTSY
TSTSC
BLKSC
BLOCK
AND
OR
AND
0-tSCA
0
AND
VDiffSC
AND
AUTOSYOK
50 ms
0
VOKSC
AND
VDIFFSC
FreqDiffA
PhaseDiffA
FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
VDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
100 ms
AND
PhaseDiff > 60
0
80 ms
AND
INADVCLS
PhaseDiff < 5
ANSI08000018-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000018 V2 EN
Figure 161:
11.1.7.3
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with internally preset
values that are set to be 80% of the set UBase selected for GlbBaseSelBus and
GlbBaseSelLine, which is a supervision that the voltages are both live. Also the voltage
difference is checked to be smaller than the internally preset value 0.10, which is a p.u
value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher than the preset values and the
355
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the measured values are also
compared with the set values for acceptable frequency FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin,
rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange and phase angle, which has to be smaller
than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to
be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function
will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch
time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long
time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.
SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH=ON
TEST MODE=ON
STARTSYN
AND
BLKSYNCH
OR
AND
S
R
SYNPROGR
AND
SYNOK
AND
50 ms
0
OR
FreqDiffMax
AND
FreqDiffMin
OR
FreqRateChange
AND
fBus&fLine 5 Hz
TSTSYNOK
0.05-tClosePulse
0
AND
0-tMaxSynch
0
SYNFAIL
FreqDiff
tBreaker
Close pulse
in advace
ANSI08000020-3-en.vsd
ANSI08000020 V3 EN
Figure 162:
356
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.7.4
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED and are available for evaluation by the
Synchronism check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. To be considered live, the value must be above 80% of set UBase selected
for GblBaseSelBus or GblBaseSelLine and to be considered dead it must be below 40%
of set UBase selected forGblBaseSelBus or GblBaseSelLine.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be
selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example,
can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall
be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of
INTZERO output from Fixed Signals (FIXDSIGN) function block will mean that the
setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs
MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN (25) function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
11.1.7.5
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.7.6
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformers
for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and
determines the voltages fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing check
functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and
MCB supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the voltages used will be V-Line1 and V-Bus1. This setting is
also used in the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure
supervision for the used inputs must also be connected.
From the voltage selection part, selected voltages, and functions conditions are
connected to the Synchronizing, Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to
supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an
inverter for one of the positions.
11.1.7.7
358
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
B1SEL
AND
AND
B2SEL
NOT
AND
invalidSelection
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
OR
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
BLOCK
en05000779_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000779 V2 EN
Figure 163:
11.1.7.8
Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars
359
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage,
which indicates B1SEL.
The fuse supervision is connected to VL1OK-VL1FF, VL2OK-VL2FF and with
alternative Healthy or Failing MCB signals depending on what is available from each
MCB.
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 voltage on one side and the
other side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2 voltage. Four different output
combinations are possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a
VT failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This
output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a MCB trip. This output as
well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function block
diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 164 and for
the tie circuit breaker in figure 165.
360
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL
L1SEL
AND
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
L2SEL
AND
AND
LINE2_CL
AND
invalidSelection
AND
AND
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
B2SEL
OR
LINE2_OP
AND
lineVoltage
line1Voltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
OR
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
VL2OK
VL2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000780_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000780 V2 EN
Figure 164:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-anda-half arrangement
361
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL
L1SEL
AND
B1SEL
NOT
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
AND
AND
AND
line1Voltage
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LINE2_OP
LINE2_CL
L2SEL
AND
B2SEL
NOT
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL
AND
AND
AND
OR
invalidSelection
lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF
OR
VB2OK
VB2FF
OR
AND
OR
VL1OK
VL1FF
OR
VL2OK
VL2FF
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL
AND
BLOCK
en05000781_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000781 V2 EN
Figure 165:
Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-and-ahalf arrangement.
362
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.1.8
Technical data
Table 242:
Function
11.2
Range or value
Accuracy
0.500 - 2.000
> 95%
(0.003-1.000) Hz
2.0 mHz
(5.0-90.0) degrees
2.0 degrees
0.03-0.50 p.u
0.5% of Vn
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.003-0.250) Hz
2.0 mHz
(0.050-0.500) Hz
2.0 mHz
(0.000-0.500) Hz/s
10.0 mHz/s
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.050-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
40 ms typically
100 ms typically
363
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.2.1
Identification
Function Description
Autorecloser for 3-phase operation
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SMBRREC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
79
O->I
SYMBOL-L V1 EN
11.2.2
Functionality
The autorecloser for 3-phase operation SMBRREC (79) function provides high-speed
and/or delayed auto-reclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A
priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if
the fault proved to be transient.
The autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchronism check
function.
11.2.3
Function block
SMBRREC (79)
ON
BLOCKED
OFF
SETON
BLKON
READY
BLKOFF
ACTIVE
RESET
SUCCL
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
RI
INPROGR
TRSOTF
3PT1
ZONESTEP
3PT2
THOLHOLD
3PT3
CBREADY
3PT4
52A
3PT5
SYNC
CLOSECMD
WAIT
WFMASTER
RSTCOUNT
COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
ANSI08000086-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000086 V1 EN
Figure 166:
364
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.2.4
Signals
Table 243:
Name
Default
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
OFF
BOOLEAN
BLKON
BOOLEAN
BLKOFF
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
INHIBIT
BOOLEAN
RI
BOOLEAN
TRSOTF
BOOLEAN
ZONESTEP
BOOLEAN
THOLHOLD
BOOLEAN
CBREADY
BOOLEAN
52a
BOOLEAN
SYNC
BOOLEAN
WAIT
BOOLEAN
RSTCOUNT
BOOLEAN
Table 244:
Name
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
SETON
BOOLEAN
AR operation is switched on
READY
BOOLEAN
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
SUCCL
BOOLEAN
UNSUCCL
BOOLEAN
INPROGR
BOOLEAN
3PT1
BOOLEAN
3PT2
BOOLEAN
3PT3
BOOLEAN
3PT4
BOOLEAN
3PT5
BOOLEAN
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
11.2.5
Table 245:
Name
Type
Description
WFMASTER
BOOLEAN
COUNT3P1
INTEGER
COUNT3P2
INTEGER
COUNT3P3
INTEGER
COUNT3P4
INTEGER
COUNT3P5
INTEGER
COUNTAR
INTEGER
Settings
SMBRREC (79) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
External ctrl
Enabled
External ctrl
Disable/ExternalCtrl/Enable
t1 3Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000
tReset
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
tSync
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tCBClosedMin
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
tUnsucCl
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Priority
None
Low
High
None
tWaitForMaster
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Step
Default
Table 246:
Name
Unit
Description
NoOfShots
1
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB
open position
CBAuxContType
NormClosed
NormOpen
NormOpen
366
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CBReadyType
CO
OCO
CO
t2 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t3 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t4 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t5 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
tInhibit
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Follow CB
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AutoCont
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tAutoContWait
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
UnsucClByCBChk
NoCBCheck
CB check
NoCBCheck
BlockByUnsucCl
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ZoneSeqCoord
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
11.2.6
Operation principle
11.2.6.1
11.2.6.2
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
52a: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and initiation
was applied
No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.
After the initiate has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is
set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.
To initiate auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,
one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs 52a and RI and set a
parameter StartByCBOpen = Enabled and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally
closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip
commands to input INHIBIT.
The logic for switching the auto-recloser Enabled/Disabled and the starting of the
reclosing is shown in figure 167. The following should be considered:
Setting Operation can be set to Disabled, External ctrl or Enabled. External ctrl
offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,
communication commands to the same inputs, and so on.
SMBRREC (79) is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both
alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.
RI makes a first attempt with synchronism-check. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs 52a and CBREADY.
368
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Operation:Enabled
Operation:Disabled
Operation:External Ctrl
ON
AND
OFF
AND
OR
SETON
AND S
OR
RI
initiate
OR
autoInitiate
Additional conditions
TRSOTF
AND
pickup
CBREADY
52a
0
120 ms
CB Closed
AND
AND S
0-tCBClosedMin
0
AND
R
AND
Blocking conditions
OR
AND
READY
Inhibit condistions
count 0
ANSI08000017-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000017 V2 EN
Figure 167:
11.2.6.3
11.2.6.4
When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are
exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In threephase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to
use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The
release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC.
If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set
high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchronism check function to a
369
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchronism check, the signal
passes on.
By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness
of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the
CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-CloseOpen sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the
moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the
start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a CloseOpen sequence.
The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.
The reset timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the
reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a
continuation of the first fault. The reset timer is started when the CB closing command
is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in
the reclosing sequence.
370
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
3PT1TO
3PT2TO
3PT3TO
3PT4TO
3PT5TO
SYNC
initiate
CBREADY
OR
"SMBRREC Open
time" timer
3PT1TO
0-t1 3Ph
0
AND
Pulse
AND
AND
AND
0-tSync
0
AND
Pulse (above)
OR
AND
LOGIC
reclosing
programs
0-tReset
0
Reclaim Timer On
pickup
initiate
3PT1
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
OR
Blocking out
SMBRREC
State Control
COUNTER
0
CL
1
2
3
4
R
5
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
INPROGR
OR
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
Blocking out
INHIBIT
OR
0
0-tInhibit
Inhibit (internal)
ANSI08000244-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000244 V2 EN
Figure 168:
The duration of the pulse is fixed 200 ms. See figure 169
When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is
incremented. There is a counter for each reclosing shot and one for the total number of
reclosing commands issued.
371
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
pulse
initiate
CLOSECMD
AND
3PT1
AND
3PT2
AND
3PT3
AND
3PT4
AND
3PT5
AND
RSTCOUNT
counter
COUNT3P1
counter
COUNT3P2
counter
COUNT3P3
counter
COUNT3P4
counter
COUNT3P5
counter
COUNTAR
ANSI08000245-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000245 V1 EN
Figure 169:
Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reset timer tReset starts running for the set time. If no
tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal RI or
TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers
for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of
reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended.
After the reset time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains
open. The CB closed data at the 52a input will be missing. Because of this, the
reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and initiate is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The
signal resets once the reset time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be
made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be
set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to
the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is
set high after time tUnsucCl.
372
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
initiate
block start
AND
OR
AND
shot 0
UNSUCCL
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
Pulse SMBRREC
(Closing)
52a
OR
CBclosed
AND
0-tUnsucCl
0
AND
ANSI09000203-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000203 V2 EN
Figure 170:
373
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
0-tAutoContWait
0
AND
CLOSECMD
AND
S Q
R
AND
52a
CBClosed
OR
RI
OR
initiate
en05000787_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000787 V1 EN
Figure 171:
374
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
StartByCBOpen = Enabled
1
RI
AND
100 ms
pickup
AND
100 ms
ANSI08000078-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000078 V1 EN
Figure 172:
11.2.7
Technical data
Table 247:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
1-5
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
shot 2 - t2 3Ph
shot 3 - t3 3Ph
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
Reset time
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.000-60.000) s
375
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3
11.3.1
Identification
Function Description
Autorecloser for 1/3-phase operation
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
STBRREC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
79
O->I
SYMBOL-L V1 EN
11.3.2
Functionality
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for
single breaker applications.
Up to five reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The first attempt
can be single- and/or three phase for single-phase or multi-phase faults respectively.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A
priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if
the fault proved to be transient.
The autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchrocheck function.
376
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3.3
Function block
STBRREC (79)
ON
BLOCKED
OFF
SETON
BLKON
READY
BLKOFF
ACTIVE
RESET
SUCCL
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
PICKUP
INPROGR
TRSOTF
1PT1
ZONESTEP
3PT1
TR3P
3PT2
THOLHOLD
3PT3
CBREADY
3PT4
52A
3PT5
PLCLOST
PREP3P
SYNC
CLOSECMD
WAIT
WFMASTER
RSTCOUNT
COUNT1P
COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
ANSI10000218-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000218 V1 EN
Figure 173:
11.3.4
Signals
Table 248:
Name
Default
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
OFF
BOOLEAN
BLKON
BOOLEAN
BLKOFF
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
INHIBIT
BOOLEAN
PICKUP
BOOLEAN
TRSOTF
BOOLEAN
ZONESTEP
BOOLEAN
TR3P
BOOLEAN
THOLHOLD
BOOLEAN
CBREADY
BOOLEAN
52a
BOOLEAN
377
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
PLCLOST
BOOLEAN
SYNC
BOOLEAN
WAIT
BOOLEAN
RSTCOUNT
BOOLEAN
Table 249:
Name
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
SETON
BOOLEAN
AR operation is switched on
READY
BOOLEAN
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
SUCCL
BOOLEAN
UNSUCCL
BOOLEAN
INPROGR
BOOLEAN
1PT1
BOOLEAN
3PT1
BOOLEAN
3PT2
BOOLEAN
3PT3
BOOLEAN
3PT4
BOOLEAN
3PT5
BOOLEAN
PREP3P
BOOLEAN
CLOSECMD
BOOLEAN
WFMASTER
BOOLEAN
COUNT1P
INTEGER
COUNT3P1
INTEGER
COUNT3P2
INTEGER
COUNT3P3
INTEGER
COUNT3P4
INTEGER
COUNT3P5
INTEGER
COUNTAR
INTEGER
378
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3.5
Table 250:
Name
Settings
STBRREC (79) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
External ctrl
Enabled
External ctrl
Disable/ExternalCtrl/Enable
ARMode
3 phase
1/3ph
1 phase
1ph+1*3ph
3 phase
t1 1Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
t1 3Ph
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
6.000
tReset
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
tSync
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
tTrip
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tCBClosedMin
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
5.00
tUnsucCl
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
Priority
None
Low
High
None
tWaitForMaster
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
60.00
Step
Default
Table 251:
Name
Unit
Description
NoOfShots
1
2
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB
open position
CBAuxContType
NormClosed
NormOpen
NormOpen
CBReadyType
CO
OCO
CO
t2 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t3 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t4 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
t5 3Ph
0.00 - 6000.00
0.01
30.00
379
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Extended t1
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tExtended t1
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
tInhibit
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
5.000
Follow CB
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AutoCont
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tAutoContWait
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
2.000
UnsucClByCBChk
NoCBCheck
CB check
NoCBCheck
BlockByUnsucCl
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ZoneSeqCoord
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
11.3.6
Operation principle
11.3.6.1
11.3.6.2
380
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
52a: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and initiation
was applied.
No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.
After the initiate has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal pickup is
set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.
To initiate auto-reclosing by CB open position instead of from protection trip signals,
one has to configure the CB open position signal to inputs 52a and PICKUP and set a
parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally
closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip
commands and back-up protection fuctions that should not start autoreclosing to input
INHIBIT.
The logic to enable or disable STBRREC (79) and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 174. The following should be considered:
Setting Operation can be set to Disabled, External ctrl or Enabled. External ctrl
offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF.
STBRREC (79) is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and carrier
aided trip, or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function must be blocked
from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both alternatives the breaker
failure function must be connected to inhibit the function. PICKUP makes a first
attempt with synchronism-check. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs 52a and CBREADY.
381
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
0-t1 3Ph
0
OR
AND
PULSE
AND
AND
AND
STBRREC (79)
State Control
COUNTER
0-tSync
0
AND
Blocking out
OR
0
1
2
3
4
5
CL
LOGIC
reclosing
programs
TR3P
0-tReset
0
Reset Timer On
pickup
initiate
1PT1
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
3PT1
INPROGR
OR
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
Blocking out
INHIBIT
AND
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
OR
0
0-tInhibit
PREP3P
Inhibit (internal)
ANSI10000256-2-en=.vsd
ANSI10000256 V3 EN
Figure 174:
11.3.6.3
382
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3.6.4
11.3.6.5
PLCLOST
initiate
AND
pickup
0-tTrip
0
OR
AND
AND
Extend t1
AND
AND
long duration
(block STBRREC)
ANSI10000255-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000255 V1 EN
Figure 175:
383
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3.6.6
384
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
0-t1 3Ph
0
OR
AND
PULSE
AND
AND
AND
STBRREC (79)
State Control
COUNTER
0-tSync
0
AND
Blocking out
OR
0
1
2
3
4
5
CL
LOGIC
reclosing
programs
TR3P
0-tReset
0
Reset Timer On
pickup
initiate
1PT1
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
3PT1
INPROGR
OR
3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
3PT5
Blocking out
INHIBIT
AND
Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5
OR
0
0-tInhibit
PREP3P
Inhibit (internal)
ANSI17000257-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000257 V2 EN
Figure 176:
11.3.6.7
385
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
pulse
initiate
CLOSECMD
AND
1PT1
AND
3PT1
AND
3PT2
AND
3PT3
AND
3PT4
AND
3PT5
AND
RSTCOUNT
counter
COUNT1P
counter
COUNT3P1
counter
COUNT3P2
counter
COUNT3P3
counter
COUNT3P4
counter
COUNT3P5
counter
COUNTAR
ANSI10000258-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000258 V1 EN
Figure 177:
11.3.6.8
Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reset timer tReset starts running for the set time. If no
tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
11.3.6.9
386
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
initiate
block start
AND
OR
AND
shot 0
UNSUCCL
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
Pulse STBRREC
(Closing)
52a
OR
CBclosed
AND
0-tUnsucCl
0
AND
ANSI10000263-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000263 V1 EN
Figure 178:
11.3.6.10
387
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
0-tAutoContWait
0
AND
CLOSECB
AND
S Q
R
AND
52a
CBClosed
OR
PICKUP
OR
initiate
ANSI10000254-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000254 V1 EN
Figure 179:
11.3.6.11
388
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
StartByCBOpen= Enabled
NOT
RI
AND
RI_HS
AND
100 ms
PICKUP
AND
100 ms
AND
ANSI10000262-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000262 V1 EN
Figure 180:
389
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.3.7
Technical data
Table 252:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
1-5
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
shot 2 - t2 3Ph
shot 3 - t3 3Ph
shot 4 - t4 3Ph
shot 5 - t5 3Ph
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
(0.000-60.000) s
Reset time
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.00-6000.00) s
(0.000-60.000) s
11.4
Apparatus control
11.4.1
Functionality
The apparatus control function APC8 for up to 8 apparatuses is used for control and
supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay.
Permission to operate is given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such
as interlocking, synchronism check, operator place selection and external or internal
blockings.
In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not
supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the
resulting position is supervised.
390
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
The switch controller SCSWI initializes and supervises all functions to properly select
and operate switching primary apparatuses. Each of the 8 switch controllers SCSWI
may handle and operate on one three-phase apparatus.
Each of the 3 circuit breaker controllers SXCBR provides the actual position status and
pass the commands to the primary circuit breaker and supervises the switching
operation and positions.
Each of the 7 circuit switch controllers SXSWI provides the actual position status and
pass the commands to the primary disconnectors and earthing switches and supervises
the switching operation and positions.
11.4.2
11.4.2.1
Identification
Function description
Switch controller
11.4.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
SCSWI
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device.
11.4.2.3
Function block
SCSWI
BLOCK
PSTO
L_SEL
L_OPEN
L_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
BL_CMD
RES_EXT
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS*
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SELECTED
START_SY
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
CMD_BLK
L_CAUSE
POS_INTR
XOUT
IEC09000087_1_en.vsd
IEC09000087 V1 EN
Figure 181:
391
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.2.4
Signals
Table 253:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
L_SEL
BOOLEAN
L_OPEN
BOOLEAN
L_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
AU_OPEN
BOOLEAN
AU_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
RES_EXT
BOOLEAN
SY_INPRO
BOOLEAN
SYNC_OK
BOOLEAN
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
XPOS
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 254:
Name
Description
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
SELECTED
BOOLEAN
START_SY
BOOLEAN
POSITION
INTEGER
Position indication
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
CMD_BLK
BOOLEAN
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
POS_INTR
BOOLEAN
XOUT
BOOLEAN
392
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.2.5
Table 255:
Name
Settings
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
SBO Enh
PosDependent
Always permitted
Not perm at 00/11
Always permitted
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tSynchrocheck
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
10.00
tSynchronizing
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
0.00
tExecutionFB
0.00 - 600.00
0.01
30.00
11.4.3
11.4.3.1
Signals
Table 256:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
OPEN
BOOLEAN
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
TR_OPEN
BOOLEAN
TR_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
XIN
BOOLEAN
393
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 257:
Name
11.4.3.2
Table 258:
Name
Type
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
POSITION
INTEGER
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
TR_POS
INTEGER
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
Settings
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
Default
0.100
Description
Supervision time for the apparatus to move
after a command
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
SuppressMidPos
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
394
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.4
11.4.4.1
Signals
Table 259:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
LR_SWI
BOOLEAN
OPEN
BOOLEAN
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_OPEN
BOOLEAN
BL_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
TR_OPEN
BOOLEAN
TR_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
XIN
BOOLEAN
Table 260:
Name
Description
XPOS
GROUP SIGNAL
EXE_OP
BOOLEAN
EXE_CL
BOOLEAN
OP_BLKD
BOOLEAN
CL_BLKD
BOOLEAN
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
POSITION
INTEGER
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
TR_POS
INTEGER
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
L_CAUSE
INTEGER
395
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.4.2
Table 261:
Name
Settings
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
tStartMove
0.000 - 60.000
Step
0.001
3.000
tIntermediate
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
15.000
AdaptivePulse
Not adaptive
Adaptive
Not adaptive
tOpenPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tClosePulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
SwitchType
Load Break
Disconnector
Grounding Switch
HS Groundg.
Switch
Disconnector
1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,3=GroundSw,
4=HighSpeedGroundSw
SuppressMidPos
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
11.4.5
11.4.5.1
Identification
Function description
Bay control
11.4.5.2
Default
IEC 61850
identification
QCBAY
Description
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote
control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also
provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the
bay.
11.4.5.3
Function block
QCBAY
LR_OFF
LR_LOC
LR_REM
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
PSTO
UPD_BLKD
CMD_BLKD
LOC
REM
IEC09000080_1_en.vsd
IEC09000080 V1 EN
Figure 182:
396
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.5.4
Signals
Table 262:
Name
Type
LR_LOC
BOOLEAN
LR_REM
BOOLEAN
LR_VALID
BOOLEAN
BL_UPD
BOOLEAN
BL_CMD
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 264:
Name
AllPSTOValid
Type
Description
PSTO
INTEGER
UPD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
CMD_BLKD
BOOLEAN
LOC
BOOLEAN
REM
BOOLEAN
Settings
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Priority
No priority
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Priority
11.4.6
11.4.6.1
Identification
Function description
Local remote
11.4.6.2
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 263:
11.4.5.5
Default
LR_OFF
IEC 61850
identification
LOCREM
Description
Priority of originators
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY
397
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.
11.4.6.3
Function block
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
LOCCTRL
REMCTRL
LHMICTRL
OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
VALID
IEC09000076_1_en.vsd
IEC09000076 V1 EN
Figure 183:
11.4.6.4
Signals
Table 265:
Name
Type
Disable control
LOCCTRL
BOOLEAN
Local in control
REMCTRL
BOOLEAN
Remote in control
LHMICTRL
INTEGER
LHMI control
Name
Table 267:
Name
ControlMode
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 266:
11.4.6.5
Default
CTRLOFF
Type
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
Control is disabled
LOCAL
BOOLEAN
REMOTE
BOOLEAN
VALID
BOOLEAN
Settings
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Internal LR-switch
Description
Control mode for internal/external LR-switch
398
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.7
11.4.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
11.4.7.2
IEC 60617
identification
LOCREMCTRL
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control QCBAY
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.
11.4.7.3
Function block
LOCREMCTRL
^PSTO1
^HMICTR1
^PSTO2
^HMICTR2
^PSTO3
^HMICTR3
^PSTO4
^HMICTR4
^PSTO5
^HMICTR5
^PSTO6
^HMICTR6
^PSTO7
^HMICTR7
^PSTO8
^HMICTR8
^PSTO9
^HMICTR9
^PSTO10
^HMICTR10
^PSTO11
^HMICTR11
^PSTO12
^HMICTR12
IEC09000074_1_en.vsd
IEC09000074 V1 EN
Figure 184:
11.4.7.4
Signals
Table 268:
Name
Default
Description
PSTO1
INTEGER
PSTO2
INTEGER
PSTO3
INTEGER
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Description
INTEGER
PSTO5
INTEGER
PSTO6
INTEGER
PSTO7
INTEGER
PSTO8
INTEGER
PSTO9
INTEGER
PSTO10
INTEGER
PSTO11
INTEGER
PSTO12
INTEGER
Table 269:
Name
11.4.7.5
Default
PSTO4
Type
Description
HMICTR1
INTEGER
HMICTR2
INTEGER
HMICTR3
INTEGER
HMICTR4
INTEGER
HMICTR5
INTEGER
HMICTR6
INTEGER
HMICTR7
INTEGER
HMICTR8
INTEGER
HMICTR9
INTEGER
HMICTR10
INTEGER
HMICTR11
INTEGER
HMICTR12
INTEGER
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.4.8
11.4.8.1
Identification
Function description
Select release
IEC 61850
identification
SELGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
400
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.8.2
Function block
SELECT1
SELECT2
SELECT3
SELECT4
SELECT5
SELECT6
SELECT7
SELECT8
SELECT9
SELECT10
SELECT11
SELECT12
SELECT13
SELECT14
SELECT15
SELECT16
SELGGIO
RESERVED
IEC09000084_1_en.vsd
IEC09000084 V1 EN
Figure 185:
11.4.8.3
Signals
Table 270:
Name
Default
Description
SELECT1
BOOLEAN
SELECT2
BOOLEAN
SELECT3
BOOLEAN
SELECT4
BOOLEAN
SELECT5
BOOLEAN
SELECT6
BOOLEAN
SELECT7
BOOLEAN
SELECT8
BOOLEAN
SELECT9
BOOLEAN
SELECT10
BOOLEAN
SELECT11
BOOLEAN
SELECT12
BOOLEAN
SELECT13
BOOLEAN
SELECT14
BOOLEAN
SELECT15
BOOLEAN
SELECT16
BOOLEAN
Table 271:
Name
RESERVED
Description
Select signal of control 16
401
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.8.4
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.4.9
Operation principle
11.4.9.1
Control handling
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control
model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with
enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in
three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each
step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command
sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence,
the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable
"cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850
communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and
used for example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual
position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter
PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no
execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent
independent of the position value.
402
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Evaluation of position
The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI. With
the group signal connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and quality
attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error
the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs,
e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over
IEC 61850.
The different blocking possibilities are:
The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchronism-check and
the synchronizing function (SESRSYN, 25). It is assumed that the synchronism-check
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from
the synchronism-check function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchronism-check, the evaluation of the synchronismcheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchronismcheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function
Circuit breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, SCSWI
will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the
closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see
403
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
figure 186. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the
"synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-synchronismcheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 189.
SCSWI
EXE_CL
SXCBR
OR
CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECMD
Synchro
check
Synchronizing
function
ANSI09000209-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000209 V1 EN
Figure 186:
Time diagrams
The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.
404
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
select
execute command
tSelect
timer
t1
en05000092.vsd
IEC05000092 V1 EN
Figure 187:
tSelect
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see figure 188.
execute command
phase A open
close
phase B open
close
phase C open
close
command termination
phase A
command termination
phase B
command termination
phase C
command termination
t1
t1>tExecutionFB, then
long-operation-time in
'cause' is set
Figure 188:
tExecutionFB
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the
time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start.
405
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions
are not fulfilled.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing
t2
t2>tSynchronizing, then
blocked-by-synchronism
check in 'cause' is set
en05000095_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000095 V1 EN
Figure 189:
Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence, the error signal will
be set with a value. Table 272 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to
these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order
of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the
function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 272:
Apparatus control
function
22
wrongCTLModel
23
blockedForCommand
24
blocked-for-open-command
25
blocked-for-close-command
30
longOperationTime
31
switch-not-start-moving
32
persistent-intermediate-state
33
switch-returned-to-initial-position
34
switch-in-bad-state
35
not-expected-final-position
406
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.4.9.2
The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are
here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level
and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection
IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are
connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately
from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select
this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If
the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set
to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.
The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to table 273. In addition, there is one setting parameter that affects
the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LR-switch
position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is
permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the
external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch
that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 273:
Local panel switch
positions
AllPSTOValid
Possible locations that shall be able to
(setting parameter) operate
0 = Off
--
1 = Local
Priority
Local Panel
1 = Local
No priority
407
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
PSTO value
AllPSTOValid
Possible locations that shall be able to
(setting parameter) operate
2 = Remote
Priority
Remote level
2 = Remote
No priority
3 = Faulty
--
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within
a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related
to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850
81). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no
outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional
and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
11.4.9.3
408
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID
QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LR_ VALID
LOC
BL_ UPD
REM
BL_ CMD
LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO10
HMICTR10
PSTO11
HMICTR11
PSTO12
HMICTR12
IEC 09000208_1_en. vsd
IEC09000208 V2 EN
Figure 190:
Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with one bay
and one screen page
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.
11.5
Interlocking
11.5.1
Functionality
The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching
devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is
not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the primary bus configuration and status of any
breaker or switch at any given time.
409
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.2
11.5.2.1
Identification
Function description
Logical node for interlocking
11.5.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
SCILO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO(3) function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO (3) function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic and provides SCILO(3) its
input.
11.5.2.3
Function block
SCILO (3)
POSOPEN
EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE
EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
ANSI09000083-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000083 V1 EN
Figure 191:
11.5.2.4
Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch being controlled has
its position defined as open (via POSOPEN) for example, then the appropriate enable
signal output (in this case EN_OPEN) is false. The switch operation enable signals
EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time only in the intermediate and
bad position state of the switch (defined via POSOPEN and POSCLOSE) and if they
are enabled by the interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical
nodes Circuit breaker/Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals ,
OPEN_EN and CLOSE_EN come from the interlocking logic. The outputs are
connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One instance per switching
device is needed.
410
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
SCILO
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
XOR
NOT
EN_OPEN
AND
OR
AND
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
EN_CLOSE
AND
OR
AND
en04000525_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000525 V1 EN
Figure 192:
11.5.2.5
Signals
Table 274:
Name
Default
Description
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
OPEN_EN
BOOLEAN
CLOSE_EN
BOOLEAN
Table 275:
Name
11.5.2.6
Description
EN_OPEN
BOOLEAN
EN_CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.3
411
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
11.5.3.2
BB_ES
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one
busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 193.
89G
en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN
Figure 193:
11.5.3.3
Function block
BB_ES (3)
89G_OP
89GREL
89G_CL
89GITL
BB_DC_OP
BBGSOPTR
VP_BB_DC
BBGSCLTR
EXDU_BB
ANSI09000071-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000071 V1 EN
Figure 194:
11.5.3.4
Logic diagram
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC
BB_DC_OP
EXDU_BB
89G_OP
89G_CL
AND
NOT
89GREL
89GITL
BBGSOPTR
BBGSCLTR
en04000546_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000546 V1 EN
412
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.3.5
Signals
Table 276:
Name
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
89G_CL
BOOLEAN
BB_DC_OP
BOOLEAN
VP_BB_DC
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
Table 277:
Name
11.5.3.6
Default
89G_OP
Type
Description
89GREL
BOOLEAN
89GITL
BOOLEAN
BBGSOPTR
BOOLEAN
BBGSCLTR
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.4
11.5.4.1
Identification
Function description
Interlocking for bus-section breaker
11.5.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
A1A2_BS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bussection circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 195. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
413
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A1)
WA2 (A2)
289
189
189G
289G
152
489G
389G
A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN
Figure 195:
11.5.4.3
Function block
A1A2_BS (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
389G_OP
289REL
389G_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
389GREL
489G_CL
389GITL
S189G_OP
489GREL
S189G_CL
489GITL
S289G_OP
S1S2OPTR
S289G_CL
S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP
189OPTR
VP_BBTR
189CLTR
EXDU_12
289OPTR
EXDU_89G
289CLTR
152O_EX1
VPS1S2TR
152O_EX2
VP189TR
152O_EX3
VP289TR
189_EX1
189_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI09000066-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000066 V1 EN
Figure 196:
414
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.4.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP289
289_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS1189G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP389G
VPS1189G
389G_CL
S1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
A1A2_BS
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VPS1189G
XOR
VPS2289G
AND
OR
NOT
152OPREL
152OPITL
AND
AND
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
189REL
189ITL
AND
en04000542_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000542 V1 EN
415
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS2289G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S2289G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VPS2289G
489G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP189
VP289
189_OP
289_OP
AND
289REL
289ITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
489GREL
489GITL
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
189_OP
289_OP
152_OP
VP189
VP289
VP152
OR
NOT
S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
VPS1S2TR
AND
en04000543_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000543 V1 EN
11.5.4.5
Signals
Table 278:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
S189G_OP
BOOLEAN
S189G_CL
BOOLEAN
S289G_OP
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
S289G_CL
BOOLEAN
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
EXDU_12
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
152O_EX1
BOOLEAN
152O_EX2
BOOLEAN
152O_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 279:
Name
Description
152OPREL
BOOLEAN
152OPITL
BOOLEAN
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
489GREL
BOOLEAN
489GITL
BOOLEAN
S1S2OPTR
BOOLEAN
S1S2CLTR
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
11.5.4.6
Type
Description
VPS1S2TR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.5
11.5.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
11.5.5.2
IEC 60617
identification
A1A2_DC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 197. A1A2_DC (3)
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
WA1 (A1)
WA2 (A2)
52
289G
189G
A1A2_DC
en04000492_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000492 V1 EN
Figure 197:
418
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.5.3
Function block
A1A2_DC (3)
089_OP
089OPREL
089_CL
089OPITL
S189G_OP
089CLREL
S189G_CL
089CLITL
S289G_OP
DCOPTR
S289G_CL
DCCLTR
S1DC_OP
VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB
089C_EX1
089C_EX2
089O_EX1
089O_EX2
089O_EX3
ANSI09000067-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000067 V1 EN
Figure 198:
11.5.5.4
Logic diagram
A1A2_DC
89_OP
89_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
VPS1_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_89G
XOR
VPQB
VPDCTR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
VPS1189G
XOR
VPS2289G
XOR
AND
OR
NOT
89OPREL
89OPITL
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1189
VPS2289G
VPS2_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
S1189G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
QBOP_EX3
AND
en04000544_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000544 V1 EN
419
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
AND
OR
NOT
AND
ANSI11000276-1-vsd
ANSI11000276 V1 EN
11.5.5.5
Signals
Table 280:
Name
Default
Description
089_OP
BOOLEAN
089_CL
BOOLEAN
S189G_OP
BOOLEAN
S189G_CL
BOOLEAN
S289G_OP
BOOLEAN
S289G_CL
BOOLEAN
S1DC_OP
BOOLEAN
S2DC_OP
BOOLEAN
VPS1_DC
BOOLEAN
VPS2_DC
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BB
BOOLEAN
089C_EX1
BOOLEAN
089C_EX2
BOOLEAN
089O_EX1
BOOLEAN
089O_EX2
BOOLEAN
089O_EX3
BOOLEAN
420
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 281:
Name
11.5.5.6
Type
Description
089OPREL
BOOLEAN
089OPITL
BOOLEAN
089CLREL
BOOLEAN
089CLITL
BOOLEAN
DCOPTR
BOOLEAN
DCCLTR
BOOLEAN
VPDCTR
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.6
11.5.6.1
Identification
Function description
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay
11.5.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
ABC_BC
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 199. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.
421
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189
289
189G
2089
789
152
289G
en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN
Figure 199:
The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer
bus WA7(C).
422
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.6.3
Function block
ABC_BC (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
789_OP
289REL
789_CL
289ITL
2089_OP
789REL
2089_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
2089REL
189G_CL
2089ITL
289G_OP
189GREL
289G_CL
189GITL
1189G_OP
289GREL
1189G_CL
289GITL
2189G_OP
189OPTR
2189G_CL
189CLTR
7189G_OP
22089OTR
7189G_CL
22089CTR
BBTR_OP
789OPTR
BC_12_CL
789CLTR
VP_BBTR
1289OPTR
VP_BC_12
1289CLTR
EXDU_89G
BC12OPTR
EXDU_12
BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC
BC17OPTR
152O_EX1
BC17CLTR
152O_EX2
BC27OPTR
152O_EX3
BC27CLTR
189_EX1
VP189TR
189_EX2
V22089TR
189_EX3
VP789TR
289_EX1
VP1289TR
289_EX2
VPBC12TR
289_EX3
VPBC17TR
2089_EX1
VPBC27TR
2089_EX2
789_EX1
789_EX2
ANSI09000069-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000069 V1 EN
Figure 200:
423
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.6.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
2089_OP
2089_CL
789_OP
789_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP2089
2089_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
ABC_BC
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP2089
XOR
VP789
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VP7189G
AND
152OPREL
152OPITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP789
VP2089
AND
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
en04000533_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000533 V1 EN
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
189REL
189ITL
AND
AND
en04000534_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000534 V1 EN
424
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP_BC_12
189_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
289REL
289ITL
AND
AND
en04000535_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000535 V1 EN
VP152
VP2089
VP189G
VP289G
VP7189G
152_OP
2089_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
789_EX1
VP289G
VP7189G
289G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX2
VP152
VP789
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
789_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
2089_EX1
VP289G
VP2189G
289G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
2089_EX2
AND
789REL
OR
NOT
789ITL
AND
AND
2089REL
OR
NOT
2089ITL
AND
en04000536_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000536 V1 EN
425
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP189
VP2089
VP789
VP289
189_OP
2089_OP
789_OP
289_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
2089_OP
289_OP
VP2089
VP289
789_OP
789_CL
VP789
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
152_OP
189_OP
2089_OP
VP152
VP189
VP2089
152_OP
189_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP189
VP789
152_OP
289_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP289
VP789
AND
NOT
NOT
AND
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
22089OTR
22089CTR
V22089TR
789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
VPBC12TR
AND
OR
NOT
BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
VPBC17TR
AND
OR
NOT
BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR
AND
en04000537_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000537 V1 EN
11.5.6.5
Signals
Table 282:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
789_OP
BOOLEAN
789_CL
BOOLEAN
2089_OP
BOOLEAN
2089_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
7189G_OP
BOOLEAN
7189G_CL
BOOLEAN
BBTR_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
VP_BBTR
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_12
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
152O_EX1
BOOLEAN
152O_EX2
BOOLEAN
152O_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX3
BOOLEAN
2089_EX1
BOOLEAN
2089_EX2
BOOLEAN
789_EX1
BOOLEAN
789_EX2
BOOLEAN
427
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 283:
Name
Description
152OPREL
BOOLEAN
152OPITL
BOOLEAN
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
789REL
BOOLEAN
789ITL
BOOLEAN
2089REL
BOOLEAN
2089ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
22089OTR
BOOLEAN
22089CTR
BOOLEAN
789OPTR
BOOLEAN
789CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
BC12OPTR
BOOLEAN
BC12CLTR
BOOLEAN
BC17OPTR
BOOLEAN
BC17CLTR
BOOLEAN
BC27OPTR
BOOLEAN
BC27CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
428
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
11.5.6.6
Type
Description
V22089TR
BOOLEAN
VP789TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
VPBC12TR
BOOLEAN
VPBC17TR
BOOLEAN
VPBC27TR
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.7
11.5.7.1
Identification
Function description
11.5.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
BH_CONN
BH_LINE_A
BH_LINE_B
Functionality
The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),
BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half
diameter according to figure 201.
429
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
289
189G
189G
152
152
289G
289G
689
689
389G
BH_LINE_A
389G
6189
152
BH_LINE_B
6289
989
989
189G
289G
989G
989G
BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN
Figure 201:
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.
430
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.7.3
Function block
BH_CONN (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
6189_OP
6189REL
6189_CL
6189ITL
6289_OP
6289REL
6289_CL
6289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
ANSI09000072-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000072 V1 EN
Figure 202:
431
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
BH_LINE_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
189OPTR
C152_CL
189CLTR
C6189_OP
VP189TR
C6189_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI09000073-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000073 V1 EN
Figure 203:
432
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
BH_LINE_B (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
289OPTR
C152_CL
289CLTR
C6289_OP
VP289TR
C6289_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI09000081-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000081 V1 EN
Figure 204:
433
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.7.4
Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
VP6189
VP6289
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP189G
VP1389G
189G_CL
1389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP289G
VP2389G
289G_CL
2389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP6189
VP6289
6189_OP
6289_OP
BH_CONN
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP1389G
VP2389G
152CLREL
152CLITL
NOT
XOR
AND
AND
OR
NOT
6189REL
61891ITL
AND
AND
OR
NOT
6289REL
6289ITL
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
en04000560_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000560 V1 EN
434
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6189_OP
C6189_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP189
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
BH_LINE_A
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP689
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VPC152
XOR
VPC189G
XOR
VPC289G
XOR
VPC6189
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL
689REL
689ITL
AND
en04000554_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000554 V1 EN
435
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
VP189
VP689
189_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6189
689_OP
989_OP
C6189_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6189
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3
AND
189REL
189ITL
OR
NOT
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
AND
NOT
AND
OR
NOT
989REL
989ITL
OR
AND
en04000555_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000555 V1 EN
C6189_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000556_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000556 V1 EN
436
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
152_OP
152_CL
289_OP
289_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6289_OP
C6289_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP289
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2
BH_LINE_B
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP689
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VPC152
XOR
VPC189G
XOR
VPC289G
XOR
VPC6289
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
689REL
689ITL
AND
en04000557_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000557 V1 EN
437
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP289
VP689
289_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6289
689_OP
989_OP
C6289_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6289
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3
289REL
OR
AND
289ITL
NOT
AND
AND
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
NOT
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
AND
NOT
989REL
AND
OR
NOT
989ITL
OR
AND
en04000558_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000558 V1 EN
C6289_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000559_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000559 V1 EN
438
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.7.5
Signals
Table 284:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
6289_OP
BOOLEAN
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1389G_OP
BOOLEAN
1389G_CL
BOOLEAN
2389G_OP
BOOLEAN
2389G_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_EX1
BOOLEAN
6189_EX2
BOOLEAN
6289_EX1
BOOLEAN
6289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 285:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
689_OP
BOOLEAN
689_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
C152_OP
BOOLEAN
C152_CL
BOOLEAN
C6189_OP
BOOLEAN
C6189_CL
BOOLEAN
C189G_OP
BOOLEAN
C189G_CL
BOOLEAN
C289G_OP
BOOLEAN
C289G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
689_EX1
BOOLEAN
689_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
989_EX6
BOOLEAN
989_EX7
BOOLEAN
Table 286:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
689_OP
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
689_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
C152_OP
BOOLEAN
C152_CL
BOOLEAN
C6289_OP
BOOLEAN
C6289_CL
BOOLEAN
C189G_OP
BOOLEAN
C189G_CL
BOOLEAN
C289G_OP
BOOLEAN
C289G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
689_EX1
BOOLEAN
689_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
441
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
989_EX6
BOOLEAN
989_EX7
BOOLEAN
Table 287:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
6189REL
BOOLEAN
6189ITL
BOOLEAN
6289REL
BOOLEAN
6289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
Table 288:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
689REL
BOOLEAN
689ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Table 289:
Name
11.5.7.6
Type
189OPTR
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
689REL
BOOLEAN
689ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.8
443
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.8.1
Identification
Function description
11.5.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
DB_BUS_A
DB_BUS_B
DB_LINE
Functionality
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 205.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
DB_BUS_A
189G
289
489G
DB_BUS_B
252
152
589G
289G
6189
6289
389G
DB_LINE
989
989G
en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN
Figure 205:
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_BUS_A (3) handles the circuit breaker QA1 that is connected to busbar WA1 and
the disconnectors and earthing switches of this section. DB_BUS_B (3) handles the
circuit breaker QA2 that is connected to busbar WA2 and the disconnectors and
earthing switches of this section.
444
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.8.3
Function block
DB_BUS_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
6189REL
189_CL
6189ITL
6189_OP
189REL
6189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
189OPTR
389G_CL
189CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
ANSI09000077-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000077 V1 EN
Figure 206:
DB_BUS_B (3)
252_OP
252CLREL
252_CL
252CLITL
289_OP
6289REL
289_CL
6289ITL
6289_OP
289REL
6289_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
489GREL
489G_CL
489GITL
589G_OP
589GREL
589G_CL
589GITL
389G_OP
289OPTR
389G_CL
289CLTR
2189G_OP
VP289TR
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI09000078-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000078 V1 EN
Figure 207:
445
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
DB_LINE (3)
152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989REL
989ITL
389GREL
389GITL
989GREL
989GITL
ANSI09000082-1-en.vsd
ASNI09000082 V1 EN
Figure 208:
446
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.8.4
Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189_OP
189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VP6189
VP189
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
DB_BUS_A
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389G
XOR
NOT
VP1189G
152CLREL
152CLITL
NOT
6189REL
6189ITL
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
NOT
189REL
189ITL
AND
en04000547_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000547 V1 EN
VP6189
VP189
6189_OP
189_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000548_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000548 V1 EN
447
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
252_OP
252_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
289_OP
289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP6289
VP289
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP389G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP589G
VP389G
589G_CL
389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP2189G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VP2189G
489G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
DB_BUS_B
XOR
VP252
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VP589G
VP389G
XOR
XOR
AND
AND
NOT
OR
NOT
VP2189G
252CLREL
252CLITL
6289REL
6289ITL
AND
AND
OR
NOT
289REL
289ITL
AND
en04000552_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000552 V1 EN
VP6289
VP289
6289_OP
289_OP
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
AND
NOT
NOT
489GREL
489GITL
589GREL
589GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000553_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000553 V1 EN
448
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP252
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
152_OP
252_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
DB_LINE
VP152
XOR
XOR
VP252
XOR
VP6189
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP6289
XOR
VP489G
XOR
VP589G
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP989G
VPVOLT
XOR
AND
OR
NOT
989REL
989ITL
AND
en04000549_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000549 V1 EN
449
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP989G
VP6289
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
989G_OP
6289_OP
989_EX2
VP252
VP6189
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
252_OP
6189_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX3
VP389G
VP989G
VP6189
VP6289
389G_OP
989G_OP
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_EX4
VP389G
VP989G
389G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX5
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
en04000550_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000550 V1 EN
VP6189
VP6289
VP989
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_OP
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
NOT
389GREL
389GITL
NOT
989GREL
989GITL
AND
AND
en04000551_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000551 V1 EN
11.5.8.5
Signals
Table 290:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
6189_EX1
BOOLEAN
6189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 291:
Name
Default
Description
252_OP
BOOLEAN
252_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
6289_OP
BOOLEAN
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
589G_OP
BOOLEAN
589G_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
451
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
6289_EX1
BOOLEAN
6289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
Table 292:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
252_OP
BOOLEAN
252_CL
BOOLEAN
6189_OP
BOOLEAN
6189_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
6289_OP
BOOLEAN
6289_CL
BOOLEAN
489G_OP
BOOLEAN
489G_CL
BOOLEAN
589G_OP
BOOLEAN
589G_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
452
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
989_EX3
BOOLEAN
989_EX4
BOOLEAN
989_EX5
BOOLEAN
Table 293:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
6189REL
BOOLEAN
6189ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Table 294:
Name
Description
252CLREL
BOOLEAN
252CLITL
BOOLEAN
6289REL
BOOLEAN
6289ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
489GREL
BOOLEAN
489GITL
BOOLEAN
589GREL
BOOLEAN
589GITL
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
453
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 295:
Name
11.5.8.6
Type
Description
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
389GREL
BOOLEAN
389GITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.9
11.5.9.1
Identification
Function description
Interlocking for line bay
11.5.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
ABC_LINE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 209. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a
single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
454
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189
289
189G
789
152
289G
989
989G
en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN
Figure 209:
The interlocking functionality in 650 series can not handle the transfer
bus WA7(C).
455
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.9.3
Function block
ABC_LINE (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
789_OP
789REL
789_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
1189G_OP
189OPTR
1189G_CL
189CLTR
2189G_OP
289OPTR
2189G_CL
289CLTR
7189G_OP
789OPTR
7189G_CL
789CLTR
BB7_D_OP
1289OPTR
BC_12_CL
1289CLTR
BC_17_OP
VP189TR
BC_17_CL
VP289TR
BC_27_OP
VP789TR
BC_27_CL
VP1289TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
989_EX1
989_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
789_EX1
789_EX2
789_EX3
789_EX4
ANSI09000070-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000070 V1 EN
Figure 210:
456
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.9.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
789_OP
789_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP989G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
VP289G
VP989G
289G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX2
ABC_LINE
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP989
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP789
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP989G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
XOR
VP7189G
XOR
VPVOLT
AND
AND
OR
NOT
NOT
152CLREL
152CLITL
989REL
989ITL
AND
en04000527_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000527 V1 EN
457
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
AND
VP289
AND
189REL
OR
NOT
189ITL
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
AND
189EX3
en04000528_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000528 V1 EN
458
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
VP189
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
AND
289REL
OR
NOT
289ITL
289_EX1
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
AND
289_EX3
en04000529_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000529 V1 EN
459
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP989G
VP7189G
AND
VP_BB7_D
789REL
OR
NOT
VP_BC_17
789ITL
VP_BC_27
989G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
789_EX1
VP152
VP189
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
152_CL
189_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX2
en04000530_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000530 V1 EN
460
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP289
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
152_CL
289_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
AND
OR
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX3
VP989G
VP7189G
989G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX4
VP189
VP289
VP989
189_OP
289_OP
989_OP
VP789
VP989
VPVOLT
789_OP
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
AND
AND
NOT
NOT
AND
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
989GREL
989GITL
en04000531_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000531 V1 EN
461
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
789_OP
789_CL
VP789
789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
OR
NOT
AND
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
en04000532_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000532 V1 EN
11.5.9.5
Signals
Table 296:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
989_OP
BOOLEAN
989_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
789_OP
BOOLEAN
789_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
989G_OP
BOOLEAN
989G_CL
BOOLEAN
462
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
7189G_OP
BOOLEAN
7189G_CL
BOOLEAN
BB7_D_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
BC_17_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_17_CL
BOOLEAN
BC_27_OP
BOOLEAN
BC_27_CL
BOOLEAN
VOLT_OFF
BOOLEAN
VOLT_ON
BOOLEAN
VP_BB7_D
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_17
BOOLEAN
VP_BC_27
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BPB
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
989_EX1
BOOLEAN
989_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
463
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX3
BOOLEAN
789_EX1
BOOLEAN
789_EX2
BOOLEAN
789_EX3
BOOLEAN
789_EX4
BOOLEAN
Table 297:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
989REL
BOOLEAN
989ITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
789REL
BOOLEAN
789ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
989GREL
BOOLEAN
989GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
789OPTR
BOOLEAN
789CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
11.5.9.6
Type
Description
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
VP789TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.10
11.5.10.1
Identification
Function description
Interlocking for transformer bay
11.5.10.2
IEC 61850
identification
AB_TRAFO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
3
Functionality
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a
transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 211.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
465
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189
289
189G
AB_TRAFO
152
289G
389G
252
489G
389
489
en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN
Figure 211:
466
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.10.3
Function block
AB_TRAFO (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389_OP
189OPTR
389_CL
189CLTR
489_OP
289OPTR
489_CL
289CLTR
389G_OP
1289OPTR
389G_CL
1289CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
VP289TR
2189G_OP
VP1289TR
2189G_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BC
152_EX1
152_EX2
152_EX3
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
ANSI09000068-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000068 V1 EN
Figure 212:
467
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.10.4
Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389_OP
389_CL
489_OP
489_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP189
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389
VP489
VP389G
152_EX2
389G_OP
152_EX3
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
152_EX1
AB_TRAFO
XOR
VP152
XOR
VP189
XOR
VP289
XOR
VP189G
XOR
VP289G
XOR
VP389
XOR
VP489
XOR
VP389G
XOR
VP1189G
XOR
VP2189G
152CLREL
152CLITL
AND
NOT
OR
AND
en04000538_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000538 V1 EN
468
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP389G
VP_BC_12
289_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3
AND
189REL
OR
NOT
189ITL
AND
AND
en04000539_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000539 V1 EN
VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP389G
VP_BC_12
189_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3
AND
OR
NOT
252REL
252ITL
AND
AND
en04000540_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000540 V1 EN
469
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
VP189
VP289
VP389
VP489
189_OP
289_OP
389_OP
489_OP
AND
NOT
NOT
189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
289_OP
289_CL
VP289
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
OR
NOT
AND
en04000541_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000541 V1 EN
11.5.10.5
Signals
Table 298:
Name
Default
Description
152_OP
BOOLEAN
152_CL
BOOLEAN
189_OP
BOOLEAN
189_CL
BOOLEAN
289_OP
BOOLEAN
289_CL
BOOLEAN
189G_OP
BOOLEAN
189G_CL
BOOLEAN
289G_OP
BOOLEAN
289G_CL
BOOLEAN
389_OP
BOOLEAN
389_CL
BOOLEAN
489_OP
BOOLEAN
489_CL
BOOLEAN
389G_OP
BOOLEAN
389G_CL
BOOLEAN
1189G_OP
BOOLEAN
1189G_CL
BOOLEAN
2189G_OP
BOOLEAN
2189G_CL
BOOLEAN
BC_12_CL
BOOLEAN
Section 11
Control
Name
Type
Default
Description
VP_BC_12
BOOLEAN
EXDU_89G
BOOLEAN
EXDU_BC
BOOLEAN
152_EX1
BOOLEAN
152_EX2
BOOLEAN
152_EX3
BOOLEAN
189_EX1
BOOLEAN
189_EX2
BOOLEAN
189_EX3
BOOLEAN
289_EX1
BOOLEAN
289_EX2
BOOLEAN
289_EX3
BOOLEAN
Table 299:
Name
Description
152CLREL
BOOLEAN
152CLITL
BOOLEAN
189REL
BOOLEAN
189ITL
BOOLEAN
289REL
BOOLEAN
289ITL
BOOLEAN
189GREL
BOOLEAN
189GITL
BOOLEAN
289GREL
BOOLEAN
289GITL
BOOLEAN
189OPTR
BOOLEAN
189CLTR
BOOLEAN
289OPTR
BOOLEAN
289CLTR
BOOLEAN
1289OPTR
BOOLEAN
1289CLTR
BOOLEAN
VP189TR
BOOLEAN
VP289TR
BOOLEAN
VP1289TR
BOOLEAN
471
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.10.6
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.11
11.5.11.1
Identification
11.5.11.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Position evaluation
POS_EVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or
CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.
11.5.11.3
Function block
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079_1_en.vsd
IEC09000079 V1 EN
Figure 213:
11.5.11.4
Logic diagram
Position including quality
POSITION
POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
Open/close position of
switch device
IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN
Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
472
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.5.11.5
Output OPENPOS
Output CLOSEPOS
Good
1 (Breaker open)
Good
2 (Breaker closed)
Good
3 (Breaker faulty)
Good
Any
Invalid
Any
Oscillatory
Signals
Table 300:
Name
POSITION
Table 301:
Name
11.5.11.6
Signal quality
0 (Breaker intermediate)
Default
0
Description
Position status including quality
Description
OPENPOS
BOOLEAN
Open position
CLOSEPOS
BOOLEAN
Close position
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.5.12
Operation principle
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED.
The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication
between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function is used to ensure that HV apparatuses that might affect the
interlock are blocked during the time gap, which arises between position updates. This
can be done by means of the communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that
might influence the interlocking condition of the intended operation. The reservation is
maintained until the operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices
that may affect it.
473
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:
Interlocking
module
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXCBR
152
Apparatus control
modules
SCILO
SCSWI
SXSWI
en04000526_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000526 V1 EN
Figure 214:
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
Ungrounded busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid
474
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Station bus
Bay 1
Bay n
Bus coupler
...
..
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1
WA2
189
289
189
289
289
189
189G
289G
152
152
152
989
989
en05000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000494 V1 EN
Figure 215:
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board
error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for
execution of the function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:
475
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements,
by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600.
The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in
TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
11.6
11.6.1
Identification
Function description
Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation
IEC 61850
identification
SLGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
476
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.6.2
Functionality
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGGIO (or
the selector switch function block) is used to get an enhanced selector switch
functionality compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware
selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions
operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance
issues, lower system reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector
switches eliminate all these problems.
11.6.3
Function block
SLGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN
^P01
^P02
^P03
^P04
^P05
^P06
^P07
^P08
^P09
^P10
^P11
^P12
^P13
^P14
^P15
^P16
^P17
^P18
^P19
^P20
^P21
^P22
^P23
^P24
^P25
^P26
^P27
^P28
^P29
^P30
^P31
^P32
SWPOSN
IEC09000091_1_en.vsd
IEC09000091 V1 EN
Figure 216:
11.6.4
Signals
Table 302:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
UP
BOOLEAN
DOWN
BOOLEAN
477
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 303:
Name
Description
P01
BOOLEAN
P02
BOOLEAN
P03
BOOLEAN
P04
BOOLEAN
P05
BOOLEAN
P06
BOOLEAN
P07
BOOLEAN
P08
BOOLEAN
P09
BOOLEAN
P10
BOOLEAN
P11
BOOLEAN
P12
BOOLEAN
P13
BOOLEAN
P14
BOOLEAN
P15
BOOLEAN
P16
BOOLEAN
P17
BOOLEAN
P18
BOOLEAN
P19
BOOLEAN
P20
BOOLEAN
P21
BOOLEAN
P22
BOOLEAN
P23
BOOLEAN
P24
BOOLEAN
P25
BOOLEAN
P26
BOOLEAN
P27
BOOLEAN
P28
BOOLEAN
P29
BOOLEAN
P30
BOOLEAN
P31
BOOLEAN
P32
BOOLEAN
SWPOSN
INTEGER
478
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.6.5
Table 304:
Name
Settings
SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
NrPos
2 - 32
32
OutType
Pulsed
Steady
Steady
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tDelay
0.000 - 60000.000
0.010
0.000
StopAtExtremes
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
11.6.6
Monitored data
Table 305:
Name
SWPOSN
11.6.7
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Switch position as integer
value
Operation principle
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the
UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates
the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output
settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of
UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application
Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired
position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or
remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation,
by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and
further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified
479
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the
Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has also an
integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the
block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the
user can see the position names instead of a number.
11.7
11.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
11.7.2
IEC 60617
identification
VSGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a
variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI.
11.7.3
Function block
VSGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2
BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC09000341-1-en.vsd
IEC09000341 V1 EN
11.7.4
Signals
Table 306:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
IPOS1
BOOLEAN
IPOS2
BOOLEAN
480
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 307:
Name
11.7.5
Table 308:
Name
Type
Description
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
POSITION
INTEGER
POS1
BOOLEAN
POS2
BOOLEAN
CMDPOS12
BOOLEAN
CMDPOS21
BOOLEAN
Settings
VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
CtlModel
Dir Norm
SBO Enh
Dir Norm
Mode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Operation mode
tSelect
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
30.000
tPulse
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
11.7.6
Operation principle
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:
for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1
and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in
the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
481
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
IPOS2
PosUndefined
P00
Position1
P01
Position2
P10
PosBadState
P11
11.8
11.8.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
functions
11.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
DPGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO function block is used
to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation using
IEC61850. It is especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.
482
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.8.3
Function block
DPGGIO
OPEN
CLOSE
VALID
POSITION
IEC09000075_1_en.vsd
IEC09000075 V1 EN
Figure 217:
11.8.4
Signals
Table 309:
Name
Default
Description
OPEN
BOOLEAN
Open indication
CLOSE
BOOLEAN
Close indication
VALID
BOOLEAN
Valid indication
Table 310:
Name
POSITION
11.8.5
Type
INTEGER
Description
Double point indication
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
11.8.6
Operation principle
Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment
or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, PCM600 must be
used to define which function block in which equipment or system should receive this
information.
483
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.9
11.9.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
11.9.2
IEC 60617
identification
SPC8GGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO function block is a collection of
8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) to
those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive command receiving
functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent
directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. The commands can be pulsed or
steady with a settable pulse time.
11.9.3
Function block
SPC8GGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
IEC09000086_1_en.vsd
IEC09000086 V1 EN
Figure 218:
11.9.4
Signals
Table 311:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
484
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Table 312:
Name
11.9.5
Table 313:
Name
Type
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
Settings
SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
Latched1
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse1
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched2
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse2
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched3
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse3
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched4
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse4
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched5
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse5
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched6
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse6
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched7
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse7
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
Latched8
Pulsed
Latched
Pulsed
tPulse8
0.01 - 6000.00
0.01
0.10
485
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.9.6
Operation principle
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the
eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected.
The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if
the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will
block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function.
11.10
11.10.1
Identification
Function description
AutomationBits, command function for
DNP3
11.10.2
IEC 61850
identification
AUTOBITS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Automation bits function AUTOBITS is used to configure the DNP3 protocol
command handling. Each of the 3 AUTOBITS available has 32 individual outputs
available, each can be mapped as a binary output point in DNP3.
486
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.10.3
Function block
AUTOBITS
BLOCK
PSTO
^CMDBIT1
^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000030-1-en.vsd
IEC09000030 V1 EN
Figure 219:
11.10.4
Signals
Table 314:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 315:
Name
Description
CMDBIT1
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT2
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT3
BOOLEAN
487
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
Name
11.10.5
Table 316:
Name
Operation
Type
Description
CMDBIT4
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT5
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT6
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT7
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT8
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT9
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT10
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT11
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT12
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT13
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT14
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT15
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT16
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT17
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT18
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT19
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT20
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT21
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT22
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT23
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT24
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT25
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT26
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT27
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT28
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT29
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT30
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT31
BOOLEAN
CMDBIT32
BOOLEAN
Settings
AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Disable/Enable Operation
488
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.10.6
Operation principle
Automation bits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulseOn, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon
activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The
BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master.
Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator
place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in
Local then no change is applied to the outputs.
For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to DNP3 communication
protocol manual.
11.11
11.11.1
Functionality
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction with pre-defined output
signals. The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
11.11.2
Function block
I103CMD
BLOCK
16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC10000282-1-en.vsd
IEC10000282 V1 EN
Figure 220:
489
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.11.3
Signals
Table 317:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 318:
Table 319:
Name
FunctionType
Description
Block of commands
Name
11.11.4
Default
Type
Description
16-AR
BOOLEAN
17-DIFF
BOOLEAN
18-PROT
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103CMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
1 - 255
Step
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
11.12
11.12.1
Functionality
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with defined IED functions.
The signals are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart.
11.12.2
Function block
BLOCK
I103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC10000283-1-en.vsd
IEC10000283 V1 EN
Figure 221:
490
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.12.3
Signals
Table 320:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 321:
Table 322:
Name
FunctionType
Description
Block of commands
Name
11.12.4
Default
Type
Description
19-LEDRS
BOOLEAN
23-GRP1
BOOLEAN
24-GRP2
BOOLEAN
25-GRP3
BOOLEAN
26-GRP4
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
255
Description
Function type (1-255)
11.13
11.13.1
Functionality
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with user defined output
signals. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each output signal.
491
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.13.2
Function block
BLOCK
I103USRCMD
^OUTPUT1
^OUTPUT2
^OUTPUT3
^OUTPUT4
^OUTPUT5
^OUTPUT6
^OUTPUT7
^OUTPUT8
IEC10000284-1-en.vsd
IEC10000284 V1 EN
Figure 222:
11.13.3
Signals
Table 323:
Name
Type
BLOCK
Table 324:
Table 325:
Name
Description
Block of commands
Name
11.13.4
Default
BOOLEAN
Type
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
Command output 1
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
Command output 2
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
Command output 3
OUTPUT4
BOOLEAN
Command output 4
OUTPUT5
BOOLEAN
Command output 5
OUTPUT6
BOOLEAN
Command output 6
OUTPUT7
BOOLEAN
Command output 7
OUTPUT8
BOOLEAN
Command output 8
Settings
I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
PulseMode
Steady
Pulsed
Pulsed
Pulse mode
PulseLength
0.200 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo_1
1 - 255
Section 11
Control
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo_2
1 - 255
InfNo_3
1 - 255
InfNo_4
1 - 255
InfNo_5
1 - 255
InfNo_6
1 - 255
InfNo_7
1 - 255
InfNo_8
1 - 255
11.14
11.14.1
Functionality
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The
function has two outputs signals CMD_OFF and CMD_ON that can be used to
implement double-point command schemes.
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2
steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2, while
the OFF output is pulsed with a command value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted
and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with command 1. The
I103GENCMD is retained, and a command in steady mode will be reissued on restart.
The standard does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a
switching device, these values are transmitted.
11.14.2
Function block
BLOCK
I103GENCMD
^CMD_OFF
^CMD_ON
IEC10000285-1-en.vsd
IEC10000285 V1 EN
Figure 223:
493
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.14.3
Signals
Table 326:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 327:
Table 328:
Name
Description
Block of command
Name
11.14.4
Default
Type
Description
CMD_OFF
BOOLEAN
CMD_ON
BOOLEAN
Command output ON
Settings
I103GENCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
PulseLength
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.400
Pulse length
InfNo
1 - 255
11.15
11.15.1
Functionality
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are getting the position value
as an integer (for example from the POSITION output of the SCSWI function block)
and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). .The standard does not
define the use of values 0 and 3 . However, when connected to a switching device,
these values are transmitted.
The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring direction (the position
information), not the commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to
indicate that the monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-operate type
of control)
494
Technical Manual
Section 11
Control
11.15.2
Function block
I103POSCMD
BLOCK
POSITION
SELECT
IEC10000286-1-en.vsd
IEC10000286 V1 EN
Figure 224:
11.15.3
Signals
Table 329:
Name
11.15.4
Table 330:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of command
POSITION
INTEGER
SELECT
BOOLEAN
Default
Description
Settings
I103POSCMD Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
FunctionType
1 - 255
InfNo
160 - 196
160
495
Technical Manual
496
Section 12
Scheme communication
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.1
12.1.1
Identification
Function description
Scheme communication logic with delta
based blocking scheme signal transmit
12.1.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZCPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Functionality
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for permissive underreaching,
permissive overreaching, blocking, delta based blocking, unblocking and intertrip are
available.
12.1.3
Function block
ZCPSCH (85)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
CS
BLOCK
CHSTOP
BLKTR
CRL
BLKCS
LCG
CS_STOP
PLTR_CRD
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CR_GUARD
CBOPEN
ANSI09000004-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000004 V2 EN
Figure 225:
497
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.1.4
Signals
Table 331:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
BLKCS
BOOLEAN
CS_STOP
BOOLEAN
PLTR_CRD
BOOLEAN
CSOR
BOOLEAN
CSUR
BOOLEAN
CR
BOOLEAN
CR_GUARD
BOOLEAN
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
Table 332:
Name
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
CS
BOOLEAN
CHSTOP
BOOLEAN
CRL
BOOLEAN
LCG
BOOLEAN
498
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.1.5
Table 333:
Settings
ZCPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
SchemeType
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
Permissive UR
Scheme type
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Table 334:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Unblock
Disabled
NoRestart
Restart
Disabled
DeltaI
0 - 200
%IB
10
DeltaV
0 - 100
%VB
Delta3I0
0 - 200
%IB
10
Delta3V0
0 - 100
%VB
tSecurity
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
Table 335:
Name
GlobalBaseSelector
12.1.6
Values (Range)
1-6
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
Operation principle
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received
499
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.
Blocking and unblocking schemes are primarily intended for communications with on/
off keying and frequency shift keying power line carrier, respectively, where internal
faults can affect carrier communications. Permissive schemes are applied with other
forms of more secure communications.
12.1.6.1
Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is
allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed,
when no signal is received from the remote IED.
The carrier send signal in blocking scheme is issued from the reverse directed distance
element. The reverse directed distance element is connected to CS_STOP.
The received signal, which is connected to the CR input, is used to block the release of
the forward looking overreaching zone for external faults and to clear internal faults
instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward overreaching zone to be accelerated is
connected to the input PLTR_CRD, see figure 226.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable
timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 226.
Upon detection of a forward fault the blocking of the carrier send signal is achieved by
activating the input BLKCS. The function can be totally blocked by activating the
input BLOCK, block of trip by activating the input BLKTR.
PLTR-CRD
CR
AND
0-tCoord
0
TRIP
en05000512_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000512 V1 EN
Figure 226:
12.1.6.2
500
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
The fault inception detection element detects instantaneous changes in any phase
currents or zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding
phase voltage or zero sequence voltage. The criterion for the fault inception detection
is if the change of any phase voltage and current exceeds the settings DeltaV and
DeltaI respectively, or if the change of zero sequence voltage and zero sequence
current exceeds the settings Delta3V0,Delta3I0 respectively. The schemeType is
selected as DeltaBlocking.
If the fault inception function has detected a system fault, a block signal CS will be
issued and sent to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different
criteria has to be fulfilled for sending the CS signal:
1.
2.
The breaker has to be in closed position, that is, the input signal CBOPEN is
deactivated.
A fault inception should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, the input signal BLKCS is not activated.
If it is later detected that it is an internal fault that made the function issue the CS
signal, the function will assert CHSTOP output and stop the channel send CS output.
Channels for communication in each direction must be available.
12.1.6.3
AND
0-tCoord
0
TRIP
en05000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000513 V1 EN
Figure 227:
The permissive underreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme.
501
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.1.6.4
12.1.6.5
Unblocking scheme
Unblocking schemes were designed to operate with power-line carrier (PLC)
communication using frequency shift keying between a trip and guard frequency.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD, must be present, when no
CR (trip permission) signal is received so that the channel can always be monitored.
The loss the CR_GUARD signal for a longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a
CR signal, see figure 228 and 229. This enables the unblock (permissive) scheme to
trip when the line fault interrupts the unblock signal transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal
is present again.
CR
NOT
OR
0-tSecurity
0
CRL
CR_GUARD
200 ms
0
AND
OR
150 ms
0
AND
LCG
en05000746_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000746 V1 EN
Figure 228:
Guard singal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock =
Restart
502
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
CR
OR
CR_GUARD
CRL
0-tSecurity
0
ANSI11000253-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000253 V1 EN
Figure 229:
Guard singal logic with unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock =
NoRestart
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Disabled
No restart
Restart
12.1.6.6
Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, also known as direct underreaching transfer trip, the send
signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.
503
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.1.7
Technical data
Table 336:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Scheme type
Disabled
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
(0100)% of VBase
5.0% of V
(0200)% of IBase
5.0% of I
(0100)% of VBase
10.0% of 3V0
(0200)% of IBase
10.0% of 3I0
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
Disabled
NoRestart
Restart
12.2
12.2.1
Identification
Function description
Current reversal and WEI logic for
distance protection 3-phase
12.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZCRWPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Functionality
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach or unblock protection or unblocking
schemes in application with parallel lines.
504
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous three-phase trip. The received signal is also echoed
back during 200 ms to accelerate the sending end.
12.2.3
Function block
ZCRWPSCH (85)
V3P*
IRVL
BLOCK
TRWEI
IFWD
ECHO
IREV
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
BLKZ
CBOPEN
CRL
ANSI09000007-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000007 V1 EN
Figure 230:
12.2.4
Signals
Table 337:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IFWD
BOOLEAN
IREV
BOOLEAN
WEIBLK1
BOOLEAN
WEIBLK2
BOOLEAN
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
CRL
BOOLEAN
505
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
Table 338:
Name
12.2.5
Table 339:
Name
Type
Description
IRVL
BOOLEAN
TRWEI
BOOLEAN
ECHO
BOOLEAN
Settings
ZCRWPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurrRev
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060
WEI
Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip
Disabled
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
PU27PP
10 - 90
%VB
70
PU27PN
10 - 90
%VB
70
Table 340:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
12.2.6
Operation principle
12.2.6.1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IREV to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone has
been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the trip signal is activated
due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 231.
506
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
IREV
0
0-tPickUpRev
0
10ms
0-tPickUpRev
0
AND
IFWD
0
0-tDelayRev
IRVL
ANSI05000122-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000122 V2 EN
Figure 231:
The preventing of sending the send signal CS and activating of the TRIP in the scheme
communication block ZCPSCH (85) is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal to
input BLOCK in the ZCPSCH (85) function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal
logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.
12.2.6.2
507
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
BLKZ
BLOCK
CRL
OR
ECHO - cont.
0 - tWEI
0
AND
0
50ms
200ms
0
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
ECHO
AND
0
200ms
ANSI10000260-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000260 V1 EN
Figure 232:
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious
signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the
system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.
An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of
the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI function
and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 233.
WEI = Echo&Trip
ECHOL - cont.
CBOPEN
STV_AG
STV_BG
STV_CG
AND
100 ms
0
OR
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
AND
0
15 ms
OR
TRWEI
ANSI09000012-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000012 V2 EN
Figure 233:
508
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.2.7
Technical data
Table 341:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip
(10-90)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<105%
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
12.3
12.3.1
Identification
Function description
Current reversal and WEI logic for
distance protection phase segregated
12.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZCWSPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Functionality
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlap on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous one- or three-phase trip. The received signal is also
echoed back during 200 ms to accelerate the sending end.
509
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.3.3
Function block
ZCWSPSCH (85)
V3P*
IRVL
BLOCK
TRWEI
IFWD
TRWEI_A
IREV
TRWEI_B
WEIBLK1
TRWEI_C
WEIBLK2
ECHO
BLKZ
CBOPEN
CRL
ANSI10000219-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000219 V1 EN
Figure 234:
12.3.4
Signals
Table 342:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IFWD
BOOLEAN
IREV
BOOLEAN
WEIBLK1
BOOLEAN
WEIBLK2
BOOLEAN
BLKZ
BOOLEAN
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
CRL
BOOLEAN
Table 343:
Name
Description
IRVL
BOOLEAN
TRWEI
BOOLEAN
TRWEI_A
BOOLEAN
510
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
Name
12.3.5
Table 344:
Name
Type
Description
TRWEI_B
BOOLEAN
TRWEI_C
BOOLEAN
ECHO
BOOLEAN
Settings
ZCWSPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurrRev
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060
WEI
Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip
Disabled
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.010
PU27PP
10 - 90
%VB
70
PU27PN
10 - 90
%VB
70
Table 345:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
12.3.6
Operation principle
12.3.6.1
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IREV to
recognize the fault on the parallel or any other outgoing line in any of the phases.
When the reverse zone has been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it
prevents sending of a communication signal and activation of trip signal for a
predefined time tDelayRev. This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before
the trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 235.
511
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
IREV
0
0-tPickUpRev
0
10ms
0-tPickUpRev
0
AND
IFWD
0
0-tDelayRev
IRVL
ANSI05000122-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000259 V2 EN
Figure 235:
The preventing of sending the send signal CS and activating of the TRIP is carried out
by connecting the IRVL signal to the inputs BLKTR and BLKCS in ZCPSCH (85).
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal
logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.
12.3.6.2
512
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
BLKZ
BLOCK
CRL
OR
ECHO - cont.
0 - tWEI
0
AND
0
50ms
200ms
0
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
ECHO
AND
0
200ms
ANSI10000260-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000260 V1 EN
Figure 236:
When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious
signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the
system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.
An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of
the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo & Trip, together with the WEI
function and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 233.
Information from the open circuit breaker can be connected to the input CBOPEN to
avoid WEI-trip if the circuit breaker already was opened.
WEI = Echo&Trip
ECHOL- cont.
CBOPEN
STV_AG
STV_BG
STV_CG
AND
100ms
0
OR
OR
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
AND
0
15ms
TRWEI
TRWEI_A
TRWEI_B
TRWEI_C
ZCWSPSCH_Tripping_pa
rt_of_the_WEI_logic_simp
lified_diagram=ANSI1000
0261=1=en=Original.vsd
ANSI10000261 V2 EN
Figure 237:
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.3.7
Technical data
Table 346:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Disablee
Echo
Echo & Trip
(10-90)% of VBase
0.5% of Vn
Reset ratio
<105%
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.00-6000.00) s
0.5% 10 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
12.4
12.4.1
Identification
Function description
Local acceleration logic
12.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
ZCLCPLAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is
available, local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL can be used. This logic enables fast
fault clearing and re-closing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully
replace a communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-ofload current (loss-of-load acceleration).
514
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.4.3
Function block
ZCLCPLAL
I3P*
BLOCK
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC
TRZE
TRLL
IEC09000005-1-en.vsd
IEC09000005 V1 EN
Figure 238:
12.4.4
Signals
Table 347:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
ARREADY
BOOLEAN
NDST
BOOLEAN
EXACC
BOOLEAN
BC
BOOLEAN
Breaker Close
LLACC
BOOLEAN
Table 348:
Name
Description
TRZE
BOOLEAN
TRLL
BOOLEAN
515
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.4.5
Table 349:
Name
Settings
ZCLCPLAL Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
LoadCurr
1 - 100
%IB
10
LossOfLoad
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
ZoneExtension
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
MinCurr
1 - 100
%IB
tLowCurr
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tLoadOn
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tLoadOff
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.300
Table 350:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
1
12.4.6
Operation principle
12.4.6.1
Zone extension
Default
1
Description
Selection of one of the Global Base Value
groups
The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason, configure
the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing
function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see
figure 239.
This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.
516
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
IEC05000157 V1 EN
Figure 239:
After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions.
In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted
autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will
prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.
On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous
zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-ofload acceleration).
12.4.6.2
Loss-of-Load acceleration
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used for
"acceleration" connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously"
during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been
above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone
will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of
the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at the opposite IED, see
figure 240. The current measurement is performed internally and the internal STILL
signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a
healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite IED. Note that
this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase
currents will be low when the opposite IED is tripped.
517
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
BLOCK
OR
BC
0-tLoadOn
0
STILL
TRLL
AND
LLACC
ANSI05000158-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000158 V1 EN
Figure 240:
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.
12.4.7
Technical data
Table 351:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
(1100)% of IBase
1.0% of In
Timers
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
12.5
12.5.1
Identification
Function description
Scheme communication logic for
residual overcurrent protection
12.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
ECPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Functionality
To achieve fast fault clearance of ground faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels.
518
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted
to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time of the
protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate
time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection enables
blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking schemes. The logic
can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal,
included in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent
protection ECRWPSCH (85) function.
12.5.3
Function block
ECPSCH (85)
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CS_STOP
PLTR_CRD
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CR_GUARD
TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG
ANSI09000009-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000009 V1 EN
Figure 241:
12.5.4
Signals
Table 352:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLKTR
BOOLEAN
BLKCS
BOOLEAN
CS_STOP
BOOLEAN
PLTR_CRD
BOOLEAN
CSOR
BOOLEAN
CSUR
BOOLEAN
CR
BOOLEAN
CR_GUARD
BOOLEAN
519
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
Table 353:
Name
12.5.5
Table 354:
Name
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
CS
BOOLEAN
CRL
BOOLEAN
LCG
BOOLEAN
Settings
ECPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
SchemeType
Disabled
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Permissive UR
tCoord
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
tSendMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.100
Table 355:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Unblock
Disabled
NoRestart
Restart
Disabled
tSecurity
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.035
12.5.6
Operation principle
The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) is
configured to give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the
ECPSCH (85) logic:
520
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.5.6.1
Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element
detects a ground fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element
operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the
opposite line end. The time delay tCoord, normally 3040 ms, depends on the remote
reverse unit operating and communication transmission times and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is
needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero
and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.
Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no
zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current
reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted
operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end infeed logic,
because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received
from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking
scheme than for a permissive scheme.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received signal)
the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
521
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
CS
AND
CS_STOP
BLOCK
AND
PLTR_CRD
CR
0-tCoord
0
0
25ms
TRIP
0
50ms
AND
CRL
ANSI05000448-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000448 V1 EN
Figure 242:
12.5.6.2
522
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal
CSUR.
In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal
CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.
BLOCK
CRL
AND
CR
PLTR_CRD
AND
AND
0-tCoord
0
TRIP
0
25ms
0
50ms
AND
BLKCS
AND
Overreach
CSOR
OR
CS
AND
CSUR
OR
50ms
0
en05000280_3_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000280 V1 EN
12.5.6.3
Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by
using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable,
power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal
for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 243.
This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
523
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal
is present again.
CR
NOT
CRL
OR
0-tSecurity
0
CR_GUARD
200 ms
0
AND
OR
150 ms
0
AND
LCG
en05000746_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000746 V1 EN
Figure 243:
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Disabled:
No restart:
Restart
12.5.7
Technical data
Table 356:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Scheme type
Disabled
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Communication scheme
coordination time
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
524
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.6
12.6.1
Identification
Function description
Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for residual overcurrent protection
12.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
ECRWPSCH
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85
Functionality
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH (85) is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH (85).
To achieve fast fault clearing for all ground faults on the line, the directional groundfault protection function can be supported with logic that uses communication channels.
The 650 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme communication
logic.
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching
permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal.
This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line.
This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses.
To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking
logic) can be used.
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can basically
operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault. The detection
requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this IED. The fault
current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/or zero-sequence
source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed
(WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is limited to 200 ms to avoid
channel lockup.
525
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.6.3
Function block
ECRWPSCH (85)
V3P*
IRVL
BLOCK
TRWEI
IFWD
ECHO
IREV
CR
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
LOVBZ
CBOPEN
CRL
ANSI09000006-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000006 V1 EN
Figure 244:
12.6.4
Signals
Table 357:
Name
Default
Description
V3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IFWD
BOOLEAN
IREV
BOOLEAN
WEIBLK1
BOOLEAN
WEIBLK2
BOOLEAN
LOVBZ
BOOLEAN
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
CRL
BOOLEAN
Table 358:
Name
Description
IRVL
BOOLEAN
TRWEI
BOOLEAN
ECHO
BOOLEAN
CR
BOOLEAN
526
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
12.6.5
Table 359:
Name
Settings
ECRWPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CurrRev
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tPickUpRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.020
tDelayRev
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.060
WEI
Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip
Disabled
tPickUpWEI
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
3V0PU
5 - 70
%VB
25
Table 360:
Name
GlobalBaseSel
Unit
-
Step
Default
Description
12.6.6
Operation principle
12.6.6.1
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current reversal
and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking
overreaching scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional ground-fault protection
module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and
prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Figure 245 and figure 246 show the logic circuits.
12.6.6.2
527
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
direction element is activated during the tPickUpRev time, the output signal IRVL is
activated, see figure 245. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without
tripping. Output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive
overreaching scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IREV is deactivated and
IFWD is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelayRev time, see figure 245.
This ensures the reset of the received CR signal.
BLOCK
IREV
0
tPickUpRev
0
10ms
tPickUpRev
0
AND
0
tDelayRev
IRVL
IFWD
Drawing2.vsd
ANSI09000031 V1 EN
Figure 245:
12.6.6.3
200 ms
0
CRL
&
0
50 ms
200 ms
0
AND
ECHO
WEI = Echo
ANSI09000032-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000032 V1 EN
Figure 246:
528
Technical Manual
Section 12
Scheme communication
With the Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it
activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and
the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3V0PU.
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
ground-fault function that is in operation.
BLOCK
WEIBLK1
0
200 ms
CRL
AND
0
50 ms
200 ms
0
ECHO
AND
TRWEI
AND
WEI = Echo&Trip
3V0PU
AND
CBOPEN
ANSI09000020-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000020 V1 EN
Figure 247:
The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200
ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be
sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weakend echo is selected for both line ends.
12.6.7
Technical data
Table 361:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip
(5-70)% of VBase
1.0% of Vn
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00060.000) s
0.5% 25 ms
529
Technical Manual
530
Section 13
Logic
Section 13
Logic
13.1
13.1.1
Identification
Function description
Tripping logic common 3-phase output
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
SMPPTRC
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
13.1.2
Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in
the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a threephase trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct cooperation with autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for breaker lock-out.
13.1.3
Function block
SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK
TRIP
TRINP_3P
CLLKOUT
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
ANSI09000284-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000284 V1 EN
Figure 248:
531
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.1.4
Signals
Table 362:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
TRINP_3P
BOOLEAN
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 364:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 363:
13.1.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
CLLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
tTripMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
Table 365:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TripLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AutoLock
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
13.1.6
Operation principle
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC (94) is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to
secure the breaker opening.
For three-pole tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC (94) has a single
input (TRINP_3P) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs
532
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or
more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring
this signal.
ANSI05000789 V2 EN
Figure 249:
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC (94) function block is used for each
breaker.
Lockout can be activated either by activating the input (SETLKOUT) or automatically
from the trip input by setting AutoLock to Enabled. A Lockout condition will be
indicated by activation of the output (CLLKOUT). If lockout has been activated it can
be reset by activating the input (RSTLKOUT) or via the HMI.
If TripLockout is set to Enabled an active Lockout will latch the three-phase trip
output. In this way if both AutoLock and TripLockout are set to Enabled the trip will
always be three-phase and sealed in.
13.1.7
Technical data
Table 366:
Function
Accuracy
Trip action
3-ph
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
533
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.2
13.2.1
Identification
Function description
Tripping logic phase
segregated output
SPTPTRC
I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN
13.2.2
Functionality
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in
the tripping of the fault. It provides the settable pulse prolongation to ensure an one- or
three-phase trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for
correct cooperation with autoreclosing and communication logic functions.
The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and a settable latch
for breaker lock-out.
13.2.3
Function block
SPTPTRC (94)
BLOCK
TRIP
TRINP_3P
TR_A
TRINP_A
TR_B
TRINP_B
TR_C
TRINP_C
TR1P
PS_A
TR3P
PS_B
CLLKOUT
PS_C
1PTRZ
1PTRGF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
ANSI10000220-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000220 V1 EN
Figure 250:
534
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.2.4
Signals
Table 367:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
TRINP_3P
BOOLEAN
TRINP_A
BOOLEAN
Trip phase A
TRINP_B
BOOLEAN
Trip phase B
TRINP_C
BOOLEAN
Trip phase C
PS_A
BOOLEAN
PS_B
BOOLEAN
PS_C
BOOLEAN
1PTRZ
BOOLEAN
1PTRGF
BOOLEAN
P3PTR
BOOLEAN
SETLKOUT
BOOLEAN
RSTLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 369:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 368:
13.2.5
Default
Type
Description
TRIP
BOOLEAN
TR_A
BOOLEAN
TR_B
BOOLEAN
TR_C
BOOLEAN
TR1P
BOOLEAN
Tripping single-pole
TR3P
BOOLEAN
Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
SPTPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
Program
3 phase
1p/3p
3 phase
tTripMin
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
535
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Table 370:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TripLockout
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
AutoLock
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
13.2.6
Operation principle
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic phase segregated output
SPTPTRC (94) function is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough
to secure the breaker opening.
For three-pole tripping, SPTPTRC (94) function has a single input (TRIN) through
which all trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from
external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It
has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal. See figure
249.
BLOCK
tTripMin
TRIN
AND
OR
TRIP
Figure 251:
Tripping logic SPTPTRC (94) function for single- and three-pole tripping has
additional phase segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection.
The latter inputs enable single- and three-pole tripping for those functions which do not
have their own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip
output and not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated
trip inputs of the expanded SPTPTRC (94) function. Examples of such protection
functions are the residual overcurrent protections. The SPTPTRC (94) function has two
inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (for example, carrier-aided
tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for ground fault
tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection).
536
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Additional logic secures a three-pole final trip command for these protection functions
in the absence of the required phase selection signals.
The SPTPTRC (94) function is equipped with logic, which secures correct operation
for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input
P3PTR is also provided which disables single pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be
three-pole. See figure 252.
TRINP_3P
TRINP_A
PS_A
TR_A
OR
AND
TRINP_B
TR_B
PS_B
OR
AND
TRINP_C
PS_C
TR_C
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
- loop
-loop
OR
AND
1PTRGF
AND
AND
AND
OR
1PTRZ
50ms
2
ANSI10000267-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000267 V1 EN
Figure 252:
537
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
150 ms
ATRIP
AND
150 ms
AND
150 ms
AND
OR
AND
OR
INTL_BTRIP
OR
0
2000 ms
CTRIP
INTL_ATRIP
OR
0
2000 ms
BTRIP
OR
OR
AND
OR
INTL_CTRIP
OR
0
2000 ms
BLOCK
OR
AND
OR
OR
P3PTR
AND
OR
-loop
ANSI10000268-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000268 V2 EN
Figure 253:
The expanded SPTPTRC (94) function has three trip outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the
IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single pole or three pole trip.
These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function.
538
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
ATRIP
AND
BTRIP
AND
CTRIP
AND
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
TRIP
OR
RSTTRIP
AND
OR
TR3P
AND
-loop
AND
TR1P
10 ms
0
ANSI10000269-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000269 V2 EN
Figure 254:
13.2.7
Technical data
Table 371:
Function
Range or value
Trip action
3-Ph, 1/3-Ph
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 10 ms
13.3
13.3.1
Identification
Function description
Trip matrix logic
13.3.2
Accuracy
IEC 61850
identification
TMAGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The 12 Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function each with 32 inputs are used to route trip
signals and other logical output signals to the tripping logics SMPPTRC and
SPTPTRC or to different output contacts on the IED.
539
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
TMAGGIO 3 output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the
signals to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for
settable pulse or steady output.
13.3.3
Function block
TMAGGIO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
IEC09000105 V1 EN
Figure 255:
13.3.4
Signals
Table 372:
Name
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary input 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary input 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary input 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary input 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary input 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary input 6
540
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary input 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary input 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary input 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary input 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary input 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary input 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary input 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary input 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary input 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary input 16
INPUT17
BOOLEAN
Binary input 17
INPUT18
BOOLEAN
Binary input 18
INPUT19
BOOLEAN
Binary input 19
INPUT20
BOOLEAN
Binary input 20
INPUT21
BOOLEAN
Binary input 21
INPUT22
BOOLEAN
Binary input 22
INPUT23
BOOLEAN
Binary input 23
INPUT24
BOOLEAN
Binary input 24
INPUT25
BOOLEAN
Binary input 25
INPUT26
BOOLEAN
Binary input 26
INPUT27
BOOLEAN
Binary input 27
INPUT28
BOOLEAN
Binary input 28
INPUT29
BOOLEAN
Binary input 29
INPUT30
BOOLEAN
Binary input 30
INPUT31
BOOLEAN
Binary input 31
INPUT32
BOOLEAN
Binary input 32
Table 373:
Name
Description
OUTPUT1
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT2
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT3
BOOLEAN
541
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.3.5
Table 374:
Name
Settings
TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
PulseTime
0.050 - 60.000
0.001
0.150
OnDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
OffDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
ModeOutput1
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
ModeOutput2
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
ModeOutput3
Steady
Pulsed
Steady
13.3.6
Operation principle
The trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output
signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide
grouping of connected input signals to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1.
2.
3.
when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1
the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1.
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1.
when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1
the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1.
542
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput1=Pulsed
Input 1
OR
AND
On Delay Time 1
Input 16
OR
Output 1
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput2=Pulsed
Input 17
AND
On Delay Time 2
0
OR
Input 32
AND
OR
Output 2
PulseTime
AND
ModeOutput3=Pulsed
OR
On Delay Time 3
AND
OR
Output 3
ANSI11000290-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000290 V1 EN
Figure 256:
Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.
13.4
13.4.1
13.4.1.1
Functionality
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.
OR function block. Each block has 6 inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
543
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.
GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.
XOR function block. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.
TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay and must be Enabled for the input
signal to activate the output with the appropriate time delay.
AND function block. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted
SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. The SET input has priority if both SET and
RESET inputs are operated simultaneously.
RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. The RESET input has priority if both SET and
RESET are operated simultaneously.
ORQT OR function block that also propagates timestamp and quality of input
signals. Each block has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
544
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal and propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.
PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, for example, for pulse
extensions or limiting of operation of outputs. The function also propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.
XORQT XOR function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted.
TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay. The function also propagates
timestamp and quality of input signal.
ANDQT AND function block. The function also propagates timestamp and
quality of input signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs where one is
inverted.
SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the
state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates timestamp
and quality of input signal.
RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from
two inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power interruption should return to the
state before the interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates timestamp
and quality of input signal.
545
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.4.1.2
INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group signal input. Value part
of single position input is copied to SI_OUT output. Time part of single position
input is copied to TIME output. Quality bits in common part and indication part of
inputs signal is copied to the corresponding quality output.
OR function block
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
OR Function block
IEC 60617
identification
OR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Function block
OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000288-1-en.vsd
IEC09000288 V1 EN
Figure 257:
OR function block
Signals
Table 375:
Name
OR Input signals
Type
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Input signal 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Input signal 6
546
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Table 376:
OR Output signals
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
13.4.1.3
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
INVERTER
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
INVERTER
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000287-1-en.vsd
IEC09000287 V1 EN
Figure 258:
Signals
Table 377:
Name
INPUT
Table 378:
Name
OUT
Default
0
Description
Input signal
Description
Output signal
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
547
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.4.1.4
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
PULSETIMER
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The pulse function can be used, for example for pulse extensions or limiting of
operation of outputs. The PULSETIMER has a settable length.
Function block
PULSETIMER
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000291-1-en.vsd
IEC09000291 V1 EN
Figure 259:
Signals
Table 379:
Name
Type
INPUT
BOOLEAN
Table 380:
Default
0
Description
Input signal
Name
Type
OUT
Description
BOOLEAN
Output signal
Settings
Table 381:
Name
t
Unit
s
Step
0.001
Default
0.010
Description
Pulse time length
548
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.4.1.5
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
GATE
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The GATE function block is used for controlling if a signal should pass from the input
to the output or not, depending on setting.
Function block
GATE
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000295-1-en.vsd
IEC09000295 V1 EN
Figure 260:
Signals
Table 382:
Name
Type
INPUT
Default
BOOLEAN
Table 383:
Description
Input signal
Name
Type
OUT
Description
BOOLEAN
Output signal
Settings
Table 384:
Name
Operation
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
549
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.4.1.6
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
XOR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Function block
XOR
INPUT1
INPUT2
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000292-1-en.vsd
IEC09000292 V1 EN
Figure 261:
Signals
Table 385:
Name
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
Table 386:
Name
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
550
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.4.1.7
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
LOOPDELAY
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.
Function block
LOOPDELAY
INPUT
OUT
IEC09000296-1-en.vsd
IEC09000296 V1 EN
Figure 262:
Signals
Table 387:
Name
Type
INPUT
Table 388:
BOOLEAN
Default
0
Description
Input signal
Name
OUT
Type
Description
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
13.4.1.8
IEC 61850
identification
TIMERSET
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
551
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Functionality
The function block TIMERSET has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to
the input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (t).
Input
tdelay
On
Off
tdelay
en08000289-2-en.vsd
IEC08000289 V1 EN
Figure 263:
Function block
TIMERSET
INPUT
ON
OFF
IEC09000290-1-en.vsd
IEC09000290 V1 EN
Figure 264:
Signals
Table 389:
Name
INPUT
Table 390:
Name
Default
0
Description
Input signal
Description
ON
BOOLEAN
OFF
BOOLEAN
552
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Settings
Table 391:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
0.000 - 90000.000
0.001
0.000
13.4.1.9
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
AND
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs.
Default value on all four inputs are logical 1 which makes it possible for the user to
just use the required number of inputs and leave the rest un-connected. The output
OUT has a default value 0 initially, which suppresses one cycle pulse if the function
has been put in the wrong execution order.
Function block
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000289-1-en.vsd
IEC09000289 V1 EN
Figure 265:
Signals
Table 392:
Name
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Input signal 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Input signal 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Input signal 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Input signal 4
553
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Table 393:
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
13.4.1.10
IEC 61850
identification
SRMEMORY
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Set-Reset function SRMEMORY is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset
an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY function block has two
outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a
power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be reset. For a SetReset flip-flop, SET input has higher priority over RESET input.
Table 394:
SET
OUT
NOUT
Function block
SRMEMORY
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000293-1-en.vsd
IEC09000293 V1 EN
Figure 266:
554
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Signals
Table 395:
Name
Type
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 396:
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
Table 397:
Name
Memory
13.4.1.11
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
On
Description
Operating mode of the memory function
IEC 61850
identification
RSMEMORY
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be
reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
555
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Table 398:
RESET
SET
OUT
NOUT
Last
value
Inverted last
value
Function block
RSMEMORY
SET
RESET
OUT
NOUT
IEC09000294-1-en.vsd
IEC09000294 V1 EN
Figure 267:
Signals
Table 399:
Name
Type
Default
Description
SET
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 400:
Name
Type
Description
OUT
BOOLEAN
Output signal
NOUT
BOOLEAN
Settings
Table 401:
Name
Memory
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Enabled
Description
Operating mode of the memory function
556
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.4.2
Technical data
Table 402:
Logic block
Range or value
20 ms
Accuracy
100 ms
AND
60
60
160
OR
60
60
160
XOR
10
10
20
INVERTER
30
30
80
SRMEMORY
10
10
20
RSMEMORY
10
10
20
GATE
10
10
20
PULSETIMER
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms for
20 ms cycle time
TIMERSET
10
10
20
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms for
20 ms cycle time
LOOPDELAY
10
10
20
Table 403:
Logic block
Range or value
Accuracy
ANDQT
20
100
ORQT
20
100
XORQT
10
30
INVERTERQT
20
100
RSMEMORYQT
10
30
SRMEMORYQT
15
10
PULSETIMERQT
10
30
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms for 20 ms
cycle time
TIMERSETQT
10
30
(0.000
90000.000) s
0.5% 25 ms for 20 ms
cycle time
INVALIDQT
INDCOMBSPQT
10
10
INDEXTSPQT
10
10
557
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.5
13.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Fixed signals
13.5.2
IEC 60617
identification
FXDSIGN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Fixed signals function FXDSIGN generates nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be
used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer,
floating point, string types of signals are available.
13.5.3
Function block
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC09000037.vsd
IEC09000037 V1 EN
Figure 268:
13.5.4
Signals
Table 404:
Name
Description
OFF
BOOLEAN
ON
BOOLEAN
INTZERO
INTEGER
INTONE
INTEGER
INTALONE
INTEGER
REALZERO
REAL
558
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Name
13.5.5
Type
Description
STRNULL
STRING
ZEROSMPL
GROUP SIGNAL
GRP_OFF
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
13.5.6
Operation principle
There are nine outputs from FXDSIGN function block:
13.6
13.6.1
Identification
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion
13.6.2
IEC 61850
identification
B16I
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary
(logical) signals into an integer.
559
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.6.3
Function block
B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC09000035-1-en.vsd
IEC09000035 V1 EN
Figure 269:
13.6.4
Signals
Table 405:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
560
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Table 406:
Name
Type
OUT
13.6.5
Description
INTEGER
Output value
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
13.6.6
Monitored data
Table 407:
Name
OUT
13.6.7
Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Description
Output value
Operation principle
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK input will freeze the output at the
last value.
13.7
13.7.1
Identification
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with
logic node representation
13.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
B16IFCVI
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function B16IFCVI is
used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The block input
will freeze the output at the last value.
561
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.7.3
Function block
B16IFCVI
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
OUT
IEC09000624-1-en.vsd
IEC09000624 V1 EN
Figure 270:
13.7.4
Signals
Table 408:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16
562
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Table 409:
Name
Type
OUT
13.7.5
Description
INTEGER
Output value
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
13.7.6
Monitored data
Table 410:
Name
OUT
13.7.7
Type
INTEGER
Values (Range)
-
Unit
Description
Output value
Operation principle
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI)
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. The BLOCK
input will freeze the output at the last value.
13.8
13.8.1
Identification
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion
13.8.2
IEC 61850
identification
IB16A
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function IB16A is used to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals.
563
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.8.3
Function block
IB16A
BLOCK
INP
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC09000036-1-en.vsd
IEC09000036 V1 EN
Figure 271:
13.8.4
Signals
Table 411:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INP
INTEGER
INP
Table 412:
Name
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
564
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Name
13.8.5
Type
Description
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
13.8.6
Operation principle
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16A) is used to transform an integer into
a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16A function is designed for receiving the integer
input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
13.9
13.9.1
Identification
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with
logic node representation
13.9.2
IEC 61850
identification
IB16FCVB
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function IB16FCVB is
used to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.
IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 when the operator
position input PSTO is in position remote. The block input will freeze the output at the
last value.
565
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.9.3
Function block
IB16FCVB
BLOCK
PSTO
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC09000399-1-en.vsd
IEC09000399 V1 EN
Figure 272:
13.9.4
Signals
Table 413:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
PSTO
INTEGER
Table 414:
Name
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Output 1
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Output 2
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Output 3
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Output 4
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Output 5
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Output 6
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Output 7
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Output 8
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Output 9
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Output 10
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Output 11
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Output 12
Section 13
Logic
Name
13.9.5
Type
Description
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Output 13
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Output 14
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Output 15
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Output 16
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
13.9.6
Operation principle
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is
used to transform an integer into a set of 16 binary (logical) signals. IB16FCVB
function can receive an integer from a station computer for example, over IEC
61850. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number
can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local, then no
change is applied to the outputs.
13.10
13.10.1
Identification
Function Description
IEC 61850
identification
13.10.2
TEIGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
Functionality
Elapsed Time Integrator (TEIGGIO) function is a function that accumulates the
elapsed time when a given binary signal has been high.
The main features of TEIGGIO are
567
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.10.3
Function block
TEIGGIO
BLOCK
IN
RESET
WARNING
ALARM
OVERFLOW
ACCTIME
IEC13000005-1-en.vsd
IEC13000005 V1 EN
Figure 273:
13.10.4
Signals
Table 415:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
IN
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Table 416:
Name
13.10.5
Description
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
ACCTIME
REAL
Settings
568
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
Table 417:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
0-1
Disable/Enable Operation
tWarning
1.00 - 999999.99
0.01
600.00
tAlarm
1.00 - 999999.99
0.01
1200.00
13.10.6
Operation principle
The elapsed time integrator (TEIGGIO) provides
time integration, accumulating the elapsed time when a given binary signal has
been high.
blocking and reset.
supervision of limit transgression and overflow.
retaining of the integrated value if any warning, alarm or overflow occurs.
Figure 274 describes the simplified logic of the function where the block Time
Integration covers the logics for the first two items listed above while the block
Transgression Supervision Plus Retain contains the logics for the last two.
Loop Delay
tOverflow
tWarning
OVERFLOW
tAlarm
Transgression Supervision
Plus Retain
WARNING
ALARM
BLOCK
RESET
IN
ACCTIME
Time Integration
Loop Delay
IEC12000195-2-en.vsd
IEC12000195 V2 EN
Figure 274:
569
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
RESET: Reset the integration value. Consequently all other outputs are also reset
The ACCTIME output represents the integrated time in seconds while tOverflow,
tAlarm and tWarning are the time limit parameters in seconds.
tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits. They are also independent, that is, there
is no check if tAlarm > tWarning.
tAlarm and tWarning are possible to be defined with a resolution of 10 ms, depending
on the level of the defined values for the parameters.
tOverflow is for the overflow supervision with a default value tOverflow = 999 999.9
seconds. The outputs freeze if an overflow occurs.
13.10.6.1
Operation Accuracy
The accuracy of TEIGGIO depends on essentially three factors
In principle, a shorter task cycle time, longer integrated time length or more pulses may
lead to reduced accuracy.
570
Technical Manual
Section 13
Logic
13.10.6.2
Memory storage
The value of the integrated elapsed time is retained in a non-volatile memory, only if
any warning, alarm or/and overflow occurs. Consequently there is a risk of data loss in
the integrated time at a power failure.
13.10.7
Technical data
Table 418:
Function
Elapsed time integration
Range or value
Accuracy
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.05% or 0.01 s
20
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.05% or 0.04 s
100
0 ~ 999999.9 s
0.05% or 0.2 s
571
Technical Manual
572
Section 14
Monitoring
Section 14
Monitoring
14.1
Measurements
14.1.1
Functionality
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers
(CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction
orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs. There are no interconnections regarding any settings or
parameters, neither between functions nor between signals within each function.
Zero clampings are handled by ZeroDb for each signal separately for each of the
functions. For example, the zero clamping of U12 is handled by VLZeroDB in
VMMXU, zero clamping of I1 is handled by ILZeroDb in CMMXU.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:
573
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The output values are displayed in the local HMI under Main menu/Tests/Function
status/Monitoring/CVMMXN/Outputs
The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical
quantities:
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:
14.1.2
Measurements CVMMXN
14.1.2.1
Identification
Function description
Measurements
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CVMMXN
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
P, Q, S, I, U, f
SYMBOL-RR V1 EN
574
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.1.2.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CVMMXN
I3P*
V3P*
S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
V
V_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
ANSI10000051-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000051 V1 EN
Figure 275:
14.1.2.3
Signals
Table 419:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
U3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
Table 420:
Name
Description
REAL
S_RANGE
INTEGER
P_INST
REAL
Active power
REAL
P_RANGE
INTEGER
Q_INST
REAL
Reactive power
REAL
Q_RANGE
INTEGER
575
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
14.1.2.4
Table 421:
Name
Type
Description
PF
REAL
PF_RANGE
INTEGER
ILAG
BOOLEAN
ILEAD
BOOLEAN
REAL
U_RANGE
INTEGER
REAL
I_RANGE
INTEGER
REAL
F_RANGE
INTEGER
Settings
CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
Mode
A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C
A, B, C
PowAmpFact
0.000 - 6.000
0.001
1.000
PowAngComp
-180.0 - 180.0
Deg
0.1
0.0
0.00 - 1.00
0.01
0.00
SLowLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
80.0
SLowLowLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
60.0
SMin
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
50.0
SMax
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
SRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
576
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
PMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
PRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
QMin
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-200.0
QMax
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
200.0
QRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
PFMin
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
Minimum value
PFMax
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
Maximum value
PFRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
UMin
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
50.0
UMax
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
200.0
URepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
IMin
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
50.0
IMax
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
200.0
IRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
FrMin
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
0.000
Minimum value
FrMax
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
70.000
Maximum value
FrRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Cyclic
Reporting type
Table 422:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
SZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
SHiHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
SHiLim
0.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
PHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
SLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
577
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
PZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
PHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
PLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
PLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
PLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
QDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
QZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
QHiHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
150.0
QHiLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
120.0
QLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-120.0
QLowLowLim
-2000.0 - 2000.0
%SB
0.1
-150.0
QLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
UGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%VB
PFDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
PFZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
IGenZeroDb
1 - 100
%IB
PFHiHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
1.000
PFHiLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
0.800
PFLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-0.800
PFLowLowLim
-1.000 - 1.000
0.001
-1.000
PFLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
UDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
UZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
UHiHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
150.0
UHiLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
120.0
ULowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
80.0
ULowLowLim
0.0 - 200.0
%VB
0.1
60.0
ULimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
IDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
IZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
IHiHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
150.0
IHiLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
120.0
ILowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
80.0
ILowLowLim
0.0 - 500.0
%IB
0.1
60.0
ILimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
FrDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
FrZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
FrHiHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
65.000
FrHiLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
63.000
FrLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
47.000
FrLowLowLim
0.000 - 100.000
Hz
0.001
45.000
FrLimHyst
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
UAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
UAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAmpComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
14.1.2.5
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Monitored data
Table 423:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
REAL
MVA
REAL
MW
REAL
MVAr
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
PF
REAL
REAL
kV
REAL
REAL
Hz
14.1.3
14.1.3.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CMMXU
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN
14.1.3.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CMMXU
I3P*
I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL
ANSI08000225-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000225 V1 EN
Figure 276:
14.1.3.3
Signals
Table 424:
Name
I3P
Default
-
Description
Three phase group signal for current inputs
580
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 425:
Name
14.1.3.4
Table 426:
Name
Type
Description
I_A
REAL
IA Amplitude
IA_RANGE
INTEGER
IA_ANGL
REAL
IA Angle
I_B
REAL
IB Amplitude
IB_RANGE
INTEGER
IB_ANGL
REAL
IB Angle
I_C
REAL
IC Amplitude
IC_RANGE
INTEGER
IC_ANGL
REAL
IC Angle
Settings
CMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
ILDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
ILMax
0 - 500000
1300
Maximum value
ILRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
ILAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 427:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ILZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
ILHiHiLim
0 - 500000
1200
ILHiLim
0 - 500000
1100
ILLowLim
0 - 500000
ILLowLowLim
0 - 500000
ILMin
0 - 500000
Minimum value
ILLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IMagComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IMagComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
0.001
0.000
IAngComp5
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp30
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
IAngComp100
-10.000 - 10.000
Deg
0.001
0.000
14.1.3.5
Monitored data
Table 428:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
I_A
REAL
IA Amplitude
IA_ANGL
REAL
deg
IA Angle
I_B
REAL
IB Amplitude
IB_ANGL
REAL
deg
IB Angle
I_C
REAL
IC Amplitude
IC_ANGL
REAL
deg
IC Angle
14.1.4
14.1.4.1
Identification
Function description
Phase-phase voltage measurement
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
VMMXU
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
14.1.4.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
582
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
VMMXU
V3P*
V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL
ANSI08000223-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000223 V1 EN
Figure 277:
14.1.4.3
Signals
Table 429:
Name
V3P
Table 430:
Name
Default
-
Description
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
Description
V_AB
REAL
V_AB Amplitude
VAB_RANG
INTEGER
VAB_ANGL
REAL
VAB Angle
V_BC
REAL
V_BC Amplitude
VBC_RANG
INTEGER
VBC_ANGL
REAL
VBC Angle
V_CA
REAL
V_CA Amplitude
VCA_RANG
INTEGER
VCA_ANGL
REAL
VCA Angle
583
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.1.4.4
Table 431:
Name
Settings
VMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
VLDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VLMax
0 - 4000000
170000
Maximum value
VLRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
VLAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 432:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VLZeroDB
0 - 100000
m%
500
VLHiHilLim
0 - 4000000
160000
VLHiLim
0 - 4000000
150000
VLLowLim
0 - 4000000
125000
VLowLowLim
0 - 4000000
115000
VLMin
0 - 4000000
Minimum value
VLLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
14.1.4.5
Monitored data
Table 433:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_AB
REAL
kV
V_AB Amplitude
VAB_ANGL
REAL
deg
VAB Angle
V_BC
REAL
kV
V_BC Amplitude
VBC_ANGL
REAL
deg
VBC Angle
V_CA
REAL
kV
V_CA Amplitude
VCA_ANGL
REAL
deg
VCA Angle
584
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.1.5
14.1.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CMSQI
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN
14.1.5.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
CMSQI
I3P*
3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC08000221-2-en.vsd
IEC08000221 V2 EN
Figure 278:
14.1.5.3
Signals
Table 434:
Name
I3P
Table 435:
Name
Default
-
Description
Three phase group signal for current inputs
Description
3I0
REAL
3I0 Amplitude
3I0RANG
INTEGER
3I0ANGL
REAL
3I0 Angle
I1
REAL
I1 Amplitude
585
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
14.1.5.4
Table 436:
Name
Type
Description
I1RANG
INTEGER
I1Amplitude range
I1ANGL
REAL
I1 Angle
I2
REAL
I2 Amplitude
I2RANG
INTEGER
I2 Magnitude range
I2ANGL
REAL
I2Angle
Settings
CMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
3I0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
3I0Min
0 - 500000
Minimum value
3I0Max
0 - 500000
3300
Maximum value
3I0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
3I0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
3I0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I1Min
0 - 500000
Minimum value
I1Max
0 - 500000
1300
Maximum value
I1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
I1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
I2Min
0 - 500000
Minimum value
I2Max
0 - 500000
1300
Maximum value
I2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
I2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
I2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
586
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 437:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3I0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
3I0HiHiLim
0 - 500000
3600
3I0HiLim
0 - 500000
3300
3I0LowLim
0 - 500000
3I0LowLowLim
0 - 500000
I1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
I1HiHiLim
0 - 500000
1200
I1HiLim
0 - 500000
1100
I1LowLim
0 - 500000
I1LowLowLim
0 - 500000
I1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
I2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
I2HiHiLim
0 - 500000
1200
I2HiLim
0 - 500000
1100
I2LowLim
0 - 500000
I2LowLowLim
0 - 500000
14.1.5.5
Monitored data
Table 438:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3I0
REAL
3I0 Amplitude
3I0ANGL
REAL
deg
3I0 Angle
I1
REAL
I1 Amplitude
I1ANGL
REAL
deg
I1 Angle
I2
REAL
I2 Amplitude
I2ANGL
REAL
deg
I2Angle
587
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.1.6
14.1.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
VMSQI
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
U1, U2, U0
SYMBOL-TT V1 EN
14.1.6.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
VMSQI
V3P*
3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL
ANSI08000224-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000224 V1 EN
Figure 279:
14.1.6.3
Signals
Table 439:
Name
V3P
Table 440:
Name
Default
-
Description
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
Description
3V0
REAL
3U0 Amplitude
3V0RANG
INTEGER
3V0ANGL
REAL
3U0 Angle
V1
REAL
U1 Amplitude
588
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
14.1.6.4
Table 441:
Name
Type
Description
V1RANG
INTEGER
V1 Magnitude range
V1ANGL
REAL
U1 Angle
V2
REAL
U2 Amplitude
V2RANG
INTEGER
V2 Magnitude range
V2ANGL
REAL
U2 Angle
Settings
VMSQI Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
3V0DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
3V0Min
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
3V0Max
0 - 2000000
318000
Maximum value
3V0RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
3V0LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
3V0AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V1DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V1Min
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
V1Max
0 - 2000000
106000
Maximum value
V1RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
V1AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V2DbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
V2Min
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
V2Max
0 - 2000000
106000
Maximum value
V2RepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
V2LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
V2AngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 442:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
3V0ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
3V0HiHiLim
0 - 2000000
288000
3V0HiLim
0 - 2000000
258000
3V0LowLim
0 - 2000000
213000
3V0LowLowLim
0 - 2000000
198000
V1ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
V1HiHiLim
0 - 2000000
96000
V1HiLim
0 - 2000000
86000
V1LowLim
0 - 2000000
71000
V1LowLowLim
0 - 2000000
66000
V1LimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
V2ZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
V2HiHiLim
0 - 2000000
96000
V2HiLim
0 - 2000000
86000
V2LowLim
0 - 2000000
71000
V2LowLowLim
0 - 2000000
66000
14.1.6.5
Monitored data
Table 443:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
3V0
REAL
kV
3U0 Amplitude
3V0ANGL
REAL
deg
3U0 Angle
V1
REAL
kV
U1 Amplitude
V1ANGL
REAL
deg
U1 Angle
V2
REAL
kV
U2 Amplitude
V2ANGL
REAL
deg
U2 Angle
590
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.1.7
14.1.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
VNMMXU
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN
14.1.7.2
Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
VNMMXU
V3P*
V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL
ANSI08000226-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000226 V1 EN
Figure 280:
14.1.7.3
Signals
Table 444:
Name
V3P
Table 445:
Name
Default
-
Description
Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
Description
V_A
REAL
VA_RANGE
INTEGER
VA_ANGL
REAL
V_B
REAL
591
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
14.1.7.4
Table 446:
Name
Type
Description
VB_RANGE
INTEGER
VB_ANGL
REAL
V_C
REAL
VC_RANGE
INTEGER
VC_ANGL
REAL
Settings
VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disbled/Enabled operation
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
VDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
VMax
0 - 2000000
106000
Maximum value
VRepTyp
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
VLimHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
VAngDbRepInt
1 - 300
Type
10
Table 447:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
VZeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
VHiHiLim
0 - 2000000
96000
VHiLim
0 - 2000000
86000
VLowLim
0 - 2000000
71000
VLowLowLim
0 - 2000000
66000
VMin
0 - 2000000
Minimum value
592
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.1.7.5
Monitored data
Table 448:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
V_A
REAL
kV
VA_ANGL
REAL
deg
V_B
REAL
kV
VB_ANGL
REAL
deg
V_C
REAL
kV
VC_ANGL
REAL
deg
VC Angle, magnitude of
reported value
14.1.8
Operation principle
14.1.8.1
Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED
and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference. The PhaseAngleRef is set in
local HMI under: Configuration/Analog modules/Reference channel service values.
Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB,
VBC, VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision
593
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXN.
Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block
by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 281. The monitoring has two
different modes of operating:
Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or Highhigh limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1
Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN
Figure 281:
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: Highhigh limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may
be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get
measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 281.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.
594
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of
the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following
basic reporting modes are available:
Cyclic reporting
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y4
Y1
Y5
t (*)
Value 5
Value 4
t (*)
Value 3
t (*)
Value 2
Value 1
t (*)
en05000500.vsd
IEC05000500 V1 EN
Figure 282:
Periodic reporting
595
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is
larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (UDbRepIn), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level. This limits the information
flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 283 shows an example with the magnitude deadband supervision. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the values
are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
Value Reported
Y
Value Reported
(1st)
Value Reported
Y3
Y2
Y1
Value Reported
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
DY
t
99000529.vsd
IEC99000529 V1 EN
Figure 283:
After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the Y set limits.
The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XDbRepInt), figure 284, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 284 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
596
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
A1 >=
pre-set value
Y
A >=
pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3
Y2
Value Reported
(1st)
A1
Value
Reported
A2
Value
Reported
Y1
Y4
Value
Reported
A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3
A5
A6
A7
Y5
Value
Reported
t
99000530.vsd
IEC99000530 V1 EN
Figure 284:
14.1.8.2
Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation
597
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
A, B, C
S = VA I A* + VB I B* + VC I C*
EQUATION1561 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VA + VB + VC
+ IB + IC
)/
)/3
Comment
EQUATION1562 V1 EN
Arone
S = VAB I A - VBC I C
*
(Equation 80)
EQUATION1563 V1 EN
(
I =( I
V = VAB + VBC / 2
A
EQUATION1564 V1 EN
PosSeq
V =
(Equation 82)
I = I PosSeq
S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq
EQUATION1565 V1 EN
AB
S = VAB I A - I B
*
(Equation 84)
EQUATION1567 V1 EN
BC
S = VBC I B - I C
*
(Equation 86)
EQUATION1569 V1 EN
I = IA + IB / 2
CA
S = VCA I C - I A
*
(Equation 88)
EQUATION1571 V1 EN
I = I B + IC / 2
I = IC + I A / 2
V =
S = 3 VA I A
*
EQUATION1573 V1 EN
(Equation 90)
(Equation 89)
3 VA
I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN
(Equation 87)
V = VCA
EQUATION1572 V1 EN
(Equation 85)
V = VBC
EQUATION1570 V1 EN
(Equation 83)
V = VAB
EQUATION1568 V1 EN
(Equation 81)
3 VPosSeq
EQUATION1566 V1 EN
+ IC / 2
(Equation 91)
598
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
V =
S = 3 VB I B
*
(Equation 92)
EQUATION1575 V1 EN
3 VB
I = IB
EQUATION1576 V1 EN
V =
S = 3 VC I C
*
EQUATION1577 V1 EN
(Equation 94)
(Equation 93)
3 VC
I = IC
EQUATION1578 V1 EN
Comment
(Equation 95)
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes
that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power
system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P,
Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 96)
EQUATION1403 V1 EN
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 97)
EQUATION1404 V1 EN
S = S =
P +Q
2
EQUATION1405 V1 EN
(Equation 98)
PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN
(Equation 99)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind
voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is
leading the voltage phasor.
599
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to
get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below
5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 285.
% of In
Magnitude
compensation
+10
IMagComp5
Measured
current
IMagComp30
IMagComp100
30
% of In
0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant
-10
Degrees
100
Angle
compensation
+10
Measured
current
IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
30
100
% of In
-10
ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN
Figure 285:
Calibration curves
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I
and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in
600
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
EQUATION1407 V1 EN
where:
X
is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld
is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, the magnitude level for current and voltage measurement is forced to zero.
When either current or voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the
measured values for power (P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well.
Since the measurement supervision functionality, included in the CVMMXN function,
is using these values the zero clamping will influence the subsequent supervision
(observe the possibility to do zero point clamping within measurement supervision, see
section "Measurement supervision").
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude
(setting parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for
example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration
it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.
601
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Directionality
CTStartPoint defines if the CTs grounding point is located towards or from the
protected object under observation. If everything is properly set power is always
measured towards protection object.
Busbar
52
IED
Q
Protected
Object
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000373 V2 EN
Figure 286:
Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they
flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the
power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have
actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements.
This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0
degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
14.1.8.3
602
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5,
30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see figure 285.
Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
14.1.8.4
14.1.8.5
14.1.9
Technical data
Table 449:
Function
Range or value
Voltage
(0.1-1.5) Vn
0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn
Connected current
(0.2-4.0) In
0.5% of In at I In
0.5% of I at I > In
Active power, P
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Accuracy
603
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Reactive power, Q
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Apparent power, S
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
cos phi = 1
0.5% of S at S > Sn
0.5% of Sn at S Sn
< 0.02
14.2
14.2.1
Identification
Function description
Event counter
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
CNTGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00946 V1 EN
14.2.2
Functionality
Event counter CNTGGIO has six counters which are used for storing the number of
times each counter input has been activated.
14.2.3
Function block
CNTGGIO
BLOCK
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
RESET
VALUE1
VALUE2
VALUE3
VALUE4
VALUE5
VALUE6
IEC09000090_1_en.vsd
IEC09000090 V1 EN
Figure 287:
604
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.2.4
Signals
Table 450:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
COUNTER1
BOOLEAN
COUNTER2
BOOLEAN
COUNTER3
BOOLEAN
COUNTER4
BOOLEAN
COUNTER5
BOOLEAN
COUNTER6
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
Name
Table 452:
Name
Operation
14.2.6
Description
BLOCK
Table 451:
14.2.5
Default
Type
Description
VALUE1
INTEGER
Output of counter 1
VALUE2
INTEGER
Output of counter 2
VALUE3
INTEGER
Output of counter 3
VALUE4
INTEGER
Output of counter 4
VALUE5
INTEGER
Output of counter 5
VALUE6
INTEGER
Output of counter 6
Settings
CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
Step
Default
Disabled
Description
Disable/Enable Operation
Monitored data
Table 453:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE1
INTEGER
Output of counter 1
VALUE2
INTEGER
Output of counter 2
VALUE3
INTEGER
Output of counter 3
605
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
14.2.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE4
INTEGER
Output of counter 4
VALUE5
INTEGER
Output of counter 5
VALUE6
INTEGER
Output of counter 6
Operation principle
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many times
each of the inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six inputs is
updated, giving the total number of times the input has been activated, as soon as an
input is activated.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This
however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new
value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before
auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory
will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters at
testing.The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six
counters are set to 0.
All inputs are configured via PCM600.
14.2.7.1
Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850
client. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI
graphical display.
14.2.8
Technical data
Table 454:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Counter value
0-100000
606
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.3
Function description
Function description
Limit counter
14.3.1
14.3.2
Introduction
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
L4UFCNT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with four independent limits
where the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal are counted
against the setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated when the
counted value reaches that limit.
14.3.3
Principle of operation
Limit counter (L4UFCNT) counts the number of positive and/or negative flanks on the
binary input signal depending on the function settings. L4UFCNT also checks if the
accumulated value is equal or greater than any of its four settable limits. The four limit
outputs will be activated relatively on reach of each limit and remain activated until the
reset of the function. Moreover, the content of L4UFCNT is stored in flash memory
and will not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
14.3.3.1
Design
Figure 14 illustrates the general logic diagram of the function.
607
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
BLOCK
INPUT
Operation
Counter
RESET
VALUE
Overflow
Detection
CountType
OVERFLOW
OnMaxValue
LIMIT1 4
Limit
Check
MaxValue
CounterLimit1...4
ERROR
Error
Detection
InitialValue
IEC12000625_1_en.vsd
IEC12000625 V1 EN
Figure 288:
Logic diagram
The counter can be initialized to count from a settable non-zero value after reset of the
function. The function has also a maximum counted value check. The three
possibilities after reaching the maximum counted value are:
Stops counting and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a steady overflow indication for the next count
Rolls over to zero and activates a pulsed overflow indication for the next count
The pulsed overflow output lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero, as
illustrated in figure 14.
Overflow indication
Actual value
Max value
Counted value
Max value
Max value +1
0
Max value +2
1
...
IEC12000626_1_en.vsd
IEC12000626 V1 EN
Figure 289:
The Error output is activated as an indicator of setting the counter limits and/or initial
value setting(s) greater than the maximum value. The counter stops counting the input
608
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
and all the outputs except the error output remains at zero state. The error condition
remains until the correct settings for counter limits and/or initial value setting(s) are
applied.
The function can be blocked through a block input. During the block time, input is not
counted and outputs remain in their previous states. However, the counter can be
initialized after reset of the function. In this case the outputs remain in their initial
states until the release of the block input.
14.3.3.2
Reporting
The content of the counter can be read on the local HMI.
Reset of the counter can be performed from the local HMI or via a binary input.
Reading of content and resetting of the function can also be performed remotely, for
example from a IEC 61850 client. The value can also be presented as a measurement
on the local HMI graphical display.
14.3.4
Function block
L4UFCNT function block
L4UFCNT
BLOCK
INPUT
RESET
ERROR
OVERFLOW
LIMIT1
LIMIT2
LIMIT3
LIMIT4
VALUE
IEC12000029-1-en.vsd
IEC12000029 V1 EN
14.3.5
Signals
Table 455:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
INPUT
BOOLEAN
RESET
BOOLEAN
Reset of function
609
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 456:
Name
14.3.6
Table 457:
Name
Type
Description
ERROR
BOOLEAN
OVERFLOW
BOOLEAN
LIMIT1
BOOLEAN
LIMIT2
BOOLEAN
LIMIT3
BOOLEAN
LIMIT4
BOOLEAN
VALUE
INTEGER
Counted value
Settings
L4UFCNT Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
On
Disabled
CountType
Set
Reset
DBLL or DLLB
Set
CounterLimit1
1 - 65535
100
CounterLimit2
1 - 65535
200
CounterLimit3
1 - 65535
300
CounterLimit4
1 - 65535
400
MaxValue
1 - 65535
500
OnMaxValue
Stop
Rollover Steady
Rollover Pulsed
Stop
InitialValue
0 - 65535
14.3.7
Monitored data
Table 458:
Name
VALUE
Values (Range)
-
Unit
-
Description
Counted value
610
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.3.8
Technical data
Table 459:
L4UFCNTtechnical data
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Counter value
0-65535
5-160 pulses/s
14.4
Disturbance report
14.4.1
Functionality
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a,
maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:
Sequential of events
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
Fault locator
611
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.4.2
14.4.2.1
Identification
14.4.2.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Disturbance report
DRPRDRE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC09000346-1-en.vsd
IEC09000346 V1 EN
Figure 290:
14.4.2.3
Signals
Table 460:
Name
14.4.2.4
Table 461:
Name
Type
Description
DRPOFF
BOOLEAN
RECSTART
BOOLEAN
RECMADE
BOOLEAN
CLEARED
BOOLEAN
MEMUSED
BOOLEAN
Settings
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
PreFaultRecT
0.05 - 9.90
0.01
0.10
PostFaultRecT
0.1 - 10.0
0.1
0.5
TimeLimit
0.5 - 10.0
0.1
1.0
612
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PostRetrig
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
MaxNoStoreRec
10 - 100
100
ZeroAngleRef
1 - 30
Ch
OpModeTest
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
14.4.2.5
Monitored data
Table 462:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
MemoryUsed
INTEGER
UnTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh1
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh2
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh3
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh4
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh5
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh6
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh7
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN
613
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh8
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh9
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh10
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh11
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh12
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh13
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh14
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh15
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh16
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh17
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh18
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN
614
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh19
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh20
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh21
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh22
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh23
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh24
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh25
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh26
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh27
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh28
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh29
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN
615
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OvTrigStatCh30
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh31
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh32
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh33
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh34
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh35
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh36
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh37
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh38
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh39
BOOLEAN
UnTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN
OvTrigStatCh40
BOOLEAN
FaultNumber
INTEGER
616
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.4.3
14.4.3.1
Identification
Function description
14.4.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
A1RADR
A2RADR
A3RADR
Function block
A1RADR
^GRPINPUT1
^GRPINPUT2
^GRPINPUT3
^GRPINPUT4
^GRPINPUT5
^GRPINPUT6
^GRPINPUT7
^GRPINPUT8
^GRPINPUT9
^GRPINPUT10
IEC09000348-1-en.vsd
IEC09000348 V1 EN
Figure 291:
14.4.3.3
Signals
A1RADR - A3RADR Input signals
Tables for input signals for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for
GRPINPUT number.
617
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 463:
Name
14.4.3.4
Type
Default
Description
GRPINPUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
GRPINPUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Settings
A1RADR - A3RADR Settings
Setting tables for A1RADR, A2RADR and A3RADR are similar except for channel
numbers.
Table 464:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
618
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
Operation10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/Off
FunType1
0 - 255
InfNo1
0 - 255
FunType2
0 - 255
InfNo2
0 - 255
FunType3
0 - 255
InfNo3
0 - 255
FunType4
0 - 255
InfNo4
0 - 255
FunType5
0 - 255
InfNo5
0 - 255
FunType6
0 - 255
InfNo6
0 - 255
FunType7
0 - 255
InfNo7
0 - 255
FunType8
0 - 255
InfNo8
0 - 255
619
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunType9
0 - 255
InfNo9
0 - 255
FunType10
0 - 255
InfNo10
0 - 255
Table 465:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NomValue01
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe01
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe01
0 - 5000
200
NomValue02
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe02
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe02
0 - 5000
200
NomValue03
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe03
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe03
0 - 5000
200
NomValue04
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe04
0 - 200
50
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigOp04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe04
0 - 5000
200
NomValue05
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe05
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe05
0 - 5000
200
NomValue06
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe06
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe06
0 - 5000
200
NomValue07
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe07
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe07
0 - 5000
200
NomValue08
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe08
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe08
0 - 5000
200
NomValue09
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
621
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UnderTrigLe09
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe09
0 - 5000
200
NomValue10
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe10
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe10
0 - 5000
200
14.4.4
14.4.4.1
Identification
Function description
Analog input signals
14.4.4.2
IEC 61850
identification
A4RADR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40
IEC09000350-1-en.vsd
IEC09000350 V1 EN
Figure 292:
Channels 31-40 are not shown in LHMI. They are used for internally
calculated analog signals.
622
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.4.4.3
Signals
Table 466:
Name
14.4.4.4
Table 467:
Name
Type
Default
Description
INPUT31
REAL
Analog channel 31
INPUT32
REAL
Analog channel 32
INPUT33
REAL
Analog channel 33
INPUT34
REAL
Analog channel 34
INPUT35
REAL
Analog channel 35
INPUT36
REAL
Analog channel 36
INPUT37
REAL
Analog channel 37
INPUT38
REAL
Analog channel 38
INPUT39
REAL
Analog channel 39
INPUT40
REAL
Analog channel 40
Settings
A4RADR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation31
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation32
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation33
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation34
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation35
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation36
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation37
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation38
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation39
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
Operation40
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation On/off
FunType31
0 - 255
623
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
InfNo31
0 - 255
FunType32
0 - 255
InfNo32
0 - 255
FunType33
0 - 255
InfNo33
0 - 255
FunType34
0 - 255
InfNo34
0 - 255
FunType35
0 - 255
InfNo35
0 - 255
FunType36
0 - 255
InfNo36
0 - 255
FunType37
0 - 255
InfNo37
0 - 255
FunType38
0 - 255
InfNo38
0 - 255
FunType39
0 - 255
InfNo39
0 - 255
FunType40
0 - 255
InfNo40
0 - 255
624
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 468:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
NomValue31
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp31
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe31
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp31
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe31
0 - 5000
200
NomValue32
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp32
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe32
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp32
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe32
0 - 5000
200
NomValue33
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp33
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe33
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp33
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe33
0 - 5000
200
NomValue34
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp34
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe34
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp34
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe34
0 - 5000
200
NomValue35
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp35
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe35
0 - 200
50
625
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
OverTrigOp35
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe35
0 - 5000
200
NomValue36
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp36
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe36
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp36
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe36
0 - 5000
200
NomValue37
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp37
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe37
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp37
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe37
0 - 5000
200
NomValue38
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp38
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe38
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp38
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe38
0 - 5000
200
NomValue39
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp39
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
UnderTrigLe39
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp39
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe39
0 - 5000
200
NomValue40
0.0 - 999999.9
0.1
0.0
UnderTrigOp40
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
626
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
UnderTrigLe40
0 - 200
50
OverTrigOp40
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
OverTrigLe40
0 - 5000
200
14.4.5
14.4.5.1
Identification
Function description
14.4.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
B1RBDR
B2RBDR
B3RBDR
B4RBDR
B5RBDR
B6RBDR
Function block
B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC09000352-1-en.vsd
IEC09000352 V1 EN
Figure 293:
627
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.4.5.3
Signals
B1RBDR - B6RBDR Input signals
Tables for input signals for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for INPUT and
description number.
Table 469:
Name
14.4.5.4
Default
Description
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 1
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 2
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 3
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 4
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 5
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 6
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 7
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 8
INPUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 9
INPUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 10
INPUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 11
INPUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 12
INPUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 13
INPUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 14
INPUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 15
INPUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary channel 16
Settings
B1RBDR - B6RBDR Settings
Setting tables for B1RBDR - B6RBDR are all similar except for binary channel and
description numbers.
628
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 470:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR01
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED01
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR02
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED02
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR03
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED03
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR04
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED04
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR05
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED05
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR06
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED06
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR07
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED07
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
629
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR08
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED08
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR09
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED09
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR10
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED10
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR11
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED11
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR12
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED12
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR13
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED13
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR14
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED14
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
TrigDR15
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED15
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
630
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigDR16
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
SetLED16
Disabled
Start
Trip
Pick up and trip
Disabled
FunType1
0 - 255
InfNo1
0 - 255
FunType2
0 - 255
InfNo2
0 - 255
FunType3
0 - 255
InfNo3
0 - 255
FunType4
0 - 255
InfNo4
0 - 255
FunType5
0 - 255
InfNo5
0 - 255
FunType6
0 - 255
InfNo6
0 - 255
FunType7
0 - 255
InfNo7
0 - 255
FunType8
0 - 255
InfNo8
0 - 255
FunType9
0 - 255
InfNo9
0 - 255
FunType10
0 - 255
InfNo10
0 - 255
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunType11
0 - 255
InfNo11
0 - 255
FunType12
0 - 255
InfNo12
0 - 255
FunType13
0 - 255
InfNo13
0 - 255
FunType14
0 - 255
InfNo14
0 - 255
FunType15
0 - 255
InfNo15
0 - 255
FunType16
0 - 255
InfNo16
0 - 255
Table 471:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigLevel01
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa01
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel02
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa02
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel03
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa03
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel04
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa04
Hide
Show
Hide
632
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TrigLevel05
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa05
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel06
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa06
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel07
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa07
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel08
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa08
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel09
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa09
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel10
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa10
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel11
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa11
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel12
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa12
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel13
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa13
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel14
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa14
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel15
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
633
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
IndicationMa15
Hide
Show
Hide
TrigLevel16
Trig on 0
Trig on 1
Trig on 1
IndicationMa16
Hide
Show
Hide
14.4.6
Operation principle
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:
Sequential of events
Indications
Event recorder
Trip value recorder
Disturbance recorder
Fault locator (FL)
Figure 294 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events , Event recorder and Indications uses information
from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder uses analog
information from the analog input function blocks (AxRADR) which is used by FL
after estimation by TVR. Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from
both AxRADR and BxRBDR.
634
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Disturbance Report
A1-4RADR
A4RADR
DRPRDRE
FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec
B1-6RBDR
Binary signals
Fault locator
Disturbance
recorder
B6RBDR
Sequential of
events
Event recorder
Indications
ANSI09000336-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000336 V1 EN
Figure 294:
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each
with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
Record no. N
General dist.
information
Indications
Trip
values
Event
recordings
Disturbance
recording
Fault locator
Event list
(SOE)
en05000125_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000125 V1 EN
Figure 295:
Section 14
Monitoring
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
14.4.6.1
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or
MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely
via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
14.4.6.2
Indications
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see Indication section for detailed information.
14.4.6.3
Event recorder
The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see Event recorder section for detailed information.
14.4.6.4
Sequential of events
The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see Sequential of events section for detailed information.
636
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.4.6.5
14.4.6.6
Disturbance recorder
Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the
fault, see Disturbance recorder section for detailed information.
14.4.6.7
Fault locator
The fault location function calculates the distance to fault, see Fault locator section for
detailed information.
14.4.6.8
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report
14.4.6.9
Recording times
Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder, event recorder and indication function register disturbance data
and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =
637
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT
PostFaultRecT
3
en05000487.vsd
IEC05000487 V1 EN
Figure 296:
PreFaultRecT, 1
Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2
Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit
time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit
14.4.6.10
Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the
setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI) and summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (phase
differential currents, bias currents and so on).
638
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
A1RADR
SMAI
External analog
signals
GRPNAME
AI1NAME
AI3P
AI1
A2RADR
GRPINPUT1
AI2NAME
AI3NAME
AI2
AI3
GRPINPUT2
AI4NAME
AI4
AIN
GRPINPUT4
A3RADR
GRPINPUT3
GRPINPUT5
GRPINPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
en05000653-2.vsd
IEC05000653 V2 EN
Figure 297:
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to
the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the
base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.
Application configuration tool (ACT) is used for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
639
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
triggers even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in
graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
14.4.6.11
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is
selected to be recorded when:
Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
= Operation>TrigDR =Disabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the
yellow (PICKUP) and red (TRIP) LED on the local HMI (SetLED = Disabled/Pickup/
Trip/Pickup and Trip).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used
as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
14.4.6.12
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of
events, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is
fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the
importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:
Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
640
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in
the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found,
the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value
is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is
indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure
is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this initiation is typically in
the range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.
14.4.6.13
Post Retrigger
Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig
= Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start
and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will
not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.
641
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.4.7
Technical data
Table 472:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
Current recording
1,0% of Ir at I Ir
1,0% of I at I > Ir
Voltage recording
1,0% of Vn at V Vn
1,0% of Vat V> Vn
Pre-fault time
(0.053.00) s
Post-fault time
(0.110.0) s
Limit time
(0.58.0) s
1 ms
30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)
96
30
96
150
Sampling rate
1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth
(5-300) Hz
14.5
Indications
14.5.1
Functionality
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that
642
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short
perspective to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display
status information about the IED and the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance recorder function that have changed status during a disturbance.
14.5.2
Function block
The Indications function has no function block of its own.
14.5.3
Signals
14.5.3.1
Input signals
The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report
function.
14.5.4
Operation principle
The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light
In Service
Flashing light
Internal fail
Dark
No power supply
Yellow LED:
Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.
Red LED:
Function controlled by SetLEDn setting in Disturbance report function.
Indication list:
The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder.
643
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the
binary inputs.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined
name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance
recorder function, indications and event recorder function.
14.5.5
Technical data
Table 473:
Function
Buffer capacity
14.6
Event recorder
14.6.1
Functionality
Value
Maximum number of indications presented
for single disturbance
96
100
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
recorder function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
644
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.6.2
Function block
The Event recorder has no function block of its own.
14.6.3
Signals
14.6.3.1
Input signals
The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.
14.6.4
Operation principle
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be
generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = Enabled and a new trig signal
appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function , indications and event recorder function.
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information and managed
via the local HMI or PCM600.
Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing
the IED simultaneously.
645
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.6.5
Technical data
Table 474:
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in disturbance report
150
100
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on time
synchronizing
14.7
Sequential of events
14.7.1
Functionality
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The sequential of events logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
recorder function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a FIFObuffer.
14.7.2
Function block
The Sequential of events has no function block of its own.
14.7.3
Signals
14.7.3.1
Input signals
The Sequential of events logs the same binary input signals as configured for the
Disturbance report function.
14.7.4
Operation principle
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the
sequential of events function stores input name, status and time in the sequential of
events in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal
logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.
646
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
local HMI.
The sequential of events function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder
function, which is only active during a disturbance, and each event record is an integral
part of its associated DR.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined
name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance
recorder function , indications and the event recorder function .
The sequential of events is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report
information.
14.7.5
Technical data
Table 475:
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of events in the list
1000
Resolution
1 ms
Accuracy
Depending on time
synchronizing
14.8
14.8.1
Functionality
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance recorder function. The result is magnitude and phase
angle before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
14.8.2
Function block
The Trip value recorder has no function block of its own.
647
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.8.3
Signals
14.8.3.1
Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to
A3RADR (not A4RADR).
14.8.4
Operation principle
Trip value recorder calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault magnitudes as well
as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter
ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The
calculated data is input information to the fault locator .
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.
When a fault interception point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values
of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault
and fault values.
The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
Disturbance recorder function .
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information
(LMBRFLO) and managed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.
14.8.5
Technical data
Table 476:
Function
Buffer capacity
Value
Maximum number of analog inputs
30
100
648
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.9
Disturbance recorder
14.9.1
Functionality
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded
information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (for example
corrective actions) and long perspective (for example functional analysis).
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary
signals connected to the Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and 96
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder
function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions.
Up to 9,9 seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED
and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.
14.9.2
Function block
The Disturbance recorder has no function block of its own.
14.9.3
Signals
See Disturbance report for input and output signals.
14.9.4
Settings
See Disturbance report for settings.
14.9.5
Operation principle
Disturbance recording is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals. The
binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM) through the Signal Matrix Analog
Input (SMAI) and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally
derived analog signals.
649
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic
buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will
continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this
buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the
data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as
the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault
time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog
inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
14.9.5.1
The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:
Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
650
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance, that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions. The
Disturbance handling tool use this information and present the recording in a userfriendly way.
General:
Analog:
Binary:
Signal names
Status of binary input signals
651
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.9.6
Technical data
Table 477:
Function
Value
Buffer capacity
40
96
100
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number
of channels, typical value)
14.10
14.10.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
functions
14.10.2
IEC 61850
identification
SPGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
14.10.3
Function block
SPGGIO
BLOCK
^IN
IEC09000237_en_1.vsd
IEC09000237 V1 EN
Figure 298:
652
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.10.4
Signals
Table 478:
Name
14.10.5
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
BOOLEAN
Input status
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
14.10.6
Operation principle
Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.
14.11
14.11.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
functions 16 inputs
14.11.2
IEC 61850
identification
SP16GGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions 16 inputs SP16GGIO function is used
to send up to 16 logical signals to other systems or equipment in the substation.
653
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.11.3
Function block
SP16GGIO
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16
IEC09000238_en_1.vsd
IEC09000238 V1 EN
Figure 299:
14.11.4
Signals
Table 479:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN1
BOOLEAN
Input 1 status
IN2
BOOLEAN
Input 2 status
IN3
BOOLEAN
Input 3 status
IN4
BOOLEAN
Input 4 status
IN5
BOOLEAN
Input 5 status
IN6
BOOLEAN
Input 6 status
IN7
BOOLEAN
Input 7 status
IN8
BOOLEAN
Input 8 status
IN9
BOOLEAN
Input 9 status
IN10
BOOLEAN
Input 10 status
IN11
BOOLEAN
Input 11 status
IN12
BOOLEAN
Input 12 status
IN13
BOOLEAN
Input 13 status
IN14
BOOLEAN
Input 14 status
IN15
BOOLEAN
Input 15 status
IN16
BOOLEAN
Input 16 status
654
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.11.5
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
14.11.6
MonitoredData
Table 480:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
OUT1
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 1 status
OUT2
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 2 status
OUT3
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 3 status
OUT4
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 4 status
OUT5
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 5 status
OUT6
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 6 status
OUT7
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 7 status
OUT8
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 8 status
OUT9
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 9 status
OUT10
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 10 status
OUT11
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 11 status
OUT12
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 12 status
OUT13
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 13 status
OUT14
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 14 status
OUT15
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 15 status
OUT16
GROUP
SIGNAL
Output 16 status
OUTOR
GROUP
SIGNAL
655
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.11.7
Operation principle
Upon receiving signals at its inputs, IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
16 inputs (SP16GGIO) function will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the
equipment or system that requests this signals. To be able to get the signal, one must
use other tools, described in the Engineering manual and define which function block
in which equipment or system should receive this information.
There are also 16 output signals that show the input status for each input as well as an
OR type output combined for all 16 input signals. These output signals are handled in
PST.
14.12
14.12.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
14.12.2
MVGGIO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.
14.12.3
Function block
MVGGIO
BLOCK
^IN
^VALUE
RANGE
IEC09000239-2-en.vsd
656
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.12.4
Signals
Table 481:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
IN
REAL
Name
Table 483:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 482:
14.12.5
Default
Type
Description
VALUE
REAL
RANGE
INTEGER
Range
Settings
MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
BasePrefix
micro
milli
unit
kilo
Mega
Giga
Tera
unit
MV db
1 - 300
Type
10
MV zeroDb
0 - 100000
m%
500
MV hhLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
900.00
MV hLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
800.00
MV lLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-800.00
MV llLim
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-900.00
MV min
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
-1000.00
MV max
-5000.00 - 5000.00
xBase
0.01
1000.00
MV dbType
Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband
Dead band
Reporting type
MV limHys
0.000 - 100.000
0.001
5.000
657
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.12.6
Monitored data
Table 484:
Name
14.12.7
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
VALUE
REAL
RANGE
INTEGER
0=Normal
1=High
2=Low
3=High-High
4=Low-Low
Range
Operation principle
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O
functions (MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as
output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other
IEC 61850 clients in the substation.
14.13
14.13.1
Identification
Function description
Measured value expander block
14.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
MVEXP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high
limit. The measure value expander block MVEXP has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals:
below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-high
limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for
alarming purpose.
658
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.13.3
Function block
MVEXP
RANGE*
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC09000215-1-en.vsd
IEC09000215 V1 EN
Figure 300:
14.13.4
Signals
Table 485:
Name
RANGE
Table 486:
Name
14.13.5
Default
0
Description
Measured value range
Description
HIGHHIGH
BOOLEAN
HIGH
BOOLEAN
NORMAL
BOOLEAN
LOW
BOOLEAN
LOWLOW
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define
(IBase), (VBase) and (SBase).
14.13.6
Operation principle
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according
to table 487.
659
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 487:
Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
LOWLOW
between low
and high limit
High
LOW
High
NORMAL
High
HIGH
High
HIGHHIGH
High
14.14
14.14.1
Identification
Function description
Fault locator
14.14.2
IEC 61850
identification
LMBRFLO
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Fault locator LMBRFLO in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with
great accuracy. It indicates the distance to fault in kilometers or miles as selected by
parameter setting.
The fault locator LMBRFLO function, supports kilometer and mile for
the line length unit. The fault distance will be presented with the same
unit as the line length and is mapped to IEC61850 -8-1 communication
protocol, where the fault distance is supposed to be in kilometer (km).
Select the line length unit to kilometer for compliance with IEC61850.
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault as
a relative (in%) or an absolute value. The main advantage is the high accuracy
achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on
double circuit lines.
660
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of
the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current,
together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to
further increase the accuracy.
Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source voltage angles can be up to
35-40 degrees apart, the accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
compensation included in fault locator.
14.14.3
Function block
LMBRFLO
PHSEL_A*
CALCMADE
PHSEL_B*
FLTDISTX
PHSEL_C*
BCD_80
CALCDIST*
BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1
ANSI09000621-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000621 V2 EN
Figure 301:
14.14.4
Signals
Table 488:
Name
Default
Description
PHSEL_A
BOOLEAN
PHSEL_B
BOOLEAN
PHSEL_C
BOOLEAN
CALCDIST
BOOLEAN
Table 489:
Name
Description
CALCMADE
BOOLEAN
FLT_X
REAL
BCD_80
BOOLEAN
BCD_40
BOOLEAN
661
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
14.14.5
Table 490:
Name
Type
Description
BCD_20
BOOLEAN
BCD_10
BOOLEAN
BCD_8
BOOLEAN
BCD_4
BOOLEAN
BCD_2
BOOLEAN
BCD_1
BOOLEAN
Settings
LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
R1A
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
2.000
X1A
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
12.000
R1B
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
2.000
X1B
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
12.000
R1L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
2.000
X1L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
12.500
R0L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
8.750
X0L
0.001 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
50.000
R0M
0.000 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
0.000
X0M
0.000 - 1500.000
ohm/p
0.001
0.000
LineLengthUnit
kilometer
miles
kilometer
LineLength
0.0 - 10000.0
0.1
40.0
Length of line
Step
Default
Table 491:
Name
Unit
Description
DrepChNoI_A
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoI_B
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoI_C
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoIN
0 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoIP
0 - 30
Ch
662
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
DrepChNoV_A
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoV_B
1 - 30
Ch
DrepChNoV_C
1 - 30
Ch
14.14.6
Monitored data
Table 492:
Name
14.14.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
FLT_REL
REAL
FLT_DIST
REAL
FLT_X
REAL
Ohm
FLT_R
REAL
Ohm
FLT_LOOP
INTEGER
0=--1=L1-N
2=L2-N
3=L3-N
4=L1-L2
5=L2-L3
6=L3-L1
7=L1-L2-L3
Fault loop
Operation principle
The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high
accuracy.
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages
are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault
locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog
configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within
PCM600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.
663
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
R1B+jX1B
R1A+jX1A
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO
ANSI09000726-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000726 V1 EN
Figure 302:
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to
exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order,
and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the
distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also
possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be
achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. LineLengthUnit setting is used to
select the unit of length either, in kilometer or miles for the distance to fault. Line
length unit can also be configured using PCM600. The fault location is stored as a part
of the disturbance report information and managed via the LHMI or PCM600.
14.14.7.1
Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end
infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance
to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the
accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of
additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of doubleend infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
14.14.7.2
664
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
L
F
ZA
pZL
IA
IB
(1-p).ZL
ZB
IF
VA
RF
xx01000171_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000171 V1 EN
Figure 303:
VA = IA p ZL + IF RF
EQUATION1595 V1 EN
(Equation 101)
Where:
IA
is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,
IF
EQUATION96 V1 EN
Where:
IFA
DA
is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and
the total fault current.
665
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
( 1 p ) Z L + ZB
DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 103)
EQUATION97 V1 EN
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
VA = IA p ZL +
IFA
DA
RF
(Equation 104)
EQUATION1596 V1 EN
Table 493:
Fault type:
IA
AG
VAA
IAA + KN x INA
BG
VBA
IBA + KN x INA
IFA
3
2
D (IAA - I0 A )
EQUATION1597 V1 EN
3
2
D (IBA - I0 A )
EQUATION1598 V1 EN
CG
VCA
ICA + KN x INA
3
2
D (ICA - I0 A )
EQUATION1599 V1 EN
VAA-VBA
IAA - IBA
DIABA
BC, BCG
VBA-VCA
IBA - ICA
DICBA
CA, CAG
VCA-VAA
ICA - IAA
DICAA
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:
Z0L Z 1L
K N = -----------------------3 Z1L
EQUATION99 V1 EN
(Equation 105)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before
the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into
the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.
For double lines, the fault equation is:
666
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
VA = IA p Z1L +
IFA
DA
RF + I0P Z 0M
(Equation 106)
EQUATION1600 V1 EN
Where:
I0P
Z0M
DA
( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN
EQUATION102 V1 EN
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two
cases.
Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 104 or 106 is a function of p,
the general equation 106 can be written in the form:
2
p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
(Equation 108)
EQUATION103 V1 EN
Where:
K1 =
VA
IA ZL
ZB
ZL + Z ADD
+1
(Equation 109)
EQUATION1601 V1 EN
K2 =
VA
ZB
IA ZL ZL + Z ADD
EQUATION1602 V1 EN
+ 1
(Equation 110)
667
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
IF A ZA + ZB
- --------------------------- + 1
K 3 = --------------
I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
EQUATION106 V1 EN
(Equation 111)
and:
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 108 applies to both single and
parallel lines.
Equation 108 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
2
p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN
(Equation 112)
p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN
(Equation 113)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 113, and
then inserted to equation 112. According to equation 112, the relative distance to the
fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.
Equation 112 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal figure
for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected.
If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the
relative distance to the fault.
14.14.7.3
668
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
VA = p Z1L IA + RF IA
(Equation 114)
EQUATION1603 V1 EN
Where:
IA
14.14.8
Technical data
Table 494:
Function
Value or range
Accuracy
(0.001-1500.000) /phase
Phase selection
100
14.15
14.15.1
Identification
Function description
Station battery supervision function
IEC 61850
identification
SPVNZBAT
IEC 60617
identification
U<>
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
669
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.15.2
Function block
SPVNZBAT
V_BATT
BLOCK
AL_VLOW
AL_VHI
PU_VLOW
PU_VHI
ANSI12000026-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000026 V1 EN
Figure 304:
14.15.3
Function block
Functionality
The station battery supervision function SPVNZBAT is used for monitoring battery
terminal voltage.
SPVNZBAT activates the start and alarm outputs when the battery terminal voltage
exceeds the set upper limit or drops below the set lower limit. A time delay for the
overvoltage and undervoltage alarms can be set according to definite time characteristics.
SPVNZBAT operates after a settable operate time and resets when the battery
undervoltage or overvoltage condition disappears after settable reset time.
14.15.4
Signals
Table 495:
Name
Default
Description
V_BATT
REAL
0.00
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 496:
Name
Description
AL_VLOW
BOOLEAN
Alarm when voltage has been below low limit for a set
time
AL_VHI
BOOLEAN
PU_VLOW
BOOLEAN
PU_VHI
BOOLEAN
670
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.15.5
Table 497:
Name
Settings
SPVNZBAT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disable/Enable Operation
RtdBattVolt
20.00 - 250.00
1.00
110.00
BattVoltLowLim
60 - 140
%Vbat
70
BattVoltHiLim
60 - 140
%Vbat
120
tDelay
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.200
tReset
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
14.15.6
Measured values
Table 498:
Name
14.15.7
Type
Default
Description
V_BATT
REAL
0.00
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Monitored Data
Table 499:
Name
BATTVOLT
14.15.8
Values (Range)
-
Unit
kV
Description
Service value of the battery
terminal voltage
Operation principle
The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The
corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable.
The function execution requires that at least one of the function outputs
is connected in configuration.
The operation of the station battery supervision function can be described by using a
module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
671
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Comparator
V<BattVoltLowLim
V_BATT
PU_VLOW
0-tDelay
0-tReset
Comparator
U<BattVoltHiLim
AL_VLOW
PU_VHI
0-tDelay
0-tReset
AL_VHI
ANSI11000292-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000292 V1 EN
Figure 305:
The battery rated voltage is set with the RtdBattVolt setting. The value of the
BattVoltLowLim and BattVoltHiLim settings are given in relative per unit to the
RtdBattVolt setting.
It is possible to block the function outputs by the BLOCK input.
Time delay
When the operate timer has reached the value set by the tDelay setting, the AL_VLOW
and AL_VHI outputs are activated. If the voltage returns to the normal value before the
module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by
tReset, the operate timer resets and the PU_VLOW and AL_VHI outputs are deactivated.
672
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.15.9
Technical data
Table 500:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(60-140) % of Vbat
<105 %
(60-140) % of Vbat
>95 %
Timers
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 110 ms
20-250V
14.16
14.16.1
Identification
Function description
Insulation gas monitoring function
14.16.2
IEC 61850
identification
SSIMG
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
63
Functionality
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker
is used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based
on received information.
14.16.3
Function block
SSIMG (63)
BLOCK
PRESSURE
BLK_ALM
PRES_ALM
PRESSURE
PRES_LO
TEMP
TEMP
PRES_ALM
TEMP_ALM
PRES_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_P_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000129-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000129 V1 EN
Figure 306:
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.16.4
Signals
Inputs PRESSURE and TEMP together with settings PressAlmLimit,
PressLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in
this release of 650 series.
Table 501:
Name
Type
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRESSURE
REAL
0.0
TEMP
REAL
0.0
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_P_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 503:
Name
Description
BOOLEAN
Table 502:
14.16.5
Default
BLOCK
Type
Description
PRESSURE
REAL
PRES_ALM
BOOLEAN
PRES_LO
BOOLEAN
TEMP
REAL
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
Settings
SSIMG (63) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
PressAlmLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
5.00
PressLOLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
3.00
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
674
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Step
Default
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
tPressureAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tPressureLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetPressAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetPressLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
14.16.6
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
Operation principle
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG (63) is used to monitor gas pressure in the
circuit breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate
alarm signals, pressure below alarm level and pressure below lockout level. If the input
signal PRES_ALM is high, which indicate that the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is
below alarm level, the function initiates output signal PRES_ALM, pressure below
alarm level, after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is
required. Similarly, if the input signal PRES_LO is high, which indicate gas pressure
in the circuit breaker is below lockout level, the function initiates output signal
PRES_LO, after a time delay. The two time delay settings, tPressureAlarm and
tPressureLO, are included in order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in
the gas pressure. If the gas pressure in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for
more than the set time delays the corresponding signals, PRES_ALM, pressure below
alarm level and PRES_LO, pressure below lockout level alarm will be obtained.
The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms levels. The input signal
BLOCK is used to block both the alarms and the function.
14.16.7
Technical data
Table 504:
Function
Timers
Accuracy
0.5% 110 ms
675
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.17
14.17.1
Identification
Function description
Insulation liquid monitoring function
14.17.2
IEC 61850
identification
SSIML
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
71
Functionality
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used for monitoring the circuit
breaker condition. Binary information based on the oil level in the circuit breaker is
used as input signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based
on received information.
14.17.3
Function block
SSIML (71)
BLOCK
LEVEL
BLK_ALM
LVL_ALM
LEVEL
LVL_LO
TEMP
TEMP
LVL_ALM
TEMP_ALM
LEVEL_LO
TEMP_LO
SET_L_LO
SET_T_LO
RESET_LO
ANSI09000128-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000128 V1 EN
Figure 307:
14.17.4
Signals
Inputs LEVEL and TEMP together with settings LevelAlmLimit,
LevelLOLimit, TempAlarmLimit and TempLOLimit are not supported in
this release of 650 series.
676
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Table 505:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
LEVEL
REAL
0.0
TEMP
REAL
0.0
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
LEVEL_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_L_LO
BOOLEAN
SET_T_LO
BOOLEAN
RESET_LO
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 507:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 506:
14.17.5
Default
Type
Description
LEVEL
REAL
LVL_ALM
BOOLEAN
LVL_LO
BOOLEAN
TEMP
REAL
TEMP_ALM
BOOLEAN
TEMP_LO
BOOLEAN
Settings
SSIML (71) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disable/Enable Operation
LevelAlmLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
5.00
LevelLOLimit
0.00 - 25.00
0.01
3.00
TempAlarmLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
TempLOLimit
-40.00 - 200.00
0.01
30.00
tLevelAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tLevelLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempAlarm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tTempLockOut
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetLevelAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
677
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
tResetLevelLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempLO
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
tResetTempAlm
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.000
14.17.6
Step
Default
Description
Operation principle
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML (71) is used to monitor oil level in the
circuit breaker. Two binary output signals are used from the circuit breaker to initiate
alarm signals, level below alarm level and level below lockout level. If the input signal
LVL_ALM is high, which indicate that the oil level in the circuit breaker is below
alarm level, the output signal LVL_ALM, level below alarm level, will be initiated
after a set time delay and indicate that maintenance of the circuit breaker is required.
Similarly, if the input signal LVL_LO is high, which indicate oil level in the circuit
breaker is below lockout level, the output signal LVL_LO, will be initiated after a time
delay. The two time delay settings, tLevelAlarm and tLevelLockOut, are included in
order not to initiate any alarm for short sudden changes in the oil level. If the oil level
in the circuit breaker goes below the levels for more than the set time delays the
corresponding signals, LVL_ALM, level below alarm level and LVL_LO, level below
lockout level alarm will be obtained.
The input signal BLK_ALM is used to block the two alarms levels. The input signal
BLOCK is used to block both the alarms and the function.
14.17.7
Technical data
Table 508:
Function
Range or value
Timers
Accuracy
(0.000-60.000) s
0.5% 110 ms
14.18
14.18.1
Identification
Function description
Circuit breaker condition monitoring
IEC 61850
identification
SSCBR
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
678
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.18.2
Functionality
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor different
parameters of the circuit breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number
of operations has reached a predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit
breaker, it is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation, spring charge
indication, breaker wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and accumulated
energy. The energy is calculated from the measured input currents as a sum of I^2 t
values. Alarms are generated when the calculated values exceed the threshold settings.
The function contains a block alarm functionality.
The supervised and presented breaker functions include
14.18.3
Function block
SSCBR
I3P*
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
ALMPRES
LOPRES
SPRCHRGN
SPRCHRGD
CBCNTRST
IACCRST
SPCHTRST
TRVTRST
TRVTOAL
TRVTCAL
SPRCHRAL
OPRALM
OPRLOALM
IACCALM
IACCLOAL
CBLIFEAL
NOOPRALM
PRESALM
PRESLO
CBOPEN
CBINVPOS
52a
ANSI10000281-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000281 V1 EN
Figure 308:
679
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.18.4
Signals
Table 509:
Name
Default
Description
I3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block of function
BLK_ALM
BOOLEAN
POSOPEN
BOOLEAN
POSCLOSE
BOOLEAN
ALMPRES
BOOLEAN
LOPRES
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRGN
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRGD
BOOLEAN
CBCNTRST
BOOLEAN
IACCRST
BOOLEAN
SPCHTRST
BOOLEAN
TRVTRST
BOOLEAN
Table 510:
Name
Description
TRVTOAL
BOOLEAN
TRVTCAL
BOOLEAN
SPRCHRAL
BOOLEAN
OPRALM
BOOLEAN
OPRLOALM
BOOLEAN
IACCALM
BOOLEAN
IACCLOAL
BOOLEAN
CBLIFEAL
BOOLEAN
NOOPRALM
BOOLEAN
PRESALM
BOOLEAN
PRESLO
BOOLEAN
CBOPEN
BOOLEAN
CB is in open position
CBINVPOS
BOOLEAN
CB is in intermediate position
CBCLOSED
BOOLEAN
CB is in closed position
680
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.18.5
Table 511:
Name
Settings
SSCBR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
On
Operation Off / On
AccDisLevel
5.00 - 500.00
0.01
10.00
CurrExp
0.00 - 2.00
0.01
2.00
RatedFaultCurr
500.00 - 75000.00
0.01
5000.00
RatedOpCurr
100.00 - 5000.00
0.01
1000.00
AccCurrAlmLvl
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
AccCurrLO
0.00 - 20000.00
0.01
2500.00
DirCoef
-3.00 - -0.50
0.01
-1.50
LifeAlmLevel
0 - 99999
5000
OpNumRatCurr
1 - 99999
10000
OpNumFaultCurr
1 - 10000
1000
OpNumAlm
0 - 9999
200
OpNumLO
0 - 9999
300
tOpenAlm
0 - 200
ms
40
tCloseAlm
0 - 200
ms
40
OpenTimeCorr
0 - 100
ms
10
CloseTimeCorr
0 - 100
ms
10
DifTimeCorr
-10 - 10
ms
tSprngChrgAlm
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
1.00
tPressAlm
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
TPressLO
0.00 - 60.00
0.01
0.10
AccEnerInitVal
0.00 - 9999.99
0.01
0.00
CountInitVal
0 - 9999
CBRemLife
0 - 9999
5000
InactDayAlm
0 - 9999
Day
2000
InactDayInit
0 - 9999
Day
InactHourAlm
0 - 23
Hour
681
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.18.6
Monitored data
Table 512:
Name
14.18.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CBOTRVT
REAL
ms
CBCLTRVT
REAL
ms
SPRCHRT
REAL
NO_OPR
INTEGER
NOOPRDAY
INTEGER
CBLIFE_A
INTEGER
CBLIFE_B
INTEGER
CBLIFE_C
INTEGER
IACC_A
REAL
IACC_B
REAL
IACC_C
REAL
Operation principle
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes a number of metering and
monitoring subfunctions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the
Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable. The
operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to Disabled.
The operation of the functions can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
682
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
CBOPEN
POSCLOSE
POSOPEN
I_A
I3P
Circuit
breaker
status
52a
CBINVPOS
I_B
I_B
Operation
monitoring
NOOPRALM
BLK_ALM
BLOCK
Breaker
contact
travel time
TRVTRST
Operation
counter
Accumulated energy
IACCRST
TRVTOAL
TRVTCAL
OPRALM
OPRLOALM
IACCALM
IACCLOAL
Breaker
life time
CBLIFEAL
Spring
charge
indication
SPRCHRAL
CBCNTRST
SPRCHRGN
SPRCHRGD
TRVTRST
Gas
pressure
supervision
ALMPRES
LOPRES
PRESALM
PRELO
GUID-FE21BBDC-57A6-425C-B22B-8E646C1BD932-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 309:
14.18.7.1
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
the breaker status monitoring can be described using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
POSCLOSE
Contact
position
indicator
POSOPEN
I_A
I3P
I_B
I_C
Phase
current
check
CBOPEN
CBINVPOS
52a
GUID-60ADC120-4B5A-40D8-B1C5-475E4634214B-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 310:
14.18.7.2
684
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
GUID-82C88B52-1812-477F-8B1A-3011A300547A V1 EN
Figure 311:
Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for
circuit breaker operation monitoring
Inactivity timer
The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive,
that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state. The calculation is done by
monitoring the states of the POSOPEN and POSCLOSE auxiliary contacts.
The inactive days NOOPRDAY is available through the Monitored data view. It is also
possible to set the initial inactive days by using the InactDayInit parameter.
14.18.7.3
GUID-4D82C157-53AF-40C9-861C-CF131B49072B V1 EN
Figure 312:
685
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
GUID-3AD25F5A-639A-4941-AA61-E69FA2357AFE V1 EN
There is a time difference t1 between the start of the main contact opening and the
opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. Similarly, there is a time gap t2 between
the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is
completely open. Therefore, in order to incorporate the time t1+t2, a correction factor
needs to be added with tOpen to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with
the OpenTimeCorr (=t1+t2). The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with
the CloseTimeCorr (t3+t4) setting to the measured closing time.
The last measured opening travel time tTravelOpen and the closing travel time
tTravelClose are available through the Monitored data view on the LHMI or
through tools via communications.
686
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.18.7.4
Operation counter
The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles.
Both open and close operations are included in one operation cycle. The operation
counter value is updated after each open operation.
The operation of the subfunction can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
GUID-FF1221A4-6160-4F92-9E7F-A412875B69E1 V1 EN
Figure 313:
Operation counter
The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of the
binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
The number of operations NO_OPR is available through the Monitored data view on
the LHMI or through tools via communications. The old circuit breaker operation
counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the CountInitVal parameter
and can be reset by Clear CB wear in the clear menu from LHMI.
14.18.7.5
Accumulation of Iyt
Accumulation of the Iyt module calculates the accumulated energy.
The operation of the module can be described by using a module diagram. All the
modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
687
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
I_A
I3P
I_B
I_C
Accumulated energy
calculator
Alarm limit
check
IACCLOAL
IACCALM
POSCLOSE
IACCRST
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
GUID-DAC3746F-DFBF-4186-A99D-1D972578D32A-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 314:
GUID-75502A39-4835-4F43-A7ED-A80DC7C1DFA2 V1 EN
Figure 315:
The DiffTimeCorr setting is used instead of the auxiliary contact to accumulate the
energy from the time the main contact opens. If the setting is positive, the calculation
of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to
the value set with the DiffTimeCorr setting. When the setting is negative, the
calculation starts in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary contact opens.
The accumulated energy outputs IACC_A (_B, _C) are available through the
Monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications. The values
688
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
can be reset by setting the Clear accum. breaking curr setting to on in the clear menu
from LHMI.
14.18.7.6
I3P
I_B
I_C
CB life
estimator
Alarm limit
check
CBLIFEAL
POSCLOSE
CBCNTRST
BLOCK
BLK_ALM
GUID-1565CD41-3ABF-4DE7-AF68-51623380DF29-ANSI V1 EN
Figure 316:
Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker
689
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The remaining life is calculated separately for all three phases and it is available as a
monitored data value CBLIFE_A (_B, _C). The values can be cleared by setting
the parameter CB wear values in the clear menu from LHMI.
Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter.
14.18.7.7
GUID-37EB9FAE-8129-45AB-B9F7-7F7DC829E3ED V1 EN
Figure 317:
690
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.18.7.8
0-tPressAlm
0
LOPRES
0-TPressLO
BLOCK
PRESALM
PRESLO
BLK_ALM
ANSI11000293-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000293 V1 EN
Figure 318:
The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals LOPRES and ALMPRES.
691
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the
BLOCK input deactivates all outputs and resets internal timers. The alarm signals from
the function can be blocked by activating the binary input BLK_ALM.
14.18.8
Technical data
Table 513:
Function
Range or value
Accuracy
(0-200) ms
0.5% 25 ms
(0 - 9999)
(0.00-60.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00-60.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
(0.00-60.00) s
0.5% 25 ms
14.19
14.19.1
Functionality
103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on
connected signals.
The measurand reporting interval set for MMXU function blocks, using the xDbRepInt
and xAngDbRepInt settings, must be coordinated with the event reporting interval set
for the IEC 60870-5-103 communication using setting CycMeasRepTime.
692
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
GUID-B8A3A04C-430D-4488-9F72-8529FAB0B17D V1 EN
Figure 319:
14.19.2
Function block
I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F
ANSI10000287-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000287 V1 EN
Figure 320:
693
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.19.3
Signals
Table 514:
Name
14.19.4
Table 515:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
IL1
REAL
0.0
IL2
REAL
0.0
IL3
REAL
0.0
IN
REAL
0.0
UL1
REAL
0.0
UL2
REAL
0.0
UL3
REAL
0.0
UL1L2
REAL
0.0
UN
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
REAL
0.0
Settings
I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
MaxIL1
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIL2
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIL3
1 - 99999
3000
MaxIN
1 - 99999
3000
MaxUL1
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxUL2
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxUL3
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxUL1-UL2
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
400.00
MaxUN
0.05 - 2000.00
kV
0.05
230.00
MaxP
0.00 - 2000.00
MW
0.05
1200.00
MaxQ
0.00 - 2000.00
MVA
0.05
1200.00
MaxF
45.0 - 66.0
Hz
1.0
51.0
694
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.20
14.20.1
Functionality
I103MEASUSR is a function block with user defined input measurands in monitor
direction. These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
the private range, and the Information number parameter for each block.
14.20.2
Function block
I103MEASUSR
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
IEC10000288-1-en.vsd
IEC10000288 V1 EN
Figure 321:
14.20.3
Signals
Table 516:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
REAL
0.0
INPUT2
REAL
0.0
INPUT3
REAL
0.0
INPUT4
REAL
0.0
INPUT5
REAL
0.0
INPUT6
REAL
0.0
INPUT7
REAL
0.0
INPUT8
REAL
0.0
INPUT9
REAL
0.0
695
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.20.4
Table 517:
Name
Settings
I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
25
InfNo
1 - 255
MaxMeasur1
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur2
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur3
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur4
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur5
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur6
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur7
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur8
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
MaxMeasur9
0.05 10000000000.00
0.05
1000.00
14.21
14.21.1
Functionality
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
696
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.21.2
Function block
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_BLKD
IEC10000289-2-en.vsd
IEC10000289 V2 EN
Figure 322:
14.21.3
Signals
Table 518:
Name
14.21.4
Table 519:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
16_ARACT
BOOLEAN
128_CBON
BOOLEAN
130_BLKD
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103AR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
14.22
14.22.1
Functionality
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for ground fault indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
697
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.22.2
Function block
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
IEC10000290-1-en.vsd
IEC10000290 V1 EN
Figure 323:
14.22.3
Signals
Table 520:
Name
14.22.4
Table 521:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
51_EFFW
BOOLEAN
52_EFREV
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103EF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
160
Description
Function type (1-255)
14.23
14.23.1
Functionality
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor direction. Each input on the
function block is specific for a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For example: 68_TRGEN represents
the General Trip of the device, and therefore must be connected to the general trip
signal SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
The delay observed in the protocol is the time difference in between the signal that is
triggering the Disturbance Recorder and the respective configured signal to the IEC
60870-5-103 I103FLTPROT.
698
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.23.2
Function block
I103FLTPROT
BLOCK
64_PU_A
65_PU_B
66_PU_C
67_STIN
68_TRGEN
69_TR_A
70_TR_B
71_TR_C
72_TRBKUP
73_SCL
74_FW
75_REV
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
84_STGEN
85_BFP
86_MTR_A
87_MTR_B
88_MTR_C
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FLTLOC
ANSI10000291-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000291 V1 EN
Figure 324:
14.23.3
Signals
Table 522:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
64_PU_A
BOOLEAN
65_PU_B
BOOLEAN
66_PU_C
BOOLEAN
67_STIN
BOOLEAN
68_TRGEN
BOOLEAN
69_TR_A
BOOLEAN
70_TR_B
BOOLEAN
71_TR_C
BOOLEAN
72_TRBKUP
BOOLEAN
699
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
Name
14.23.4
Table 523:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
73_SCL
REAL
74_FW
BOOLEAN
75_REV
BOOLEAN
76_TRANS
BOOLEAN
77_RECEV
BOOLEAN
78_ZONE1
BOOLEAN
79_ZONE2
BOOLEAN
80_ZONE3
BOOLEAN
81_ZONE4
BOOLEAN
82_ZONE5
BOOLEAN
84_STGEN
BOOLEAN
85_BFP
BOOLEAN
86_MTR_A
BOOLEAN
87_MTR_B
BOOLEAN
88_MTR_C
BOOLEAN
89_MTRN
BOOLEAN
90_IOC
BOOLEAN
91_IOC
BOOLEAN
92_IEF
BOOLEAN
93_IEF
BOOLEAN
ARINPROG
BOOLEAN
FLTLOC
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103FLTPROT Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
128
Description
Function type (1-255)
700
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.24
14.24.1
Functionality
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction. This
block uses parameter as FunctionType, and information number parameter is defined
for each input signal.
14.24.2
Function block
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
21_TESTM
22_SETCH
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
IEC10000292-2-en.vsd
IEC10000292 V2 EN
Figure 325:
14.24.3
Signals
Table 524:
Name
14.24.4
Table 525:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
19_LEDRS
BOOLEAN
21_TESTM
BOOLEAN
22_SETCH
BOOLEAN
23_GRP1
BOOLEAN
24_GRP2
BOOLEAN
25_GRP3
BOOLEAN
26_GRP4
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103IED Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
701
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.25
14.25.1
Functionality
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for supervision indications in
monitor direction. This block includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
information number parameter is defined for each output signal.
14.25.2
Function block
I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
IEC10000293-1-en.vsd
IEC10000293 V1 EN
Figure 326:
14.25.3
Signals
Table 526:
Name
14.25.4
Table 527:
Name
FunctionType
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
32_MEASI
BOOLEAN
33_MEASU
BOOLEAN
37_IBKUP
BOOLEAN
38_VTFF
BOOLEAN
46_GRWA
BOOLEAN
47_GRAL
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
1 - 255
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
1
Description
Function type (1-255)
702
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.26
14.26.1
Functionality
I103USRDEF is a function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction.
These function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private
range, and the information number parameter for each input signal.
I103USRDEF can be used, for example in mapping the INF numbers not supported
directly by specific function blocks, like: INF17, INF18, INF20 or INF35. After
connecting the appropriate signals to the I103USRDEF inputs, the user must also set
the InfNo_x values in the settings.
GUID-391D4145-B7E6-4174-B3F7-753ADDA4D06F V1 EN
Figure 327:
14.26.2
IEC 60870-5-103I103USRDEF:1
Function block
I103USRDEF
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
IEC10000294-1-en.vsd
IEC10000294 V1 EN
Figure 328:
703
Technical Manual
Section 14
Monitoring
14.26.3
Signals
Table 528:
Name
14.26.4
Table 529:
Name
Type
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
INPUT1
BOOLEAN
INPUT2
BOOLEAN
INPUT3
BOOLEAN
INPUT4
BOOLEAN
INPUT5
BOOLEAN
INPUT6
BOOLEAN
INPUT7
BOOLEAN
INPUT8
BOOLEAN
Settings
I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
FunctionType
1 - 255
InfNo_1
1 - 255
InfNo_2
1 - 255
InfNo_3
1 - 255
InfNo_4
1 - 255
InfNo_5
1 - 255
InfNo_6
1 - 255
InfNo_7
1 - 255
InfNo_8
1 - 255
704
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
Section 15
Metering
15.1
15.1.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Pulse counter
IEC 60617
identification
PCGGIO
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
S00947 V1 EN
15.1.2
Functionality
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the BIO (binary input/output) module
and then read by the PCGGIO function. A scaled service value is available over the
station bus.
15.1.3
Function block
PCGGIO
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT
INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC09000335-2-en.vsd
IEC09000335 V2 EN
Figure 329:
705
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
15.1.4
Signals
Table 530:
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
Block of function
READ_VAL
BOOLEAN
BI_PULSE
BOOLEAN
RS_CNT
BOOLEAN
Name
Table 532:
Name
Description
BLOCK
Table 531:
15.1.5
Default
Type
Description
INVALID
BOOLEAN
RESTART
BOOLEAN
BLOCKED
BOOLEAN
NEW_VAL
BOOLEAN
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Settings
PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Off
On
Off
Operation Off/On
EventMask
NoEvents
ReportEvents
NoEvents
CountCriteria
Off
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
RisingEdge
Scale
1.000 - 90000.000
0.001
1.000
Quantity
Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
Count
tReporting
1 - 3600
60
706
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
15.1.6
Monitored data
Table 533:
Name
15.1.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
CNT_VAL
INTEGER
SCAL_VAL
REAL
Operation principle
The registration of pulses is done according to setting of CountCriteria parameter on
one of the 9 binary input channels located on the BIO module. Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
active counters can also be read by IEC 61850.
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental
counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit
format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter value is stored in semiretain memory.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:
The transmission of the counter value can be done as a service value, that is, the value
frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the database.
PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is finished and
activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be time tagged,
and transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value
was frozen by the function.
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to logics, which are intended
to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI. As long as the
BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected to
707
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.
The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.
15.1.8
Technical data
Table 534:
Function
Cycle time for report of
counter value
Setting range
(13600) s
Accuracy
-
708
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
15.2
15.2.1
Identification
Function description
Energy calculation and demand
handling
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 60617
identification
ETPMMTR
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Wh
IEC10000169 V1 EN
15.2.2
Functionality
Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate energy
consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and export
direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function.
15.2.3
Function block
ETPMMTR
P
Q
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
ACCST
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC09000104 V1 EN
Figure 330:
709
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
15.2.4
Signals
Table 535:
Name
Default
Description
REAL
REAL
STACC
BOOLEAN
RSTACC
BOOLEAN
RSTDMD
BOOLEAN
Table 536:
Name
Description
ACCST
BOOLEAN
EAFPULSE
BOOLEAN
EARPULSE
BOOLEAN
ERFPULSE
BOOLEAN
ERRPULSE
BOOLEAN
EAFALM
BOOLEAN
EARALM
BOOLEAN
ERFALM
BOOLEAN
ERRALM
BOOLEAN
EAFACC
REAL
EARACC
REAL
ERFACC
REAL
ERRACC
REAL
MAXPAFD
REAL
MAXPARD
REAL
MAXPRFD
REAL
MAXPRRD
REAL
710
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
15.2.5
Table 537:
Name
Settings
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Enable/Disable
StartAcc
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
tEnergy
1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
1 Minute
tEnergyOnPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
1.000
tEnergyOffPls
0.000 - 60.000
0.001
0.500
EAFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
EARAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
100.000
ERFAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
ERRAccPlsQty
0.001 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
100.000
Table 538:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
EALim
0.001 10000000000.000
MWh
0.001
1000000.000
ERLim
0.001 10000000000.000
MVArh
0.001
1000.000
EnZeroClamp
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
LevZeroClampP
0.001 - 10000.000
MW
0.001
10.000
LevZeroClampQ
0.001 - 10000.000
MVAr
0.001
10.000
DirEnergyAct
Forward
Reverse
Forward
DirEnergyReac
Forward
Reverse
Forward
EAFPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
EARPrestVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MWh
0.001
0.000
ERFPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
ERRPresetVal
0.000 - 10000.000
MVArh
0.001
0.000
711
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
15.2.6
Monitored data
Table 539:
Name
15.2.7
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
EAFACC
REAL
MWh
EARACC
REAL
MWh
ERFACC
REAL
MVArh
ERRACC
REAL
MVArh
MAXPAFD
REAL
MW
MAXPARD
REAL
MW
MAXPRFD
REAL
MVAr
MAXPRRD
REAL
MVAr
Operation principle
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
(CVMMXN) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to
measure the integrated energy. The energy values (in MWh and MVarh) are available
as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter.
Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy
values can be reset from the local HMI reset menu or with input signal RSTACC.
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time interval tEnergy. The maximum values are updated every minute and stored in a
register available over communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD,
MAXPRFD, MAXPRRD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse
direction until reset with input signal RSTDMD or from the local HMI reset menu.
712
Technical Manual
Section 15
Metering
CVMMXN
P_INST
Q_INST
ETPMMTR
P
Q
TRUE
FALSE
FALSE
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD
IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN
Figure 331:
15.2.8
Technical data
Table 540:
Function
Energy metering
Accuracy
Input from MMXU. No extra error
at steady load
713
Technical Manual
714
Section 16
Station communication
Section 16
Station communication
16.1
DNP3 protocol
DNP3 (Distributed Network Protocol) is a set of communications protocols used to
communicate data between components in process automation systems. For a detailed
description of the DNP3 protocol, see the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.
16.2
16.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
16.2.2
IEC 61850
identification
IEC 61850-8-1
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The IED supports the communication protocols IEC 61850-8-1 and DNP3 over TCP/
IP. All operational information and controls are available through these protocols.
However, some communication functions, for example, horizontal communication
(GOOSE) between the IEDs, is only enabled by the IEC 61850-8-1 communication
protocol.
The IED is equipped with optical Ethernet rear port(s) for the substation
communication standard IEC 61850-8-1. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent
electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according to GOOSE is
part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
Disturbance files are accessed using the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. Disturbance files are
also available to any Ethernet based application via FTP in the standard Comtrade
format. Further, the IED can send and receive binary values, double point values and
measured values (for example from MMXU functions), together with their quality bit,
using the IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE profile. The IED meets the GOOSE performance
requirements for tripping applications in substations, as defined by the IEC 61850
715
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
standard. The IED interoperates with other IEC 61850-compliant IEDs, and systems
and simultaneously reports events to five different clients on the IEC 61850 station bus.
The Denial of Service functions DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT are included to limit the
inbound network traffic. The communication can thus never compromise the primary
functionality of the IED.
The event system has a rate limiter to reduce CPU load. The event channel has a quota
of 10 events/second after the initial 30 events/second. If the quota is exceeded the
event channel transmission is blocked until the event changes is below the quota, no
event is lost.
All communication connectors, except for the front port connector, are placed on
integrated communication modules. The IED is connected to Ethernet-based
communication systems via the fibre-optic multimode LC connector(s) (100BASE-FX).
The IED supports SNTP and IRIG-B time synchronization methods with a timestamping accuracy of 1 ms.
The IED supports IEC 60870-5-103 time synchronization methods with a time
stamping accuracy of 5 ms.
16.2.3
Serial
Glass fibre (ST connector)
EIA-485
IEC 6185081
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
= Supported
716
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.2.4
Table 542:
Name
Settings
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Operation
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
PortSelGOOSE
Front
LAN1
LAN1
PortSelMMS
Front
LAN1
Front+LAN1
LAN1
16.2.5
Technical data
Table 543:
Communication protocol
Function
Value
Protocol TCP/IP
Ethernet
100 Mbit/s
Protocol
IEC 6185081
100BASE-FX
Protocol
DNP3.0/TCP
100BASE-FX
Protocol, serial
IEC 608705103
9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol, serial
DNP3.0
30019200 Bd
16.3
16.3.1
Identification
Function description
Horizontal communication via GOOSE
for interlocking
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEINTLKR
CV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
717
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.3.2
Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK
^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL
IEC09000099_1_en.vsd
IEC09000099 V1 EN
Figure 332:
16.3.3
Signals
Table 544:
Name
BLOCK
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
718
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
Table 545:
Name
Description
RESREQ
BOOLEAN
Reservation request
RESGRANT
BOOLEAN
Reservation granted
APP1_OP
BOOLEAN
APP1_CL
BOOLEAN
APP1VAL
BOOLEAN
APP2_OP
BOOLEAN
APP2_CL
BOOLEAN
APP2VAL
BOOLEAN
APP3_OP
BOOLEAN
APP3_CL
BOOLEAN
APP3VAL
BOOLEAN
APP4_OP
BOOLEAN
APP4_CL
BOOLEAN
APP4VAL
BOOLEAN
APP5_OP
BOOLEAN
APP5_CL
BOOLEAN
APP5VAL
BOOLEAN
APP6_OP
BOOLEAN
APP6_CL
BOOLEAN
APP6VAL
BOOLEAN
APP7_OP
BOOLEAN
APP7_CL
BOOLEAN
APP7VAL
BOOLEAN
APP8_OP
BOOLEAN
APP8_CL
BOOLEAN
APP8VAL
BOOLEAN
APP9_OP
BOOLEAN
APP9_CL
BOOLEAN
APP9VAL
BOOLEAN
APP10_OP
BOOLEAN
APP10_CL
BOOLEAN
APP10VAL
BOOLEAN
APP11_OP
BOOLEAN
APP11_CL
BOOLEAN
APP11VAL
BOOLEAN
Section 16
Station communication
Name
Type
BOOLEAN
APP12_CL
BOOLEAN
APP12VAL
BOOLEAN
APP13_OP
BOOLEAN
APP13_CL
BOOLEAN
APP13VAL
BOOLEAN
APP14_OP
BOOLEAN
APP14_CL
BOOLEAN
APP14VAL
BOOLEAN
APP15_OP
BOOLEAN
APP15_CL
BOOLEAN
APP15VAL
BOOLEAN
COM_VAL
BOOLEAN
16.3.4
Settings
Table 546:
Name
Operation
Description
APP12_OP
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Description
Disabled
Operation Disabled/Enabled
16.4
16.4.1
Identification
Function description
Goose binary receive
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEBINRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
720
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.4.2
Function block
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK
^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL
IEC09000236_en.vsd
IEC09000236 V1 EN
Figure 333:
16.4.3
Signals
Table 547:
Name
BLOCK
Table 548:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of output signals
Description
OUT1
BOOLEAN
Binary output 1
OUT1VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT2
BOOLEAN
Binary output 2
OUT2VAL
BOOLEAN
721
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
Name
16.4.4
Table 549:
Name
Operation
Type
Description
OUT3
BOOLEAN
Binary output 3
OUT3VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT4
BOOLEAN
Binary output 4
OUT4VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT5
BOOLEAN
Binary output 5
OUT5VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT6
BOOLEAN
Binary output 6
OUT6VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT7
BOOLEAN
Binary output 7
OUT7VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT8
BOOLEAN
Binary output 8
OUT8VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT9
BOOLEAN
Binary output 9
OUT9VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT10
BOOLEAN
Binary output 10
OUT10VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT11
BOOLEAN
Binary output 11
OUT11VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT12
BOOLEAN
Binary output 12
OUT12VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT13
BOOLEAN
Binary output 13
OUT13VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT14
BOOLEAN
Binary output 14
OUT14VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT15
BOOLEAN
Binary output 15
OUT15VAL
BOOLEAN
OUT16
BOOLEAN
Binary output 16
OUT16VAL
BOOLEAN
Settings
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled
722
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.5
16.5.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.5.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSEDPRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEDPRCV is used to receive a double point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
16.5.3
Function block
GOOSEDPRCV
BLOCK
^DPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000249-1-en.vsd
IEC10000249 V1 EN
Figure 334:
16.5.4
Signals
Table 550:
Name
BLOCK
Table 551:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Description
DPOUT
INTEGER
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
723
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.5.5
Table 552:
Name
Operation
16.5.6
Settings
GOOSEDPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Enable/Disable
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a
cross to receive the double point values.
16.6
16.6.1
Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive an
integer value
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEINTRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
724
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.6.2
Functionality
GOOSEINTRCV is used to receive an integer value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
16.6.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEINTRCV
^INTOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000250-1-en.vsd
IEC10000250 V1 EN
Figure 335:
16.6.4
Signals
Table 553:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 554:
Table 555:
Name
Operation
16.6.6
Description
Block of function
Name
16.6.5
Default
Type
Description
INTOUT
INTEGER
Integer output
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEINTRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Off/On
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
725
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a
cross to receive the integer values.
16.7
16.7.1
Identification
Function description
GOOSE function block to receive a
measurand value
16.7.2
IEC 61850
identification
GOOSEMVRCV
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSEMVRCV is used to receive measured value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
16.7.3
Function block
BLOCK
GOOSEMVRCV
^MVOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000251-1-en.vsd
IEC10000251 V1 EN
Figure 336:
726
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.7.4
Signals
Table 556:
Name
Type
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Table 557:
Table 558:
Name
Operation
16.7.6
Description
Block of function
Name
16.7.5
Default
Type
Description
MVOUT
REAL
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
Settings
GOOSEMVRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Enable/Disable
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a
cross to receive the float values.
727
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.8
16.8.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
16.8.2
IEC 60617
identification
GOOSESPRCV
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
GOOSESPRCV is used to receive a single point value using IEC61850 protocol via
GOOSE.
16.8.3
Function block
GOOSESPRCV
BLOCK
^SPOUT
DATAVALID
COMMVALID
TEST
IEC10000248-1-en.vsd
IEC10000248 V1 EN
Figure 337:
16.8.4
Signals
Table 559:
Name
BLOCK
Table 560:
Name
Default
0
Description
Block of function
Description
SPOUT
BOOLEAN
DATAVALID
BOOLEAN
COMMVALID
BOOLEAN
TEST
BOOLEAN
Test output
728
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.8.5
Table 561:
Name
Operation
16.8.6
Settings
GOOSESPRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Disabled
Description
Operation Off/On
Operation principle
The DATAVALID output will be HIGH if the incoming message is with valid data.
The COMMVALID output will become LOW when the sending IED is under total
failure condition and the GOOSE transmission from the sending IED does not happen.
The TEST output will go HIGH if the sending IED is in test mode.
The input of this GOOSE block must be linked in SMT by means of a
cross to receive the binary single point values.
16.9
16.9.1
Functionality
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer
rate up to 19200 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a
secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle.
The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages.
Function blocks available for the IEC 608705103 protocol are described in sections
Control and Monitoring.The Communication protocol manual for IEC 60870-5-103
includes the 650 series vendor specific IEC 60870-5-103 implementation.
729
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol can be configured to use either the optical serial or RS485
serial communication interface on the COM03 or the COM05 communication module.
The functions Operation selection for optical serial OPTICALPROT and Operation
selection for RS485 RS485PROT are used to select the communication interface.
See the Engineering manual for IEC103 60870-5-103 engineering
procedures in PCM600.
The function IEC60870-5-103 Optical serial communication, OPTICAL103, is used to
configure the communication parameters for the optical serial communication
interface. The function IEC60870-5-103 serial communication for RS485, RS485103,
is used to configure the communication parameters for the RS485 serial
communication interface.
16.9.2
Table 562:
Settings
OPTICAL103 Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 255
Slave address
BaudRate
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
RevPolarity
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Invert polarity
CycMeasRepTime
1.0 - 1800.0
0.1
5.0
MasterTimeDomain
UTC
Local
Local with DST
UTC
TimeSyncMode
IEDTime
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
IEDTime
EvalTimeAccuracy
Disabled
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
5ms
EventRepMode
SeqOfEvent
HiPriSpont
SeqOfEvent
730
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
Table 563:
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
SlaveAddress
1 - 255
Slave address
BaudRate
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
9600 Bd
CycMeasRepTime
1.0 - 1800.0
0.1
5.0
MasterTimeDomain
UTC
Local
Local with DST
UTC
TimeSyncMode
IEDTime
LinMastTime
IEDTimeSkew
IEDTime
EvalTimeAccuracy
Disabled
5ms
10ms
20ms
40ms
5ms
EventRepMode
SeqOfEvent
HiPriSpont
SeqOfEvent
16.10
16.10.1
IEC 61850
identification
PRPSTATUS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is available
as option in the Customized 650 Ver 1.3 series IEDs, and the selection is made at
ordering. Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 2
uses both ports LAN1A and LAN1B on the COM03 module.
Select COM03 for redundant station bus according to IEC 62439-3
Edition 2 protocol, at the time of ordering.
IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 is NOT compatible with IEC 62439-3 Edition 1.
731
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.10.2
Principle of operation
The redundant station bus communication is configured using the local HMI, Main
Menu/Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuation/ETHLAN1_AB. The
settings are also visible in PST in PCM600.
The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is
transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one
channel is compared with the data package identity from the other channel. If the
identity is the same, the last package is discarded.
PRPSTATUS supervises redundant communication on the two channels. If no data
package has been received on one or both channels within the last 10 s, the output LAN1A and/or LAN1-B are set to indicate error.
732
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
Data
Data
Switch A
Switch B
1 2
1 2
Data
Data
IED
COM03
PRPSTATUS
IEC13000003-1-en.vsd
IEC13000003 V1 EN
Figure 338:
16.10.3
Function block
PRPSTATUS
LAN1-A
LAN1-B
IEC13000011-1-en.vsd
IEC13000011 V1 EN
Figure 339:
733
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
Table 564:
Name
16.10.4
Type
Description
LAN1-A
BOOLEAN
LAN1-B
BOOLEAN
Setting parameters
The PRPSTATUS function has no user settings.
However, the redundant communication is configured in the LHMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/TCP-IP configuration/ETHLAN1_AB where
Operation mode, IPAddress and IPMask are configured.
16.11
16.11.1
16.11.2
Table 565:
Name
Settings
ACTIVLOG Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ExtLogSrv1Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv1IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv2Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv2Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv2IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
734
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ExtLogSrv3Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv3Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv3IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv4Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv4Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv4IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv5Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv5Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv5IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
ExtLogSrv6Type
Disabled
ExtLogSrv1Type
SYSLOG TCP/IP
CEF TCP/IP
Disabled
ExtLogSrv6Port
1 - 65535
514
ExtLogSrv6IP
0 - 18
IP
Address
127.0.0.1
16.12
16.12.1
735
Technical Manual
Section 16
Station communication
16.13
16.13.1
16.13.2
Signals
Table 566:
Name
16.13.3
Table 567:
Name
Operation
Type
Description
EVENTID
INTEGER
SEQNUMBER
INTEGER
Settings
SECALARM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled
Unit
-
Step
-
Default
Enabled
Description
Operation On/Off
736
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Section 17
17.1
17.1.1
Functionality
The Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG and SELFSUPEVLST
function reacts to internal system events generated by the different built-in selfsupervision elements. The internal events are saved in an internal event list presented
on the LHMI and in PCM600 event viewer tool.
17.1.2
17.1.2.1
Identification
17.1.2.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
INTERRSIG
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
INTERRSIG
FAIL
WARNING
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
DISABLE
ANSI09000334-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000334 V1 EN
Figure 340:
737
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.1.2.3
Signals
Table 568:
Name
17.1.2.4
Type
Description
FAIL
BOOLEAN
Internal fail
WARNING
BOOLEAN
Internal warning
TSYNCERR
BOOLEAN
RTCERR
BOOLEAN
DISABLE
BOOLEAN
Application Disable
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
17.1.3
17.1.3.1
Identification
Function description
Internal event list
17.1.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
SELFSUPEVLST
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
17.1.4
Operation principle
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:
The SELFSUPEVLST function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
738
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Watchdog
TX overflow
Master resp.
Supply fault
Power supply
module
Fault
I/O nodes
Fault
AND
ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL
Internal Fail (CPU)
CEM
Fault
IEC09000390-1-en.vsd
IEC09000390 V1 EN
Figure 341:
739
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
LIODEV FAIL
LIODEV STOPPED
LIODEV STARTED
OR
S
R
e.g.BIO1- ERROR
OR
WDOG STARVED
RTE FATAL ERROR
FTF FATAL ERROR
S
R
S
R
OR Internal Warning
GENTS RTC OK
S
R
Internal Fail
OR
OR
SW Watchdog Error
Runtime Exec Error
S
R
OR
S
R
S
R
Change lock
GENTS SYNC OK
CHANGE LOCK ON
CHANGE LOCK OFF
SETTINGS CHANGED
SETTINGS CHANGED
Settings changed
ANSI09000381-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000381 V2 EN
Figure 342:
Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from
INTERRSIG function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.
The signals from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary
outputs for signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other
functions if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from
the time synchronization block INTERRSIG.
740
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.1.4.1
Internal signals
SELFSUPEVLST function provides several status signals, that tells about the
condition of the IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED,
they are also called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.
Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 569.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 570.
Name of signal
Description
Internal Fail
Internal Warning
IEC61850 Error
SW Watchdog Error
Setting(s) Changed
Setting(s) changed
Change Lock
DNP3 Error
Table 570:
Card
Description
PSM
PSM-Error
TRM
TRM-Error
COM
COM-Error
BIO
BIO-Error
AIM
AIM-Error
741
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Table 571:
Name of signal
17.1.4.2
Internal Fail
Internal Warning
This signal will be active if there is a hardware error with the real
time clock.
IEC61850 Error
This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed
in some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup,
for example.
SW Watchdog Error
This signal will be activated when the IED has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems
background task is used for the measurements.
Setting(s) Changed
Change Lock
This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup
file are corrupted and cannot be recovered.
DNP3 Error
Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 343.
742
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
ADx
ADx_Low
x1
u1
x2
ADx_High
ADx
Controller
x1
u1
x2
IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN
Figure 343:
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal
conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An
alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it
improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller
function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. The ADx_Controller function is included in all IEDs equipped with an analog
input module. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is
the validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, that
is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher
ADx_HI.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will
be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.
17.1.5
Technical data
Table 572:
Data
Value
Recording manner
List size
743
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.2
Time synchronization
17.2.1
Functionality
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute
time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to
compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time
synchronization source.
17.2.2
17.2.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Time synchronization
17.2.2.2
Table 573:
Name
TIMESYNCHGE
N
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
CoarseSyncSrc
Disabled
SNTP
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
Disabled
FineSyncSource
Disabled
SNTP
IRIG-B
Disabled
SyncMaster
Disabled
SNTP-Server
Disabled
17.2.3
17.2.3.1
Identification
Function description
Time synchronization via SNTP
IEC 61850
identification
SNTP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
744
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.2.3.2
Table 574:
Name
Settings
SNTP Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ServerIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
Server IP-address
RedServIP-Add
0 - 255
IP
Address
0.0.0.0
17.2.4
17.2.4.1
Identification
Function description
Time system, summer time begins
IEC 61850
identification
DSTBEGIN
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
745
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.2.4.2
Table 575:
Name
Settings
DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
March
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
00:00
00:30
1:00
1:30
...
48:00
1:00
17.2.5
17.2.5.1
Identification
Function description
Time system, summer time ends
IEC 61850
identification
DSTEND
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
746
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.2.5.2
Table 576:
Name
Settings
DSTEND Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MonthInYear
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
October
DayInWeek
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
WeekInMonth
Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Last
UTCTimeOfDay
00:00
00:30
1:00
1:30
...
48:00
1:00
17.2.6
17.2.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
17.2.6.2
Table 577:
Name
NoHalfHourUTC
TIMEZONE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
-24 - 24
Unit
-
Step
1
Default
0
Description
Number of half-hours from UTC
747
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.2.7
17.2.7.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
17.2.7.2
Table 578:
Name
IRIG-B
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
IRIG-B Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TimeDomain
LocalTime
UTC
LocalTime
Time domain
Encoding
IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ
IRIG-B
Type of encoding
TimeZoneAs1344
MinusTZ
PlusTZ
PlusTZ
17.2.8
Operation principle
17.2.8.1
General concepts
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time
the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the
time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.
748
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
IRIG-B
DNP
IEC60870-5-103
Events
Protection
and control
functions
SW- time
ANSI09000210-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000210 V1 EN
Figure 344:
Synchronization principle
Synchronization from
a higher level
Function
Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level
IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN
Figure 345:
Synchronization principle
749
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.2.8.2
During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off,
the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time
the time will be lost completely.
Coarse time synchronization is used to set the time on the very first message and if any
message has an offset of more than ten seconds. If no FineSyncSource is given, the
CoarseSyncSource is used to synchronize the time.
Fine time synchronization is used to set the time on the first message after a time reset
or if the source may always set the fine time, and the source gives a large offset
towards the IED time. After this, the time is used to synchronize the time after a spike
filter, i.e. if the source glitches momentarily or there is a momentary error, this is
neglected. FineSyncSource that may always set the time is only IRIG-B.
It is not recommended to use SNTP as both fine and coarse synchronization source, as
some clocks sometimes send out a bad message. For example, Arbiter clocks
sometimes send out a "zero-time message", which if SNTP is set as coarse
synchronization source (with or without SNTP as fine synchronization source) leads to
a jump to "2036-02-07 06:28" and back. In all cases, except for demonstration, it is
recommended to use SNTP as FineSynchSource only.
Rate accuracy
In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for
a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is
constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.
All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally,
750
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if
more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.
17.2.8.3
Synchronization alternatives
Two main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The
synchronization message is applied either via any of the communication ports of the
IED as a telegram message including date and time or via IRIG-B.
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating
if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are one dedicated connector for the IRIG-B port. IRIG-B 00x
messages can be supplied via the galvanic interface, where x (in 00x) means a number
in the range of 1-7.
If the x in 00x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains information of
the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time within the year, and
year information has to come from the tool or local HMI.
751
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
The IRIG-B input also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-zone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages.
The DNP3 communication can be the source for the coarse time synchronization, while
the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy. See the
communication protocol manual for a detailed description of the DNP3 protocol.
The IEC60870-5-103 communication can be the source for the coarse time
synchronization, while the fine tuning of the time synchronization needs a source with
higher accuracy. See the communication protocol manual for a detailed description of
the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.
17.2.9
Technical data
Table 579:
Function
Value
1 ms
1.0 ms typically
1.0 ms typically
17.3
17.3.1
Functionality
Use the four different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can be applied to a variety of power system scenarios.
752
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.3.2
17.3.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
17.3.2.2
Table 580:
Name
SETGRPS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Settings
SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ActiveSetGrp
SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup1
ActiveSettingGroup
MaxNoSetGrp
1-4
17.3.3
17.3.3.1
Identification
Function description
Parameter setting groups
17.3.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
ACTVGRP
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1
ACTGRP2
ACTGRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP1
GRP2
GRP3
GRP4
GRP_CHGD
ANSI09000064-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000064 V1 EN
Figure 346:
753
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.3.3.3
Signals
Table 581:
Name
Type
Default
Description
ACTGRP1
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP2
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP3
BOOLEAN
ACTGRP4
BOOLEAN
Table 582:
Name
17.3.3.4
Description
GRP1
BOOLEAN
GRP2
BOOLEAN
GRP3
BOOLEAN
GRP4
BOOLEAN
GRP_CHGD
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any settings available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
17.3.4
Operation principle
Parameter setting groups (ACTVGRP) function has four functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Five functional output signals are available for
configuration purposes, so that information on the active setting group is always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACTVGRP function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
754
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to be activated, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a
pulse. This signal is normally connected to a SP16GGIO function block for external
communication.
The parameter MaxNoSetGrp defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1
IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4
ACTVGRP
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
GRP_CHGD
ANSI09000063_1_en.vsd
ANSIC09000063 V1 EN
Figure 347:
The above example also shows the five output signals, GRP1 to 4 for confirmation of
which group that is active, and the GRP_CHGD signal which is normally connected to
a SP16GGIO function block for external communication to higher level control systems.
17.4
17.4.1
Identification
Function description
Test mode functionality
IEC 61850
identification
TESTMODE
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
755
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.4.2
Functionality
When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. Activated TESTMODE is indicating by a flashing
yellow LED on the local HMI. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.
Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.
17.4.3
Function block
TESTMODE
INPUT
ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT
IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN
Figure 348:
17.4.4
Signals
Table 583:
Name
INPUT
Table 584:
Name
Default
0
Description
Sets terminal in test mode when active
Description
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
OUTPUT
BOOLEAN
SETTING
BOOLEAN
NOEVENT
BOOLEAN
756
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.4.5
Table 585:
Name
Settings
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
TestMode
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
EventDisable
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
CmdTestBit
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
17.4.6
Operation principle
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by
While the IED is in test mode, the output ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE
is activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of
the "Test mode: Enabled" state input from configuration (OUTPUT signal is
activated) or setting from local HMI (SETTING signal is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event
signalling.
Forcing of binary output signals is only possible when the IED is in test mode.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from
the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output
ACTIVE is activated). When leaving the test mode, and returning to normal operation,
these blockings are disabled and everything is set back to normal operation. All testing
will be done with actually set and configured parameter values within the IED. No
settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset. The released function will return to blocked state if test mode
is set to off.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
757
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED
will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also functions
that were unblocked before the change. During the re-entering to test
mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for a short time,
which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED
is set in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when
a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact
29-30) or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to
the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
commissioning or maintenance test.
17.5
17.5.1
Identification
Function description
Change lock function
17.5.2
IEC 61850
identification
CHNGLCK
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.
The change lock function activation is normally connected to a binary input.
When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the IED
configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes blocked"
will be displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be "Operation denied
by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be configured so that it is
controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This guarantees that by setting that
signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal
path to the CHNGLCK input, that logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently
758
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
issue a logical one to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of
these precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for remedial action.
17.5.3
Function block
CHNGLCK
LOCK*
ACTIVE
OVERRIDE
IEC09000062-1-en.vsd
IEC09000062 V1 EN
Figure 349:
17.5.4
Signals
Table 586:
Name
LOCK
Table 587:
Name
17.5.5
Default
0
Description
Activate change lock
Description
ACTIVE
BOOLEAN
OVERRIDE
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
17.5.6
Operation principle
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state
that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:
Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
759
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Set system time
Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group
The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:
Binary input
Function
Activated
Deactivated
17.6
17.6.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
IED identifiers
17.6.2
IEC 60617
identification
TERMINALID
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED
in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.
17.6.3
Table 588:
Name
Settings
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
StationName
0 - 18
Station name
Station name
StationNumber
0 - 99999
Station number
ObjectName
0 - 18
Object name
Object name
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
ObjectNumber
0 - 99999
Object number
UnitName
0 - 18
Unit name
Unit name
UnitNumber
0 - 99999
Unit number
IEDMainFunType
0 - 255
TechnicalKey
0 - 18
AA0J0Q0A0
Technical key
17.7
Product information
17.7.1
Identification
17.7.2
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
Product information
PRODINF
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set,
settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:
IEDProdType
ProductVer
ProductDef
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate
The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiers
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
17.7.3
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
761
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.8
17.8.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
17.8.2
PRIMVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
The rated system frequency and phasor rotation are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary values/PRIMVAL in the local HMI and
PCM600 parameter setting tree.
17.8.3
Table 589:
Name
Settings
PRIMVAL Non group settings (basic)
Unit
Step
Default
Frequency
Values (Range)
50.0 - 60.0
Hz
10.0
50.0
Description
Rated system frequency
PhaseRotation
Normal=ABC
Inverse=ACB
Normal=ABC
17.9
17.9.1
Functionality
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor
function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all
aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency,
harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by
the respective functions in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring).
The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
tool or the Application Configuration tool.
The SMAI function blocks for the 650 series of products are possible to
set for two cycle times either 5 or 20ms. The function blocks connected
762
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
to a SMAI function block shall always have the same cycle time as the
SMAI block.
17.9.2
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
17.9.3
SMAI_20_x
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
SMAI_20_1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
^GRP1_A
^GRP1_B
^GRP1_C
^GRP1_N
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
ANSI09000137-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000137 V1 EN
Figure 350:
SMAI_20_2
BLOCK
REVROT
^GRP2_A
^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C
^GRP2_N
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
ANSI09000138-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000138 V1 EN
Figure 351:
763
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.9.4
Signals
Table 590:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 1
DFTSPFC
REAL
20.0
REVROT
BOOLEAN
GRP1_A
STRING
GRP1_B
STRING
GRP1_C
STRING
GRP1_N
STRING
Table 591:
Name
Description
SPFCOUT
REAL
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
AIN
GROUP SIGNAL
Table 592:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block group 12
REVROT
BOOLEAN
GRP12_A
STRING
GRP12_B
STRING
GRP12_C
STRING
GRP12_N
STRING
764
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Table 593:
Name
17.9.5
Table 594:
Name
Type
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
AIN
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
SMAI_20_1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
DFTRefExtOut
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
765
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Table 595:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
DFTRefGrp2
DFTRefGrp3
DFTRefGrp4
DFTRefGrp5
DFTRefGrp6
DFTRefGrp7
DFTRefGrp8
DFTRefGrp9
DFTRefGrp10
DFTRefGrp11
DFTRefGrp12
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
ConnectionType
Ph-N
Ph-Ph
Ph-N
AnalogInputType
Voltage
Current
Voltage
Table 597:
Name
Unit
Step
Default
Description
Negation
Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
Disabled
Negation
MinValFreqMeas
5 - 200
10
766
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.9.6
Operation principle
Every SMAI can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value),
either voltage or current. The AnalogInputType setting should be set according to the
input connected. The signal received by SMAI is processed internally and in total 244
different electrical parameters are obtained for example RMS value, peak-to-peak,
frequency and so on. The activation of BLOCK input resets all outputs to 0.
SMAI_20 does all the calculation based on nominal 20 samples per line frequency
period, this gives a sample frequency of 1 kHz at 50 Hz nominal line frequency and 1.2
kHz at 60 Hz nominal line frequency.
The output signals AI1...AI4 in SMAI_20_x function block are direct outputs of the
connected input signals GRPx_A, GRPx_B, GRPx_C and GRPx_N. GRPx_N is always
the neutral current. If GRPx_N is not connected, the output AI4 is zero. The AIN
output is the calculated residual quantity, obtained as a sum of inputs GRPx_A,
GRPx_B and GRPx_C but is equal to output AI4 if GRPx_N is connected. The
outputs signal AI1, AI2, AI3 and AIN are normally connected to the analog
disturbance recorder.
The SMAI function block always calculates the residual quantities in
case only the three phases (Ph-N) are connected (GRPx_N input not used).
The output signal AI3P in the SMAI function block is a group output signal
containing all processed electrical information from inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B,
GRPx_C and GRPx_N. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected
to AI3P.
The input signal REVROT is used to reverse the phase order.
A few points need to be ensured for SMAI to process the analog signal correctly.
767
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
It is not mandatory to connect all the inputs of SMAI function. However, it is very
important that same set of three phase analog signals should be connected to one
SMAI function.
The sequence of input connected to SMAI function inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B,
GRPx_C and GRPx_N should normally represent phase A, phase B, phase C and
neutral currents respectively.
It is possible to connect analog signals available as Ph-N or Ph-Ph to SMAI.
ConnectionType should be set according to the input connected.
If the GRPx_N input is not connected and all three phase-to-ground inputs are
connected, SMAI calculates the neutral input on its own and it is available at the
AI3P and AIN outputs. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to PhN.
If any two phase-to-ground inputs and neutral currents are connected, SMAI
calculates the remaining third phase-to-neutral input on its own and it is available
at the AI3P output. It is necessary that the ConnectionType should be set to Ph-N.
If any two phase-to-phase inputs are connected, SMAI calculates the remaining
third phase-to-phase input on its own. It is necessary that the ConnectionType
should be set to Ph-Ph.
All three inputs GRPx_x should be connected to SMAI for calculating sequence
components for ConnectionType set to Ph-N.
At least two inputs GRPx_x should be connected to SMAI for calculating the
positive and negative sequence component for ConnectionType set to Ph-Ph.
Calculation of zero sequence requires GRPx_N input to be connected.
Negation setting inverts (reverse) the polarity of the analog input signal. It is
recommended that use of this setting is done with care, mistake in setting may lead
to maloperation of directional functions.
Frequency adaptivity
SMAI function performs DFT calculations for obtaining various electrical parameters.
DFT uses some reference frequency for performing calculations. For most of the cases,
these calculations are done using a fixed DFT reference based on system frequency.
However, if the frequency of the network is expected to vary more than 2 Hz from the
nominal frequency, more accurate DFT results can be obtained if the adaptive DFT is
used. This means that the frequency of the network is tracked and the DFT calculation
is adapted according to that.
DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference need to be set appropriately for adaptive DFT
calculations.
DFTRefExtOut: Setting valid only for the instance of function block SMAI_20_1. It
decides the reference block for external output SPFCOUT.
DFTReference: Reference DFT for the block. This setting decides DFT reference for
DFT calculations. DFTReference set to InternalDFTRef uses fixed DFT reference
768
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
based on the set system frequency. DFTReference set to DFTRefGrpX uses DFT
reference from the selected group block, when own group selected adaptive DFT
reference will be used based on the calculated signal frequency from own group.
DFTReference set to External DFT Ref will use reference based on input signal
DFTSPFC.
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value
InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. However, if it is
necessary to use frequency adaptive DFT (DFTReference set to other
than default, referring current measuring SMAI) when no voltages are
available, note that the MinValFreqMeas setting is still set in reference
to VBase (of the selected GBASVAL group). This means that the
minimum level for the current amplitude is based on VBase. For
example, if VBase is 20000, the resulting minimum amplitude for
current is 20000 * 10% = 2000.
MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is
calculated, expressed as percent of the voltage in the selected Global Base voltage
group (GBASVAL:n, where 1<n<6).
Below example shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference
selected for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the
actual application.
769
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
SMAI_20_1
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
REVROT
^GRP1_A
^GRP1_B
^GRP1_C
^GRP1_N
SMAI_20_1
SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
SMAI_20_1:1
SMAI_20_1:2
SMAI_20_2:1
SMAI_20_2:2
SMAI_20_3:1
SMAI_20_3:2
SMAI_20_4:1
SMAI_20_4:2
SMAI_20_5:1
5
6
SMAI_20_5:2
DFTRefGrp7 SMAI_20_6:2
SMAI_20_6:1
SMAI_20_7:1
SMAI_20_7:2
SMAI_20_8:1
SMAI_20_8:2
SMAI_20_9:1
SMAI_20_9:2
SMAI_20_10:1
10
SMAI_20_10:2
10
SMAI_20_11:1
11
SMAI_20_11:2
11
SMAI_20_12:1
12
SMAI_20_12:2
12
ANSI11000284-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000284 V1 EN
Figure 352:
Assume instance SMAI_20_7:1 in task time group 1 has been selected in the
configuration to control the frequency tracking (For the SMAI_20_x task time groups).
Note that the selected reference instance must be a voltage type.
For task time group 1 this gives the following settings:
For SMAI_20_1:1
DFTRefExtOut set to DFTRefGrp7 so as to route SMAI_20_7:1 reference to the
SPFCOUT output, DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as
reference.
For SMAI_20_2:1 to SMAI_20_12:1
DFTReference set to DFTRefGrp7 so that SMAI_20_7:1 is used as reference.
For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:
770
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.10
17.10.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
17.10.2
IEC 60617
identification
3PHSUM
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of threephase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
17.10.3
Function block
3PHSUM
BLOCK
REVROT
^G1AI3P*
^G2AI3P*
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC09000201_1_en.vsd
IEC09000201 V1 EN
Figure 353:
17.10.4
Signals
Table 598:
Name
Default
Description
BLOCK
BOOLEAN
Block
REVROT
BOOLEAN
Reverse rotation
G1AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
G2AI3P
GROUP
SIGNAL
771
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
Table 599:
Name
17.10.5
Table 600:
Name
Type
Description
AI3P
GROUP SIGNAL
AI1
GROUP SIGNAL
AI2
GROUP SIGNAL
AI3
GROUP SIGNAL
AI4
GROUP SIGNAL
Settings
3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
GlobalBaseSel
1-6
SummationType
Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)
Group1+Group2
Summation type
DFTReference
InternalDFTRef
DFTRefGrp1
External DFT ref
InternalDFTRef
DFT reference
Table 601:
Name
FreqMeasMinVal
17.10.6
Unit
%
Step
1
Default
10
Description
Magnitude limit for frequency calculation in %
of Vbase
Operation principle
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.
17.11
772
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.11.1
17.11.2
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
GBASVAL
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common
for all applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values
for current, voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have six different sets.
This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of
base values. This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single
point for updating values when necessary.
Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out
of the six sets of GBASVAL functions.
17.11.3
Table 602:
Name
Settings
GBASVAL Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
VBase
0.05 - 1000.00
kV
0.05
132.00
IBase
1 - 50000
1000
SBase
0.050 - 5000.000
MVA
0.001
229.000
17.12
17.12.1
Identification
Function description
Authority check
IEC 61850
identification
ATHCHCK
Description
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
773
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.12.2
Functionality
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization
handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with PCM600 IED user
management tool.
IEC12000202-1-en.vsd
IEC12000202 V1 EN
Figure 354:
17.12.3
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600).
774
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.12.4
Operation principle
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas
of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 603.
Table 603:
User type
Access rights
SystemOperator
ProtectionEngineer
All settings
DesignEngineer
UserAdministrator
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED,
there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and
passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 12.
17.12.4.1
775
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
If one or more users are created with the IED User Management and written to the
key or when the user
IED, then, when a user attempts a Log on by pressing the
attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window opens.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the
key, one can
change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down arrows.
After choosing the right user name, the user must press the
key
At successful Log on, the local HMI shows the new user name in the status bar at the
bottom of the LCD. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log
on has failed, an "Error Access Denied" message opens. If a user enters an incorrect
password three times, that user will be blocked for ten minutes before a new attempt to
log in can be performed. The user will be blocked from logging in, both from the local
HMI and PCM600. However, other users are to log in during this period.
17.13
17.13.1
Identification
Function description
Authority management
17.13.2
IEC 61850
identification
AUTHMAN
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
AUTHMAN
This function enables/disables the maintenance menu. It also controls the maintenance
menu log on time out.
776
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.13.3
Table 604:
Settings
AUTHMAN Non group settings (basic)
Name
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
MaintMenuEnable
No
Yes
Yes
AuthTimeout
10 Min
20 Min
30 Min
40 Min
50 Min
60 Min
10 Min
17.14
17.14.1
Identification
Function description
FTP access with SSL
17.14.2
IEC 61850
identification
FTPACCS
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
777
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.14.3
Table 605:
Name
Settings
FTPACCS Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Unit
Step
Default
Description
PortSelection
None
Front
LAN1
Front+LAN1
Front+LAN1
SSLMode
FTP+FTPS
FTPS
FTPS
TCPPortFTP
1 - 65535
21
TCPPortFTPS
1 - 65535
990
17.15
17.15.1
Identification
Function description
Authority status
17.15.2
IEC 61850
identification
ATHSTAT
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Functionality
Authority status ATHSTAT function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.
User denied attempt to log-on and user successful log-on are reported.
17.15.3
Function block
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC09000235_en_1.vsd
IEC09000235 V1 EN
Figure 355:
778
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.15.4
Signals
Table 606:
Name
17.15.5
Type
Description
USRBLKED
BOOLEAN
LOGGEDON
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
17.15.6
Operation principle
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and
the user authorization:
the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated.
17.16
Denial of service
17.16.1
Functionality
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) are designed to limit
overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The communication
facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality of the device.
All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy network loads
can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result of
malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.
779
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.16.2
17.16.2.1
Identification
Function description
IEC 61850
identification
17.16.2.2
IEC 60617
identification
DOSFRNT
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
Function block
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000133-1-en.vsd
IEC09000133 V1 EN
Figure 356:
17.16.2.3
Signals
Table 607:
Name
17.16.2.4
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
780
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.16.2.5
Monitored data
Table 608:
Name
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
State
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
IPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
NonIPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
NonIPPackDisc
INTEGER
17.16.3
17.16.3.1
Identification
Function description
Denial of service, frame rate control for
LAN1 port
17.16.3.2
IEC 61850
identification
DOSLAN1
IEC 60617
identification
-
ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-
Function block
DOSLAN1
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000134-1-en.vsd
IEC09000134 V1 EN
Figure 357:
781
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
17.16.3.3
Signals
Table 609:
Name
17.16.3.4
Type
Description
LINKUP
BOOLEAN
WARNING
BOOLEAN
ALARM
BOOLEAN
Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.
17.16.3.5
Monitored data
Table 610:
Name
17.16.4
Type
Values (Range)
Unit
Description
State
INTEGER
0=Off
1=Normal
2=Throttle
3=DiscardLow
4=DiscardAll
5=StopPoll
Quota
INTEGER
IPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in normal mode
IPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
received in polled mode
IPPackDisc
INTEGER
Number of IP packets
discarded
NonIPPackRecNorm
INTEGER
NonIPPackRecPoll
INTEGER
NonIPPackDisc
INTEGER
Operation principle
The Denial of service functions (DOSLAN1 and DOSFRNT) measures the IED load
from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control
and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following outputs:
782
Technical Manual
Section 17
Basic IED functions
783
Technical Manual
784
Section 18
IED physical connections
Section 18
18.1
ANSI11000286 V2 EN
Figure 358:
785
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
18.2
Inputs
18.2.1
Measuring inputs
Table 611:
Terminal
TRM
8I + 2U
TRM
4I + 1I + 5U
TRM
4I + 6U
X101-1, 2
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-3, 4
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-5, 6
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-7, 8
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
1/5A
X101-9, 10
1/5A
1/5A
0.1/0.5A
100/220V
X102-1, 2
1/5A
1/5A
100/220V
100/220V
X102-3, 4
100/220V
1/5A
100/220V
100/220V
X102-5, 6
100/220V
1/5A
100/220V
100/220V
X102-7, 8
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
X102-9, 10
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
100/220V
Table 612:
Terminal
AIM
4I + 1I + 5U
X103-1, 2
1/5A
1/5A
X103-3, 4
1/5A
1/5A
X103-5, 6
1/5A
1/5A
X103-7, 8
1/5A
1/5A
X103-9, 10
1/5A
0.1/0.5A
X104-1, 2
1/5A
100/220V
X104-3, 4
100/220V
100/220V
X104-5, 6
100/220V
100/220V
X104-7, 8
100/220V
100/220V
X104-9, 10
100/220V
100/220V
786
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
18.2.2
Case
Terminal
3U full 19
Table 614:
X420-3
+ Input
Terminal
3U full 19
Description
X420-1
- Input
X420-2
+ Input
Case
Terminal
3U full 19
18.2.3
- Input
Case
Table 615:
Description
X420-1
Description
X420-3
- Input
X420-2
+ Input
Binary inputs
The binary inputs can be used, for example, to generate a blocking signal, to unlatch
output contacts, to trigger the digital fault recorder or for remote control of IED
settings.
Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.
Table 616:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-1
X304-2
Binary input 1 +
COM_101
BI1
X304-3
Binary input 2 +
COM_101
BI2
X304-4
Binary input 3 +
COM_101
BI3
Section 18
IED physical connections
Terminal
Description
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X304-5
X304-6
Binary input 4 +
COM_101
BI4
X304-7
Binary input 5 +
COM_101
BI5
X304-8
Binary input 6 +
COM_101
BI6
X304-9
X304-10
Binary input 7 +
COM_101
BI7
X304-11
Binary input 8 +
COM_101
BI8
X304-12
Binary input 9 +
COM_101
BI9
X304-13
X304-14
Binary input 10 +
COM_101
BI10
X304-15
Binary input 11 +
COM_101
BI11
X304-16
Binary input 12 +
COM_101
BI12
Table 617:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X324-1
- for input 1
BIO_3
BI1
X324-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_3
BI1
X324-3
X324-4
X324-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_3
BI2
X324-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_3
BI3
X324-7
X324-8
X324-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_3
BI4
X324-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_3
BI5
X324-11
X324-12
X324-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_3
BI6
X324-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_3
BI7
X324-15
X324-16
X324-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_3
BI8
X324-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_3
BI9
788
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
Table 618:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X329-1
- for input 1
BIO_4
BI1
X329-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_4
BI1
X329-3
X329-4
X329-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_4
BI2
X329-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_4
BI3
X329-7
X329-8
X329-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_4
BI4
X329-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_4
BI5
X329-11
X329-12
X329-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_4
BI6
X329-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_4
BI7
X329-15
X329-16
X329-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_4
BI8
X329-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_4
BI9
Table 619:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X334-1
- for input 1
BIO_5
BI1
X334-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_5
BI1
X334-3
X334-4
X334-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_5
BI2
X334-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_5
BI3
X334-7
X334-8
X334-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_5
BI4
X334-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_5
BI5
Section 18
IED physical connections
Terminal
Description
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X334-11
X334-12
X334-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_5
BI6
X334-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_5
BI7
X334-15
X334-16
X334-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_5
BI8
X334-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_5
BI9
Table 620:
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X339-1
- for input 1
BIO_6
BI1
X339-2
Binary input 1 +
BIO_6
BI1
X339-3
X339-4
X339-5
Binary input 2 +
BIO_6
BI2
X339-6
Binary input 3 +
BIO_6
BI3
X339-7
X339-8
X339-9
Binary input 4 +
BIO_6
BI4
X339-10
Binary input 5 +
BIO_6
BI5
X339-11
X339-12
X339-13
Binary input 6 +
BIO_6
BI6
X339-14
Binary input 7 +
BIO_6
BI7
X339-15
X339-16
X339-17
Binary input 8 +
BIO_6
BI8
X339-18
Binary input 9 +
BIO_6
BI9
790
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
18.3
Outputs
18.3.1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X317-2
PSM_102
BO1_PO_TCM
PSM_102
BO2_PO_TCM
PSM_102
BO3_PO_TCM
X317-4
+
Power output 3, normally open (TCM)
X317-5
X317-6
X317-7
PSM_102
BO4_PO
PSM_102
BO5_PO
PSM_102
BO6_PO
X317-8
X317-9
X317-10
X317-11
X317-12
791
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
Table 622:
Terminal
X321-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_3
BO1_PO
BIO_3
BO2_PO
BIO_3
BO3_PO
X321-2
X321-3
X321-4
X321-5
X321-6
Table 623:
Terminal
X326-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_4
BO1_PO
BIO_4
BO2_PO
BIO_4
BO3_PO
X326-2
X326-3
X326-4
X326-5
X326-6
Table 624:
Terminal
X331-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_5
BO1_PO
BIO_5
BO2_PO
BIO_5
BO3_PO
X331-2
X331-3
X331-4
X331-5
X331-6
792
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
Table 625:
Terminal
X336-1
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_6
BO1_PO
BIO_6
BO2_PO
BIO_6
BO3_PO
X336-2
X336-3
X336-4
X336-5
X336-6
18.3.2
X317-13
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
PSM_102
BO7_SO
PSM_102
BO8_SO
PSM_102
BO9_SO
X317-14
X317-15
X317-16
X317-17
X317-18
Table 627:
Terminal
X321-7
X321-8
Signal output 1
X321-9
X321-10
Signal output 2
X321-11
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_3
BO4_SO
BIO_3
BO5_SO
BIO_3
BO6_SO
Section 18
IED physical connections
Terminal
Description
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X321-12
Signal output 3
X321-13
BIO_3
BO7_SO
X321-14
BIO_3
BO8_SO
X321-15
X321-16
BIO_3
BO9_SO
X321-17
X321-18
Table 628:
Terminal
X326-7
X326-8
Signal output 1
X326-9
X326-10
Signal output 2
X326-11
X326-12
Signal output 3
X326-13
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_4
BO4_SO
BIO_4
BO5_SO
BIO_4
BO6_SO
BIO_4
BO7_SO
X326-14
BIO_4
BO8_SO
X326-15
X326-16
BIO_4
BO9_SO
X326-17
X326-18
Table 629:
Terminal
X331-7
X331-8
Signal output 1
X331-9
X331-10
Signal output 2
X331-11
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_5
BO4_SO
BIO_5
BO5_SO
BIO_5
BO6_SO
794
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
Terminal
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
X331-12
Signal output 3
X331-13
BIO_5
BO7_SO
X331-14
BIO_5
BO8_SO
X331-15
X331-16
BIO_5
BO9_SO
X331-17
X331-18
Table 630:
Terminal
18.3.3
Description
X336-7
X336-8
Signal output 1
X336-9
X336-10
Signal output 2
X336-11
X336-12
Signal output 3
X337-13
PCM600 info
Hardware module
Hardware channel
instance
BIO_6
BO4_SO
BIO_6
BO5_SO
BIO_6
BO6_SO
BIO_6
BO7_SO
X336-14
BIO_6
BO8_SO
X336-15
X336-16
BIO_6
BO9_SO
X336-17
X336-18
IRF
The IRF contact functions as a change-over output contact for the self-supervision
system of the IED. Under normal operating conditions, the IED is energized and one of
the two contacts is closed. When a fault is detected by the self-supervision system or
the auxiliary voltage is disconnected, the closed contact drops off and the other contact
closes.
Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire.
795
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
Table 631:
Case
3U full 19
18.4
Description
X319-1
X319-2
X319-3
IRF, common
Communication connections
The IED's LHMI is provided with an RJ-45 connector. The connector is intended for
configuration and setting purposes.
Rear communication via the X1/LAN1 connector uses a communication module with
the optical LC Ethernet connection.
The HMI connector X0 is used for connecting an external HMI to the IED. The X0/
HMI connector must not be used for any other purpose.
Rear communication via the X8/EIA-485/IRIG-B connector uses a communication
module with the galvanic EIA-485 serial connection.
18.4.1
PCM600
LHMI
796
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
18.4.2
18.4.3
18.4.4
EIA-485 connections
Description
GNDC
GND
RS485 RXTERM
RS485 RX-
RS485 RX+
RS485 TX+
RS485 RXTERM
RS485 TX-
RS485 GND
10
RS485 GND
11
IRIG-B -
12
IRIG-B +
13
GNDC
14
GND
797
Technical Manual
Section 18
IED physical connections
18.4.5
Serial
Glass fibre (ST connector)
EIA-485
IEC 6185081
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
= Supported
18.4.6
18.5
Connection diagrams
The connection diagrams are delivered on the IED Connectivity package DVD as part
of the product delivery.
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be downloaded from
http://www.abb.com/substationautomation.
Connection diagrams for Customized products
Connection diagram, 650 series 1.3 1MRK006502-AD
Connection diagrams for Configured products
Connection diagram, REL650 1.3, (3Ph/1CB) A01A 1MRK006502-HD
Connection diagram, REL650 1.3, (1Ph/1CB) A11A 1MRK006502-KD
Connection diagram, REL650 1.3, (3Ph/2CB) B01A 1MRK006502-UD
798
Technical Manual
Section 19
Technical data
Section 19
Technical data
19.1
Dimensions
Table 634:
Description
19.2
Value
Width
Height
Depth
Weight box
Power supply
Table 635:
Power supply
Description
Vn
600PSM01
24, 30 V DC
600PSM02
48, 60, 110, 125 V DC
600PSM03
100, 110, 120, 220, 240
V AC, 50 and 60 Hz
110, 125, 220, 250 V DC
Vnvariation
80...120% of Vn
(24...30 V DC)
80...120% of Vn
(38.4...150 V DC)
85...110% of Vn
(85...264 V AC)
80...120% of Vn
(88...300 V DC)
Maximum load of
auxiliary voltage supply
35 W for DC
40 VA for AC
Max 15% of the DC value (at frequency of 100 and 120 Hz)
Maximum interruption
time in the auxiliary DC
voltage without resetting
the IED
50 ms at Vn
799
Technical Manual
Section 19
Technical data
19.3
Energizing inputs
Table 636:
Energizing inputs
Description
Value
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Operating range
Rated frequency 5 Hz
Current inputs
Rated current, In
0.1/0.5 A1)
1/5 A2)
Continuously
4A
20 A
For 1 s
100 A
500 A *)
For 10 s
20 A
100 A
250 A
1250 A
Input impedance
<100 m
<20 m
Rated voltage, Vn
Voltage inputs
Half-wave value
Voltage withstand:
Continuous
420 V rms
For 10 s
450 V rms
<0.05 VA
19.4
Binary inputs
Table 637:
Binary inputs
Description
Value
Operating range
Rated voltage
24...250 V DC
Current drain
1.6...1.8 mA
Power consumption/input
<0.38 W
Threshold voltage
800
Technical Manual
Section 19
Technical data
19.5
Signal outputs
Table 638:
Description
19.6
Value
Rated voltage
250 V AC/DC
5A
10 A
30 A
Power outputs
Table 639:
Description
Value
Rated voltage
250 V AC/DC
8A
15 A
30 A
1 A/0.3 A/0.1 A
Table 640:
Description
Value
Rated voltage
250 V DC
8A
15 A
30 A
1 A/0.3 A/0.1 A
20...250 V DC
~1.0 mA
20 V DC
801
Technical Manual
Section 19
Technical data
19.7
Ethernet interfaces
Ethernet interface
Protocol
Cable
100BASE-TX
100 MBits/s
100BASE-FX
TCP/IP protocol
100 MBits/s
Table 642:
Wave length
1300 nm
Connector
LC
Permitted path
attenuation1)
<8 dB
Distance
2 km
Table 643:
Type
Protocol
Cable
Tension clamp
connection
IRIG-B
Tension clamp
connection
IEC 680705103
DNP3.0
Table 644:
IRIG-B
Type
Value
Accuracy
Input impedance
430 Ohm
4.3 V
0.8 V
802
Technical Manual
Section 19
Technical data
Table 645:
EIA-485 interface
Type
Value
Conditions
Minimum differential
driver output voltage
1.5 V
60 mA
Minimum differential
receiver input voltage
0.2 V
Maximum number of
650 IEDs supported on
the same bus
32
Table 646:
Type
Counter connector
Table 647:
Wave length
Connector
820 nm
MM 62,5/125 m
glass fibre core
ST
820 nm
MM 50/125 m
glass fibre core
ST
19.8
Enclosure class
803
Technical Manual
Section 19
Technical data
19.9
Ingress protection
Table 648:
19.10
Ingress protection
Description
Value
IED front
IP 54
IED rear
IP 21
IED sides
IP 42
IED top
IP 42
IED bottom
IP 21
Environmental conditions
Description
Value
-25...+55C (continuous)
-40...+70C (<16h)
Note: Degradation in MTBF and HMI performance
outside the temperature range of -25...+55C
Relative humidity
<93%, non-condensing
Atmospheric pressure
Altitude
-40...+85C
Table 650:
Environmental tests
Description
Cold tests
Reference
operation
96 h at -25C
16 h at -40C
IEC 60068-2-1/ANSI
C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)
storage
96 h at -40C
operation
16 h at +70C
storage
96 h at +85C
steady state
240 h at +40C
humidity 93%
IEC 60068-2-78
cyclic
IEC 60068-2-30
IEC 60068-2-2/ANSI
C37.90-2005 (chapter 4)
804
Technical Manual
Section 20
IED and functionality tests
Section 20
20.1
Description
Reference
IEC 61000-4-18, level 3
IEC 60255-22-1
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
Common mode
2.5 kV
Differential mode
2.5 kV
Contact discharge
8 kV
Air discharge
15 kV
Radiated, amplitudemodulated
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4, class A
ANSI C37.90.1-2012
Communication ports
4 kV
Other ports
4 kV
IEC 61000-4-5
IEC 60255-22-5
Communication
1 kV line-to-ground
Other ports
2 kV line-to-ground, 1 kV line-toline
Power supply
4 kV line-to-ground, 2 kV line-toline
Section 20
IED and functionality tests
Description
Reference
IEC 61000-4-8, level 5
3s
1000 A/m
Continuous
100 A/m
1000A/m
Common mode
300 V rms
Differential mode
150 V rms
Dips:
40%/200 ms
70%/500 ms
Interruptions:
0-50 ms: No restart
0... s : Correct behaviour at
power down
IEC 60255-11
IEC 61000-4-11
Dips:
40% 10/12 cycles at 50/60 Hz
70% 25/30 cycles at 50/60 Hz
Interruptions:
050 ms: No restart
0... s: Correct behaviour at
power down
IEC 6025511
IEC 61000411
EN 55011, class A
IEC 60255-25
ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted, RF-emission
(mains terminal)
0.15...0.50 MHz
0.5...30 MHz
Radiated RF-emission,
ANSI
30 88 MHz
806
Technical Manual
Section 20
IED and functionality tests
Description
20.2
88 216 MHz
Insulation tests
Table 652:
Insulation tests
Description
Dielectric tests:
Test voltage
Test voltage
IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
5 kV, unipolar impulses,
waveform 1.2/50 s, source
energy 0.5 J
1 kV, unipolar impulses,
waveform 1.2/50 s, source
energy 0.5 J, communication
Insulation resistance
measurements
Isolation resistance
IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
>100 M, 500 V DC
Reference
IEC 60255-5
ANSI C37.90-2005
20.3
Reference
Resistance
IEC 60255-27
<0.1 (60 s)
Mechanical tests
Table 653:
Mechanical tests
Description
Reference
Requirement
IEC 60255-21-1
Class 1
IEC60255-21-1
Class 1
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
807
Technical Manual
Section 20
IED and functionality tests
Description
20.4
Reference
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
Bump test
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
Seismic test
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 2
Product safety
Table 654:
Product safety
Description
20.5
Requirement
Reference
LV directive
2006/95/EC
Standard
EN 60255-27 (2005)
EMC compliance
Table 655:
Description
EMC compliance
Reference
EMC directive
2004/108/EC
Standard
EN 50263 (2000)
EN 60255-26 (2007)
808
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
Section 21
21.1
Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections in different
points in the network different time delays for the different relays are normally used.
The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In more sophisticated
applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are
shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections connected in series.
IPickup
IPickup
IPickup
xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN
Figure 359:
Time
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 1
Stage 1
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN
Figure 360:
809
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN
Figure 361:
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
810
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A1
B1
51
51
Feeder
Time axis
t=0
t=t1
t=t2
t=t3
en05000132_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000132 V1 EN
Figure 362:
where:
t=0
t=t1
is Protection B1 trips
t=t2
is Breaker at B1 opens
t=t3
is Protection A1 resets
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time
t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its
delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between
the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the
B1 circuit breaker.
At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault
current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults. The
maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at t2 the
timer of protection A1 is active.
At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible
when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of
delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:
811
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, picks
up and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.
21.2
Operation principle
21.2.1
Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available.
If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value , a timer, according to the
selected operating mode, is started. The component always uses the maximum of the
three phase current values as the current level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached
or until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and
the reset time has elapsed.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 115.
A
t [s ] =
P
Pickupn
-C
+ B td
(Equation 115)
EQUATION1640 V1 EN
where:
p, A, B, C
Pickupn
td
812
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:
( top - B td ) Pickupn
-C
= A td
(Equation 116)
EQUATION1642 V1 EN
where:
top
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 117, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
Pickupn
0
- C dt A td
(Equation 117)
EQUATION1643 V1 EN
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
i ( j ) P
A td
C
Pickupn
j =1
Dt
(Equation 118)
EQUATION1644 V1 EN
where:
j=1
i
Pickupn
>1
EQUATION1646 V1 EN
Dt
is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and
i (j)
For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
813
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 363.
Operate
time
tMin
IMin
Current
IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN
Figure 363:
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 120:
814
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
td
t [s ] =
0.339 - 0.235 Pickupn
i
(Equation 120)
EQUATION1647 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td
The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The
curve is described by equation 121:
[ ]
t s = 5.8 - 1.35 ln
td Pickupn
(Equation 121)
EQUATION1648 V1 EN
where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td
The timer will be reset directly when the current drops below the set pickup current
level minus the hysteresis.
21.3
815
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
Table 656:
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
A
P
( I - 1)
Accuracy
-
+ B td
EQUATION1651 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse
Table 657:
Function
Range or value
Operating characteristic:
t =
Accuracy
-
A
P
td
( I - 1)
EQUATION1653 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse
A=0.14, P=0.02
A=80.0, P=2.0
A=0.05, P=0.04
A=120, P=1.0
816
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
Table 658:
Function
Range or value
t =
0.339 -
0.236
Accuracy
td
EQUATION1656 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
t = 5.8 - 1.35 In
td
I
EQUATION1657 V1 EN
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 659:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
Accuracy
5% +60 ms
td
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
2.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1662 V1 EN
Type C curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1663 V1 EN
817
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
Table 660:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
Accuracy
5% +60 ms
td
VPickup - V
VPickup
EQUATION1658 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480
VPickup - V
32
VPickup
- 0.5
2.0
+ 0.055
EQUATION1659 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Table 661:
Function
Range or value
Type A curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
Accuracy
5% +70 ms
td
V - VPickup
VPickup
EQUATION1661 V1 EN
V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
2.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1662 V1 EN
Type C curve:
t =
td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480
V - VPickup
- 0.5
32
VPickup
3.0
- 0.035
EQUATION1663 V1 EN
818
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070750 V2 EN
Figure 364:
819
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070751 V2 EN
Figure 365:
820
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070752 V2 EN
Figure 366:
821
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070753 V2 EN
Figure 367:
822
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070817 V2 EN
Figure 368:
823
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070818 V2 EN
Figure 369:
824
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070819 V2 EN
Figure 370:
825
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070820 V2 EN
Figure 371:
826
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070821 V2 EN
Figure 372:
827
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070822 V2 EN
Figure 373:
828
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070823 V2 EN
Figure 374:
829
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070824 V2 EN
Figure 375:
830
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070825 V2 EN
Figure 376:
831
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070826 V2 EN
Figure 377:
832
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
A070827 V2 EN
Figure 378:
833
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN
Figure 379:
834
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN
Figure 380:
835
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN
Figure 381:
836
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN
Figure 382:
837
Technical Manual
Section 21
Time inverse characteristics
GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN
Figure 383:
838
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
Section 22
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
ACT
A/D converter
Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS
AI
Analog input
ANSI
AR
Autoreclosing
ASCT
ASD
AWG
BI
Binary input
BOS
BR
BS
British Standards
CAN
CB
Circuit breaker
CCITT
CCVT
Class C
CMPPS
CMT
CO cycle
Close-open cycle
Codirectional
839
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
COMTRADE
Contra-directional
CPU
CR
Carrier receive
CRC
CROB
CS
Carrier send
CT
Current transformer
CVT or CCVT
DAR
Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA
DBDL
DBLL
DC
Direct current
DFC
DFT
DHCP
DIP-switch
DI
Digital input
DLLB
DNP
DR
Disturbance recorder
DRAM
DRH
DSP
DTT
EHV network
EIA
840
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
Electromotive force
EMI
Electromagnetic interference
EnFP
EPA
ESD
Electrostatic discharge
FCB
FOX 20
FOX 512/515
Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus
G.703
GCM
GDE
GI
GIS
Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE
GPS
GSAL
HDLC protocol
HFBR connector
type
HMI
Human-machine interface
HSAR
HV
High-voltage
HVDC
IDBS
IEC
841
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
IEC 60044-6
IEC 61850
IEC 6185081
IEEE
IEEE 802.12
IEEE P1386.1
IEEE 1686
IED
I-GIS
Instance
IP
IP 20
IP 40
Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP40Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.
IP 54
IRF
842
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
IRIG-B:
ITU
LAN
LIB 520
LCD
LDD
LED
Light-emitting diode
MCB
MCM
MVB
NCC
OCO cycle
Open-close-open cycle
OCP
Overcurrent protection
OLTC
OV
Over-voltage
Overreach
PCI
PCM
PCM600
PC-MIP
PMC
POR
Permissive overreach
POTT
Process bus
Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity
to the measured and/or controlled components
PSM
PST
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
PT ratio
PUTT
RASC
RCA
RFPP
RISC
RMS value
RS422
RS485
RTC
Real-time clock
RTU
SA
Substation Automation
SBO
Select-before-operate
SC
SCS
SCADA
SCT
SDU
SMA connector
SMT
SMS
SNTP
SRY
ST
Starpoint
SVC
844
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
TC
Trip coil
TCS
TCP
TCP/IP
TNC connector
UMT
Underreach
UTC
UV
Undervoltage
WEI
VT
Voltage transformer
845
Technical Manual
Section 22
Glossary
X.21
3IO
3VO
846
Technical Manual
847
ABB Inc.
1021 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Phone
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8
ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Phone
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8
Contact us